Agilent Technologies 85422E RF Section, 85462A RF Section EMI Receiver Service Guide

Notice
Hewlett-Packard to Agilent Technologies Transition
This documentation supports a product that previously shipped under the HewlettPackard company brand name. The brand name has now been changed to Agilent
Technologies. The two products are functionally identical, only our name has changed. The
document still includes references to Hewlett-Packard products, some of which have been
transitioned to Agilent Technologies.
Printed in USA
March 2000
Contacting Agilent
By internet, phone, or fax, get assistance with all your test and measurement needs.
Table 1-1 Contacting Agilent
Online assistance: www.agilent.com/find/assist
United States
(tel) 1 800 452 4844
Latin America
(tel) (305) 269 7500
(fax) (305) 269 7599
Canada
(tel) 1 877 894 4414
(fax) (905) 282-6495
New Zealand
(tel) 0 800 738 378
(fax) (+64) 4 495 8950
Japan
(tel) (+81) 426 56 7832
(fax) (+81) 426 56 7840
Australia
(tel) 1 800 629 485
(fax) (+61) 3 9210 5947
Asia Call Center Numbers
Country
Phone Number
Fax Number
Singapore
1-800-375-8100
(65) 836-0252
Malaysia
1-800-828-848
1-800-801664
Philippines
(632) 8426802
1-800-16510170 (PLDT
Subscriber Only)
(632) 8426809
1-800-16510288 (PLDT
Subscriber Only)
Thailand
(088) 226-008 (outside Bangkok)
(662) 661-3999 (within Bangkok)
(66) 1-661-3714
Hong Kong
800-930-871
(852) 2506 9233
Taiwan
0800-047-866
(886) 2 25456723
People’s Republic
of China
800-810-0189 (preferred)
10800-650-0021
10800-650-0121
India
1-600-11-2929
000-800-650-1101
Europe
(tel) (+31) 20 547 2323
(fax) (+31) 20 547 2390
Service Guide
Agilent Technologies
85422E and 85462A EMI Receiver RF Section
Part Number: 5962-5084
Printed in USA
April 1999
© Copyright 1999 Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including
but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and tness for a particular
purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
c Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1994, 1999
All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission
is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway, Santa Rosa CA, 95403-1799, USA
Certication
Hewlett-Packard Company certies that this product met its published specications at the
time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further certies that its calibration
measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility, and to the calibration
facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
Regulatory Information
Regulatory information is located in the EMI Receiver Series Reference at the end of Chapter 1,
\Specications and Characteristics."
Warranty
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and
workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period,
Hewlett-Packard Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to
be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by
Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett-Packard and Hewlett-Packard
shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all
shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Hewlett-Packard from another
country.
Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and rmware designated by Hewlett-Packard for
use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on
that instrument. Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or
software, or rmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Limitation of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate
maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modication or
misuse, operation outside of the environmental specications for the product, or improper
site preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exclusive Remedies
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT,
OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
iii
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for
Hewlett-Packard products. For any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and
Service Oce.
Compliance
This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 348, Safety
Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus, and has been supplied in a safe condition.
The instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by
the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition.
Safety Notes
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with each of
the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument.
WARNING
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life.
Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are
fully understood and met.
CAUTION
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, would result in damage to or destruction
of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
iv
General Safety Considerations
WARNING
These servicing instructions are for use by qualied personnel only. To
avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are
qualied to do so.
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous
voltages. Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is
being opened.
Protective earth ground on this equipment must be maintained to
provide protection from electric shock.
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing
ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be
inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact.
Any interruption of the protective conductor, inside or outside the
instrument, is likely to make the instrument dangerous. Intentional
interruption is prohibited.
The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live
for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply.
For continued protection against re hazard, replace line fuse only with
same type and rating ([F 5A/250V]). The use of other fuses or material is
prohibited.
No user serviceable parts are inside this instrument. The cathode-ray
tube is dangerous to handle. Refer servicing to qualied personnel.
X-rays generated by this instrument are suciently screened.
Die in dieswem gerat entstehende rontgenstrahlung ist ausreichend
abgeschirmt.
Acell. Voltage/Besehl. SPG<20kV
CAUTION
Before switching on this instrument, make sure that the line voltage selector
switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is
installed.
For continued protection against re hazard, replace the fuse only with a
fuse of the same type and rating.
Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this instrument.
Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause
instrument damage.
Equipment damage may result from incorrect usage.
Both metric and inch hardware are used in this instrument.
Only clean the instrument cabinet using a damp cloth.
v
L
CE
ISM1-A
CSA
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with this
symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the
documentation.
The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. (If
accompanied by a year, it is when the design was proven.)
This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientic and Medical Group 1 Class A product.
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
Manual Conventions
Front-Panel Key5 This represents a key physically located on the instrument.
This indicates a \softkey," a key whose label is determined by the rmware of
Softkey
the instrument.
Screen Text This indicates text displayed on the instrument's screen.
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
vi
EMI Receiver Series Documentation Description
The following documents are provided with either the EMI receiver or the receiver RF section.
Installation and Verication provides information for installing your instrument, verifying
instrument operation, and customer support.
User's Guide describes instrument features and how to make measurements with your EMI
receiver or receiver RF section.
Reference provides specications and characteristics, menu maps, error messages, and key
descriptions.
Programmer's Guide provides information on remote control instrument conguration,
creating programs, and parameters for each of the programming commands available.
vii
Contents
1. Introduction
Service Guide Organization . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Revision Date . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Upgrade Kit Ordering Information . .
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reliability Considerations . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Input Protection . . . . . . . . .
Protection from Electrostatic Discharge . . . .
Handling of Electronic Components and ESD
Test Equipment Usage and ESD . . . . . . .
For Additional Information about ESD . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
2. Making Adjustments
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment you will need . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If there are abnormal indications during adjustment . . .
Periodically verifying calibration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard-value replacement components . . . . . . . .
If you replace or repair an assembly . . . . . . . . . .
When running software tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the instrument for adjustments . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting the HP 85420E / HP 85460A preselector .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sampler Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 MHz Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter . . . . . . . . . .
Cal Attenuator Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log and Linear Amplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL AMP Adjustment Routine . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL YTF Adjustment Routine . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL MXR Adjustment Routine . . . . . . . . . . .
Third Converter and Second IF Bandpass . . . . . .
Absolute Amplitude Calibration . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration . . . . . . . .
Flatness Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREAMP Flatness Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First LO Distribution Amplier . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Generator Power Level . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-12
2-14
2-17
2-23
2-24
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-33
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-44
2-48
Contents-1
3. Troubleshooting the Instrument
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service equipment you will need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After a repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems at Instrument Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1. Check the Instrument Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2. Check the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the line fuse has blown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the fan is not operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If all the A16 power-supply LEDs are o . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If individual A16 power-supply LEDs are o . . . . . . . . . . . .
If all the A16 power-supply LEDs are on . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Using Defaults <N> is displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the A2 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the display has an intensity problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolating an RF, LO, IF, or Video Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for Isolating an RF, LO, IF, or Video Failure . . . . . . . .
If there is only a horizontal trace with no signal or noise oor present
If the instrument displays a low signal level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the instrument displays a high noise oor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the displayed signal amplitude appears too high . . . . . . . . . .
If the displayed signal is distorted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the signal is o frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the signal is o frequency in spans <10 MHz only . . . . . . . . .
If the signal displays in low band only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If a at line appears at mid screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If a service-diagnostic routine fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the displayed calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the 2 V reference detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the ground reference detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the main coil driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the FM coil driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the FM coil driver for spans >10 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the sweep ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the 10 V reference detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the 010 V reference detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the YTF driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the A24 Processor Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
If the LED power-on sequence is not operational . . . . . . . . . .
If a signal cannot be displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the instrument does not respond (locked up) . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a Free-Run Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-30
3-30
3-31
3-31
4. Troubleshooting the IF Section
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service equipment you will need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After an instrument repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Section Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Power-Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To set up the instrument for an IF power-level measurement . . . . . . . .
To check the gains for the IF assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To measure the IF signal from the A9 third converter board . . . . . . . .
To inject a signal at the output of the A11 bandwidth lter board . . . . . .
To inject a signal at the output of the A13 bandwidth lter board . . . . . .
To check bandwidth control lines for the A11 and A13 bandwidth lter board
To check IF section gain control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control lines for the A12 amplitude control board . . . . . . . . . . . .
To check linear gain control lines for the A14 log amplier board . . . . .
Troubleshooting IF Overload Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
5. Troubleshooting the RF Section
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service equipment you will need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After an instrument repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the RF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making RF Power-Level Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Pin-Out Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preamplier Section Switch Pin-Out Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preamplier Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIEW CAL ON OFF Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To check control of the A3A4 input attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To check the A4A10 tracking generator operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the output goes unleveled (TG UNLVL message displayed) . . . . . . .
To check excessive residual FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If atness is out of tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If vernier accuracy is out of tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If harmonic/spurious outputs are too high . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If power sweep is not functioning properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If there is no output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To check the A4A7 local oscillator distribution amplier (LODA) operation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
6. Replacing Major Assemblies
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service equipment you will need . . . . . . . . .
After a repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and Replacement Procedures in this Chapter
1. Instrument Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. RF Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. A1 Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
4. A1A1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. A26 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. A16 Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
7. B1 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. A24 Processor Board Assembly . . . . . . . .
9. A24 Processor Board Assembly ROMs . . . . .
10. A25 Graphics Processor Board . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-7
6-10
6-12
6-14
6-16
6-18
6-20
6-21
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents-3
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
BT1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board . . . . . . . . . . . .
A2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly . . . . .
A15 Motherboard/IF Section Assembly . . . . .
A21 Disk Drive Controller Board . . . . . . . .
A19 Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A20 10 MHz Precision Reference . . . . . . . .
A23 Counter Lock Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
A5 Analog Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . .
A3 Preamplier Section/A4 RF Section Assembly
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-23
6-25
6-27
6-30
6-32
6-34
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-40
6-42
7. Customer Support
If You Have a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling HP Sales and Service Oces . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your EMI Receiver Does Not Turn On . . . . . . .
If the RF Filter Section Does Not Seem to be Working
If the EMI Receiver Cannot Communicate Via HP-IB .
Verication of Proper Operation . . . . . . . . . .
If the RF lter section Does Not Power O . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAX Support Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning the EMI Receiver for Service . . . . . . . .
Package the EMI receiver for shipment . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-5
7-5
8. Assembly Descriptions
RF and LO Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Section Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3A2 Preamplier . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A4A10 Tracking Generator . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upconverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pentupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Amplier . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bias Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A8 Tracking Generator Control Board . . .
A4A7 First LO Distribution Amplier (LODA)
LO Section Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . .
A9 Third Converter Assembly . . . . . . .
A23 Counterlock Assembly . . . . . . . . .
IF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Section Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . .
A11 Bandwidth Filter . . . . . . . . . . .
A12 Amplitude Control . . . . . . . . . .
A13 Bandwidth Filter . . . . . . . . . . .
A14 Log Amplier . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A24 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A25 Graphics Processor Board . . . . . . .
A5 Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-10
Contents-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A16 Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
A6 Narrow Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A7 Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/Average Detector Board .
A2 Color Display and A17 Graphic Signal Processor .
A21 Disk Drive Controller Board . . . . . . . . . .
A19 Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-13
9. Major Assembly and Cable Locations
10. Replaceable Parts
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Mail-Order System . . . . . . . . .
Direct Phone-Order System . . . . . . . .
Regular Orders . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hotline Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard-Value Replacement Components . .
Assembly-Level Replaceable Parts and Cables
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 10-2
. 10-2
. 10-2
. 10-2
. 10-2
. 10-7
. 10-12
11. Service Softkey Descriptions
Calibration, Service, and Diagnostic Softkey Functions
4CALIBRATE5 Softkey Organization . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Instrument Passcodes . . . . . . . .
037 Hz passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02001 Hz passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering A Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Correction Data . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Calibration Correction Factors . . . . . . . .
Service-Calibration Correction Constants . . . . .
Lock ON OFF Phase Lock On/O . . . . . . . . .
+10 V REF DETECTOR +10 V Reference Detector . .
010 V REF DETECTOR 010 V Reference Detector . .
2v REF DETECTOR 2 V Reference Detector . . . . .
CAL 85422 Calibrate HP 85422 . . . . . . . . . .
CAL 85462 Calibrate HP 85462 . . . . . . . . . .
CAL ALL Calibrate All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL AMP Calibrate Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL FETCH Calibration Fetch . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL FREQ Calibrate Frequency . . . . . . . . . . .
4CALIBRATE5 Calibration Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL INPUT 1 Calibrate Input 1 . . . . . . . . . .
CAL INPUT 2 Calibrate Input 2 . . . . . . . . . .
CAL MXR Calibrate Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL STORE Calibration Store . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL TIMEBASE Calibrate Timebase . . . . . . . . .
CAL TRK GEN Calibrate Tracking Generator . . . . .
CAL YTF Calibrate YTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COARSE TUNE DAC Coarse Tune DAC . . . . . . . .
CORRECT ON OFF Correction On/O . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-1
11-1
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-4
11-4
11-5
11-5
11-5
11-6
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-7
11-9
11-9
11-11
11-11
11-12
11-12
11-13
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-15
11-15
Contents-5
DACS DACs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFAULT CAL DATA Default Calibration Data . . . . . .
DISPLAY CAL DATA Display Calibration Data . . . . . .
Display Sys Data Display System Data . . . . . . . .
DROOP Droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDIT FLATNESS Edit Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDIT PA FLTNESS Edit Preamplier Flatness . . . . . .
EXECUTE TITLE Execute Title . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXIT Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINE TUNE DAC Fine Tune DAC . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLATNESS DATA Flatness Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM COIL DRIVE FM Coil Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM GAIN FM Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM OFFSET FM Oset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM SPAN FM Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FREQ DIAG Frequency Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . .
FRQ DISC NORM OFF Frequency Discriminator Normal/O
GND REF DETECTOR Ground-Reference Detector . . . . .
IDNUM Identication Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF GAINS Intermediate Frequency Gain Settings . . . .
INIT FLT Initialize Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT 1 Input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT 1 PREAMP Input 1 Preamplier . . . . . . . . .
INPUT 2 Input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT 2 PREAMP Input 2 Preamplier . . . . . . . . .
MAIN COIL DR Main-Coil Drive . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIN SPAN Main Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIXER BIAS DAC Mixer-Bias DAC . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESEL DAC Preselector DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QP DET ON OFF Quasi-Peak Detector On/O . . . . . .
QP GAIN ON OFF Quasi-Peak GAIN On/O . . . . . . .
QPD OFFSET Quasi-Peak Detector Oset . . . . . . . .
QPD RST ON OFF Quasi-Peak Detector Reset On/O . . .
Service Cal Service Calibration . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Diag Service Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . .
SET ATTN ERROR Set Attenuator Error . . . . . . . . .
STORE FLATNESS Store Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOR PWR ON UNITS Store Power-On Units . . . . . . .
STP GAIN ZERO Step-Gain Zero . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWEEP RAMP Sweep Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Contents-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-16
11-18
11-19
11-22
11-23
11-23
11-24
11-24
11-24
11-24
11-25
11-25
11-26
11-27
11-29
11-30
11-31
11-32
11-32
11-32
11-33
11-33
11-33
11-33
11-34
11-34
11-35
11-35
11-36
11-36
11-36
11-37
11-37
11-37
11-37
11-38
11-39
11-40
11-40
11-40
SWEEP TIME DAC Sweep-Time DAC . . .
X FINE TUNE DAC Extra-Fine Tune DAC
YTF DRIVER YTF Driver . . . . . . . .
YTF SPAN YTF Span . . . . . . . . . .
YTF TUNE COARSE YTF Tune Coarse . .
YTF TUNE FINE YTF Tune Fine . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-41
11-41
11-42
11-43
11-43
11-44
12. Instrument Messages
Interpreting Instrument Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCK OFF (U) (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADC-GND FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADC-TIME FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADC-2V FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bad FDC status -> mass storage hardware failure (H) . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bad io command -> internal error (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bad io parameter -> internal error (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus grant failed (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL:
(M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL:
: done Press CAL STORE to save (M) . . . . . . . . .
CAL: cannot execute CALAMP enter: 0 dB PREAMP GAIN (U)(H)
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: DATA NOT STORED CAL AMP NEEDED (U)(H) . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: FM SPAN SENS FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL Freq Fail (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: GAIN FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cal harmonic >= 5.7 GHz NOT found (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: MAIN COIL SENSE FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: NBW 200 Hz notch amp failed (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-1
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Contents-7
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: NBW 200 Hz notch failed (H) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: NBW 200 Hz width failed (H) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: NBW gain failed (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: NBW width failed (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: PASSCODE NEEDED (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: RES BW AMPL FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL SIGNAL NOT FOUND (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: SPAN SENS FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: USING DEFAULT DATA (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL YTF FAILED (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL: ZERO FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot engage phase lock with current CAL FREQ data (U)
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot reach N dB points (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
check disk error -> medium uninitialized (H) . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check trigger input (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONF TEST FAIL (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMAND ERROR:
(U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPARE CMD timeout (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare ERROR (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMI BW FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-9
12-10
12-10
12-10
12-11
12-11
12-11
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-12
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-13
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-14
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
error number not recognized -> internal error (H) .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory dlp, not adaptable (U) . . . . . . . . . .
FAIL: XXXX XXXXXXXXXX (H) . . . . . . . . .
The Four-Digit Failure Code . . . . . . . . . .
The 10-Digit Failure Code . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fatal error -> mass storage system error (H) . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDC did not ID during instrument setup (H) . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDC Ready Timeout (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File type incompatible (U) . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMERRP error (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMT INIT CMD failed (H) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FREQ UNCAL (U) (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function not available in current Mode (U) . . . .
Function not available with analog display (U) . . .
Gate card not calibrated (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
general error -> mass storage system error (H) . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hi RAM Bus Grant FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT CMD timeout (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT CAL FAILED: 300 MHz out of range (H) . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT CAL FAILED: TG EXT ALC out of range (H)
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT CAL FAILED: TG INT ALC out of range (H) .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insucient Memory (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERNAL LOCKED (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(U) . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID ACTDEF:
INVALID AMPCOR: FREQ (U) . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID BLOCK FORMAT: IF STATEMENT (U) . .
INVALID CHECKSUM: USTATE (U) . . . . . . . .
INVALID COMPARE OPERATOR (U) . . . . . . . .
INVALID DET: FM or TV option only (U) . . . . .
INVALID ENTER FORMAT (U) . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID <le name> NOT FOUND (U) . . . . . .
INVALID FILENAME
(U) . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID HP-IB ADRS/OPERATION (U) . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID HP-IB OPERATION REN TRUE (U) . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-14
12-14
12-14
12-15
12-15
12-15
12-16
12-17
12-17
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-18
12-19
12-19
12-19
12-19
12-19
12-19
12-19
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-22
Contents-9
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID ITEM:
(U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID KEYLBL:
(U) . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID KEYNAME:
(U) . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID OUTPUT FORMAT (U) . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID RANGE: Stop < Start (U) . . . . . . . . .
INVALID REGISTER NUMBER (U) . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID REPEAT MEM OVFL (U) . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID REPEAT NEST LEVEL (U) . . . . . . . . .
INVALID RS-232 ADRS/OPERATION (U) . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID SAVE REG (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID SCRMOVE (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID START INDEX (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID STOP INDEX (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(U) . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID STORE DEST:
INVALID SYMTAB ENTRY: SYMTAB OVERFLOW (U) .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(U) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID TRACE:
(U) . . . . . . . . . .
INVALID TRACE NAME:
INVALID TRACENAME:
(U) . . . . . . . . . .
(U) . . . . . .
INVALID VALUE PARAMETER:
INVALID VARDEF:
(U) . . . . . . . . . . . .
(U) . . . . . . . . .
INVALID WINDOW TYPE:
io buer overow -> internal error (H) . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
io data error -> read data error (H) . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOST SIGNAL (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lo RAM Bus Grant FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO UNLVL (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Count Reduce SPAN (U) . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Count Widen RES BW (U) . . . . . . . . . .
MEAS UNCAL (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No card found (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIXER BIAS CAL FAILED (H) . . . . . . . . . . .
Related assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
no disk found -> medium changed or not present (H)
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No ID response (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No points dened (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-22
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-23
12-24
12-24
12-24
12-24
12-24
12-24
12-24
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-25
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-27
OVEN COLD (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETER ERROR:
(U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETER ERROR: FDCTESTS (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASSCODE NEEDED (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POS-PK FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READ CMD timeout (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECAL CMD timeout (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF UNLOCK (M)(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Require 1 signal > PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD (U) .
Require 3 signals > PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD (U) .
Require 4 signals > PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD (U) .
Required option not installed (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RES-BW NOISE FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RES-BW SHAPE FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF PRESEL ERROR (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF PRESEL TIMEOUT (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFFS Error: HARDWARE (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFFS Error: TIMEOUT (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAMPLE FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP ERROR (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIGNAL CLIPPED (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signals do not t expected % AM pattern (U) . . . . . . . . .
Signals do not t expected TOI pattern (U) . . . . . . . . . .
SMPLR UNLCK (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOFTKEY OVFL (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRQ
(M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP GAIN/ATTEN FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop at marker not available with negative detection (U) . . . .
SYMTAB EMPTY (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-27
12-28
12-28
12-28
12-28
12-28
12-28
12-28
12-28
12-29
12-29
12-29
12-29
12-29
12-29
12-30
12-30
12-30
12-30
12-30
12-30
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-31
12-32
12-32
12-32
12-32
12-32
12-32
12-32
12-33
12-33
12-33
12-33
12-33
12-33
Contents-11
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE FULL (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TG UNLVL (U)(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Too many signals with valid N dB points (U) . . . . . . . . .
There is another I/O card at that address. (H) . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace A is not available (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNDF KEY (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
uP load fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USING DEFAULTS:
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USING DEFAULTS self cal needed (U) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify gate trigger input is disconnected before CAL AMP (U)
VID-BW FAIL (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waiting for gate input . . . (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WDISCP error (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
write protected -> write protected (H) . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRITE CMD status timeout (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRITE CMD timeout (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-33
12-33
12-34
12-34
12-34
12-34
12-34
12-34
12-34
12-34
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-35
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
12-36
13. Service Equipment and Tools
Static-Safe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13-3
13-6
Index
Contents-12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Figures
1-1.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
2-22.
2-23.
2-24.
2-25.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
3-13.
3-14.
3-15.
4-1.
4-2.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
Example of a Static-Safe Work Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A23 Counter Lock Assembly Test Points (On the Bottom of the Instrument)
Precision Frequency Reference Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oven Reference Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R8 of the A11/A13 Bandwidth Filter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cal Attenuator Error Correction Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cal Attenuator Error Correction Setup 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log and Linear Amplier Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log and Linear Amplier Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL AMP Adjustment Routine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL YTF Adjustment Routine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL MXR Adjustment Routine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second IF Bandpass Filter Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPF Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300 MHz Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . .
Absolute Amplitude Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flatness Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREAMP Flatness Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Generator Power Level Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Generator Power Level Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Tracking Range Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tracking Oscillator Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A24 Power Supply Test Point Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A15J13 Connector-Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detail of Power Supply Connector, A16J6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A24J1 Connector-Pin Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card-Cage Connector-Pin Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 V Reference Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Reference Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Coil Driver Typical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM Coil Driver with 10 MHz Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM Coil Driver with >10 MHz Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Sweep Ramp Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 V Reference Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
010 V Reference Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YTF Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A24U12 Pin Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A15 Motherboard Connector Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A15 Connectors with Additional Associated Circuitry (1 of 2) . . . . . . .
A15 Connectors with Additional Associated Circuitry (2 of 2) . . . . . . .
A15J13 Connector-Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card-Cage Connector Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-8
2-9
2-13
2-14
2-16
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-26
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-33
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-42
2-45
2-46
2-48
2-50
3-5
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-12
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-32
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
Contents-13
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
6-16.
6-17.
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
6-21.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
9-5.
9-6.
9-7.
9-8.
9-9.
9-10.
11-1.
11-2.
11-3.
11-4.
11-5.
11-6.
12-1.
13-1.
Instrument Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1 Front Panel Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1A1 Keyboard Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A26 Rear Panel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A16 Power Supply Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B1 Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A24 Processor Board Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A24 Processor Board Assembly ROMs Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .
A25 Graphics Processor Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BT1 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A2 Display Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
A15 Motherboard/IF Section Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .
A21 Disk Drive Controller Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A19 Disk Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A20 10 MHz Precision Reference Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A23 Counter Lock Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A5 Analog Interface Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3 Preamplier Section/A4 RF Section Assembly Replacement . . . . . . .
A3A2 Preamplier Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A RF Section, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A LO Section, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A Third Converter, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A IF/Control Section, Block Diagram . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1 Front Panel Assembly, Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section, Top View . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section IF Section, Top View . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section, Bottom View . . . . . . . . .
HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section, Bottom View (with A23 Counter
Lock Assembly Removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A4 RF Section Assemblies, Front Right-Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A4 RF Section Cable and Wire Connections, Front Right-Side View . . . . .
A4 RF Section Assemblies, Rear Left-Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A4 RF Section Cable and Wire Connections, Rear Left-Side View . . . . . .
A3 Preamplier Section, Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration, Service, and Diagnostic Softkey Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Calibration Data: Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Calibration Data: Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Calibration Data: Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Calibration Data: Page 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO Frequency Diagnostic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A24J1 Connector-Pin Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-3
6-5
6-8
6-10
6-12
6-14
6-16
6-18
6-20
6-21
6-23
6-25
6-28
6-30
6-32
6-34
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-40
6-42
8-2
8-15
8-17
8-19
8-21
8-23
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
11-2
11-19
11-19
11-20
11-20
11-30
12-3
13-7
Tables
1-1. HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver and HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF
section Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2. Maximum Safe Input Levels for HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section
2-1. Automated and Manual Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2. Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies . . . . . . .
2-3. Bandwidth Amplitude-Correction Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4. Log Fidelity Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5. Linear Gain Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6. Mixer Bias DAC Correction Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7. Tracking Oscillator Range Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1. Instrument Failure Symptoms at Power-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2. Power Supply Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3. A24 Processor Board Assembly LED Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4. Free-Run Conditions for A24 Processor Board Assembly U12 . . . . . . .
4-1. Nominal Resolution Bandwidth Control Line Voltages . . . . . . . . . .
4-2. IF Section Gain Table in dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3. 10 dB Step-Gain Control Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4. Calibration-Attenuator Control Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5. Linear Gain Control Lines on the A14 Log Amplier Board . . . . . . . .
4-6. A15 Motherboard Mnemonic Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7. A15 Motherboard Pin Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1. RF Section Block Diagram Measurement Point Power Levels . . . . . . .
5-2. A5J4 2nd Converter Drive Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3. A5J301 YTF Driver Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4. A8J1 Tracking Generator Control Pin Designation . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5. Preamplier Switch Control Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6. VIEW CAL ON OFF Switch Control Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7. Input Attenuator Control Output at A5J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1. Rear-Panel BNC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2. A15 Motherboard Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1. Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1. HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section Frequency Ranges . . . . . .
10-1. Reference Designations, Abbreviations and Multipliers (1 of 4) . . . . . .
10-1. Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (2 of 4) . . . . . .
10-1. Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (3 of 4) . . . . . .
10-1. Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (4 of 4) . . . . . .
10-2. Standard Value Replacement Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3. Standard Value Replacement Resistors, 0.125 W . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4. Standard Value Replacement Resistors, 0.5 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5. Assembly-Level Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6. Replaceable Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1. Possible Cause of the Error Message \ADC-GND FAIL" . . . . . . . . . .
12-2. Possible Cause of the Error Message \ADC-2V FAIL" . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3. Four-Digit Failure Code Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-4. I/O Bus Address Failure-Code Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-5. I/O Data Bus Failure Code Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-3
1-7
2-1
2-4
2-22
2-27
2-27
2-31
2-51
3-4
3-6
3-30
3-32
4-8
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-19
4-23
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-7
6-13
6-33
7-6
8-1
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-10
10-12
10-14
12-2
12-4
12-15
12-16
12-16
Contents-15
12-6.
13-1.
13-2.
13-3.
13-4.
13-5.
13-6.
A24 Video Ram Address Failure Code Interpretation
Static-Safe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Common Hand Tools . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 12-17
. 13-2
. 13-3
. 13-4
. 13-5
. 13-6
. 13-8
1
Introduction
The HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section Service Guide provides the information needed
to adjust and repair the HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver and HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver
RF section to the assembly level.
HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section
Introduction
1-1
Service Guide Organization
The guide is divided into the following chapters:
Chapter 1, \Introduction," contains information on the receiver identication, rmware
revisions and upgrades, and safety and reliability considerations.
Chapter 2, \Making Adjustments," contains the adjustment procedures needed to adjust the
receiver to meet its specications.
Chapter 3, \Troubleshooting the Instrument," contains information for starting to
troubleshoot a instrument failure.
Chapter 4, \Troubleshooting the IF Section," contains specic troubleshooting information
for selected assemblies in the IF section and the A15 Motherboard assembly.
Chapter 5, \Troubleshooting the RF Section," contains troubleshooting information for the
RF section of the receiver.
Chapter 6, \Replacing Major Assemblies," contains instructions for the removal and
replacement of most major assemblies.
Chapter 7, \Customer Support," contains information on how to contact Hewlett-Packard,
return the instrument for repair, and services oered by the Hewlett-Packard support team.
Chapter 8, \Assembly Descriptions," contains information and block diagrams describing
instrument operation and individual assemblies.
Chapter 9, \Major Assembly and Cable Locations," contains gures identifying all major
assemblies and most cables.
Chapter 10, \Replaceable Parts," contains information needed to order assemblies for the
instrument.
Chapter 11, \Service Softkey Descriptions," contains a description of the calibration, service,
and diagnostic softkeys.
Chapter 12, \Error Messages," contains a description of the error messages that are displayed
when there is a problem with the instrument.
Chapter 13, \Service Equipment and Tools," contains information about test equipment and
tools used to service the instrument.
1-2
Introduction
Description
The HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver and HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section provide
measurement capabilities over the RF and Microwave frequency ranges.
The frequency ranges of the instruments are described below.
Table 1-1.
HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver and
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section Frequency Ranges
Instrument
Model
Frequency
Range
HP 8542E/85422E 9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
HP 8546A/85462A 9 kHz to 6.5 GHz
Further information about the HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver and HP 85422E/HP 85462A
receiver RF section, and additional features, is provided in the HP 8546A/HP 8542E EMI
Receiver and HP 85462A/HP 85422E Receiver RF Section User's Guide.
Introduction
1-3
Firmware Revision Date
When the instrument is rst turned on, a display appears that contains the copyright date and
rmware revision date. The rst line of the display indicates if the instrument I/O is HP-IB or
RS-232. Refer to the example below.
The version of rmware installed in the instrument is identied by the day, month, and year in
the following format:
HP-IB ADRS: nn
Copyright HP 1986, 1989, 1994
Rev 85462: yy.mm.dd 85460: yy.mm.dd
c
Rev 85422: yy.mm.dd
85420: yy.mm.dd
or RS232: nnnn
(if HP 8546A receiver)
or
(if HP 8542E receiver)
Whenever you contact Hewlett-Packard about your instrument, be sure to provide the
rmware date along with the complete serial number and option designation. This will ensure
that you obtain accurate service information.
Firmware Upgrade Kit Ordering Information
There are occasions when the factory revises the instrument rmware to correct defects
or make performance improvements. When a rmware revision is needed a service note is
distributed by the factory to all Hewlett-Packard service centers. The service note identies, by
serial-number prex, the instruments that require the latest rmware upgrade kit.
If your instrument requires a rmware upgrade kit, it can be obtained by contacting
the nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service oce. Refer to Table 7-1 for a list of
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service oces.
Instructions for the replacement of the rmware ROMs is located under \A24 Processor Board
Firmware ROM" in Chapter 6 of this guide.
1-4
Introduction
Safety Considerations
Before servicing the instrument, familiarize yourself with the safety markings on the
instrument and the safety instructions in this manual. This instrument has been manufactured
and tested according to international safety standards. To ensure safe operation of the
instrument and the personal safety of the user and service personnel, the cautions and
warnings in this manual must be heeded.
Refer to the summary of safety considerations at the front of this guide. Individual chapters
also contain detailed safety notation.
WARNING
Failure to ground the instrument properly can result in personal injury, as
well as instrument damage.
Before turning on the instrument, connect a three-wire power cable with
a standard IEC 320-C13 (CEE 22-V) inlet plug to the instrument power
receptacle. The power cable outlet plug must be inserted into a power-line
outlet socket that has a protective earth-contact. DO NOT defeat the
earth-grounding protection by using an extension cable, power cable, or
autotransformer without a protective ground conductor.
If you are using an autotransformer, make sure its common terminal is
connected to the protective ground conductor of its power-source outlet
socket.
Introduction
1-5
Reliability Considerations
Instrument Input Protection
The input circuitry can be damaged by power levels that exceed the maximum safe input-level
specications. Table 1-2 provides the input specications. To prevent input damage, these
specied levels for your instrument must not be exceeded.
The input can also be damaged by large transients. If it is likely that your instrument will be
exposed to potentially damaging transients, take whatever precautions are necessary to protect
its input circuitry.
The HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section input can easily be protected by disconnecting
it from the signal source whenever it is likely that large transients will be present. When it is
impractical to disconnect the instrument, a transient-limiting device should be used.
The HP 11947A Transient Limiter is an accessory that protects the input circuitry from
transients and accidental overloads. Contact your local Hewlett-Packard Sales or Service oce
for more information about the HP 11947A.
1-6
Introduction
CAUTION
Transients are often produced during electromagnetic interference (EMI)
conducted emissions testing. One type of device, the line impedance
stabilization network (LISN), can produce large transients when its switch
position or voltage input is changed.
Table 1-2.
Maximum Safe Input Levels for
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section
Average Continuous Power
9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
2.9 kHz to 6.5 GHz1
Peak Pulse Power
Preamplier O
DC
+30 dBm
+30 dBm (with 10 dB input attenuation)
+50 dBm (100 W) for 10 s pulse width and,
1% duty cycle, input atten >30 dB.
0 V (DC coupled)
1 HP 85462A only
Introduction
1-7
Protection from Electrostatic Discharge
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic components. All work on
electronic assemblies should be performed at a static-safe work station. Figure 1-1 shows an
example of a static-safe work station using two types of ESD protection:
Conductive table-mat and wrist-strap combination.
Conductive oor-mat and heel-strap combination.
Both types, when used together, provide a signicant level of ESD protection. Of the two, only
the table-mat and wrist-strap combination provides adequate ESD protection when used alone.
To ensure user safety, the static-safe accessories must provide at least 1 M
of isolation from
ground. Refer to Chapter 13 for information on ordering static-safe accessories.
WARNING
These techniques for a static-safe work station should not be used when
working on circuitry with a voltage potential greater than 500 volts.
Figure 1-1. Example of a Static-Safe Work Station
Handling of Electronic Components and ESD
The possibility of unseen damage caused by ESD, is present whenever components are
transported, stored, or used. The risk of ESD damage can be greatly reduced by close attention
to how all components are handled.
Perform work on all components at a static-safe work station.
Keep static-generating materials at least one meter away from all components.
Store or transport components in static-shielding containers.
1-8
Introduction
CAUTION
Always handle printed circuit board assemblies by the edges. This will reduce
the possibility of ESD damage to components and prevent contamination of
exposed plating.
Test Equipment Usage and ESD
Before connecting any coaxial cable to an instrument connector for the rst time each day,
momentarily short the center and outer conductors of the cable together.
Personnel should be grounded with a 1 M
resistor-isolated wrist-strap before touching any
instrument connector and before removing any assembly from the instrument.
Be sure that all instruments are properly earth-grounded to prevent build-up of static charge.
For Additional Information about ESD
For more information about preventing ESD damage, contact the Electrical
Overstress/Electrostatic Discharge (EOS/ESD) Association, Inc. The ESD standards
developed by this agency are sanctioned by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
Introduction
1-9
2
Making Adjustments
Most adjustments require access to the interior of the instrument.
Commands within parenthesis after a softkey, for example (ON), are used throughout this
chapter to indicate the part of a softkey that should be underlined when the key is pressed.
There are both automated and manual adjustments. Table 2-1 lists the adjustments and
indicates if the adjustment procedure is automated or manual. In some cases, both automated
and manual procedures are provided. These manual procedures are provided as a convenience
for those customers that do not need to perform any other automated adjustments.
Table 2-1. Automated and Manual Adjustment Procedures
Adjustment Name
Display
Sampler Match
10 MHz Reference
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
Cal Attenuator Error
Log and Linear Amplier
CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine
CAL AMP Adjustment Routine
CAL YTF Adjustment Routine
CAL MXR Adjustment Routine
Third Converter and Second IF Bandpass
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
Time and Date
First LO Distribution Amplier
Tracking Generator Power Level
Tracking Oscillator
Automated Manual
Adjustment Adjustment
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
Making Adjustments
2-1
Safety
Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the instrument and read the symbol
denitions given in the front of this guide before you begin the procedures in this chapter.
Refer to \General Safety Considerations" at the front of this manual for general WARNINGS
and CAUTIONS related to safety considerations. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS related to specic
procedures are included with the procedure.
Before You Start
There are three things you should do before starting an adjustment procedure:
Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the instrument, and read the
general safety instructions and the symbol denitions given in the front of this manual.
Check that the instrument has been turned on and allowed to warm up for at least 30
minutes at room temperature before making any adjustments. The instrument must be
allowed to stand at room temperature at least 2 hours prior to the 30 minute warm-up.
Read the rest of this section.
Test equipment you will need
Refer to Chapter 13 for a list of recommended equipment for the instrument adjustments. Any
equipment that meets the critical specications given in the table can be substituted for the
recommended model.
If there are abnormal indications during adjustment
If the indications received during an adjustment do not agree with the normal conditions given
in the adjustment procedures, a fault exists in your instrument. The fault should be repaired
before proceeding with any further adjustments. Refer to the troubleshooting and repair
information in Chapter 3 of this guide.
Periodically verifying calibration
The instrument requires periodic verication of operation. Under most conditions of use,
you should test the instrument at least once a year with the complete set of performance
verication tests.
When test results show proper operation and calibration, no adjustments are necessary.
However, if test results indicate that the instrument does not meet specications, the cause
should be determined and rectied. Refer to the troubleshooting information in Chapter 3
before attempting recalibration.
2-2
Making Adjustments
Standard-value replacement components
Part numbers for standard-value replacement components used in the adjustment procedures
are located in Chapter 10 of this service guide.
If you replace or repair an assembly
If one or more assemblies has been replaced or repaired, related adjustment procedures should
be done prior to verifying operation. Refer to Table 2-2 to determine which adjustment to
perform after replacing or repairing an assembly. Find the assembly that has been repaired or
replaced in the left-hand column. Then perform the adjustments marked across the adjustment
column for that assembly. It is important that adjustments are performed in the order indicated
to ensure that the instrument meets all of its specications.
When running software tests
If you are running a software test, always run the \Instrument Setup" test before beginning to
run other tests on the menu.
Making Adjustments
2-3
Table 2-2. Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies
Related Performance Verication Tests
Related Adjustments and Adjustment
Routines
CAL FREQ
Flatness
A1 Front Panel *
CAL AMP
Residual Responses
Flatness Calibration
CAL FREQ
Flatness
A1A1 Keyboard
CAL AMP
Residual Responses
Flatness Calibration
Flatness
CAL FREQ
A1A2 Rotary Pulse Generator
Residual Responses
CAL AMP
Flatness Calibration
Residual Responses
A2 Monitor *
Display
CAL AMP
Absolute Amplitude Uncertainty
CAL FREQ
A3A1 Switch *
CAL AMP
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
300 MHz Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment
portion of the Third Converter
and Second IF Bandpass adjustment
Flatness
CAL FREQ
A3A2 Switched Preamplier
CAL AMP
Residual Responses
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
A3A3 Switch
CAL FREQ
Flatness
CAL AMP
Residual Responses
Flatness Calibration
Flatness
A3A4 Input Attenuator
CAL FREQ
Residual Responses
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
Flatness
A3A5 Switch
CAL FREQ
Residual Responses
CAL AMP
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
A3A6 Switch
CAL FREQ
Flatness
CAL AMP
Residual Responses
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
CAL FREQ
Flatness
A3AT1 3dB Attenuator
CAL AMP
Residual Responses
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
* These assemblies require a combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures. Performing
the combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures using the manual procedures is
quicker than performing these adjustments using the automated procedures because these assemblies require no other
automated adjustments. Note that the CAL YTF adjustment is not required for the HP 85422E.
Replaced or Repaired Assembly
2-4
Making Adjustments
Table 2-2.
Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies (continued)
Replaced or Repaired Assembly
A4A1 LPF, 2.9 GHz *
A4A2 BPF, 321.4 MHz *
A4A3 Second Converter *
A4A4 SYTF
A4A6 Dual Band Mixer
A4A7 Local Oscillator
Distribution Amplier (LODA)
A4A8 LPF, 4.4 GHz *
Related Adjustments and Adjustment
Routines
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
CAL MXR (HP 85462A only)
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
CAL MXR (HP 85462A only)
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
CAL MXR (HP 85462A only)
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration
Flatness Calibration
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
Related Performance Verication Tests
Flatness
Residual Responses
None
Noise Sidebands
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Flatness
Gain Compression
Displayed Average Noise
Residual Responses
Noise Sidebands
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Flatness
Displayed Average Noise
Residual Responses
Noise Sidebands
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Flatness
Gain Compression
Displayed Average Noise
Residual Responses
Frequency Readout Accuracy
Marker Count Accuracy
Noise Sidebands
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Residual FM
Frequency Span Accuracy
Flatness
Residual Responses
Residual Responses
Frequency Readout Accuracy
Marker Count Accuracy
Noise Sidebands
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Residual FM
Frequency Span Accuracy
Flatness
Residual Responses
* These assemblies require a combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures. Performing
the combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures using the manual procedures is
quicker than performing these adjustments using the automated procedures because these assemblies require no other
automated adjustments. Note that the CAL YTF adjustment is not required for the HP 85422E.
A4A9 YTO *
Making Adjustments
2-5
Table 2-2.
Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies (continued)
Replaced or Repaired Assembly
Related Adjustments and Adjustment
Routines
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
Tracking
Generator Power Level
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
CAL TRK GEN Refer to Chapter 11
Related Performance Verication Tests
Frequency Readout Accuracy
Marker Count Accuracy
Noise Sidebands
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Residual FM
Frequency Span Accuracy
Flatness
Residual Responses
Tracking Generator Feedthrough
Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Power
Tracking Generator Level Flatness
Tracking Generator Power Sweep Range
Tracking Generator LO Feedthrough
TG Harmonic Spurious Outputs
TG Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs
Frequency Readout Accuracy
CAL FREQ
A5 Analog Interface Board
Marker Count Accuracy
CAL AMP
Noise Sidebands
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only.)
Residual FM
CAL MXR (HP 85462A only.)
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Frequency Span Accuracy
Sweep Time Accuracy
Log Fidelity
Reference Level Switching Uncertainty
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Resolution Bandwidth Switching
Flatness
CAL FREQ
IF Bandwidth Shape Check
A6 Narrow Bandwidth Board *
Resolution Bandwidth Switching
CAL AMP
CAL FREQ
Pulse Response
A7 Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/
CAL AMP
IF Overload Check
Average Detector Board *
Flatness
CAL FREQ
A8 Tracking Generator Control
Absolute Amplitude, Vernier and Power
Board *
CAL AMP
Tracking Generator Level Flatness
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
Tracking Generator Power Sweep Range
Noise Sidebands
CAL FREQ
A9 Third Converter Board*
Power-Line Related Sidebands
CAL AMP
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Third Converter & Second IF Bandpass
Resolution Bandwidth Switching
Tracking Generator Power Level
Displayed Average Noise
Residual Responses
Tracking Generator Feedthrough
Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Power
Tracking Generator Level Flatness
Tracking Generator Power Sweep Range
Tracking Generator LO Feedthrough
TG Harmonic Spurious Outputs
TG Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs
IF Bandwidth Shape Check
A11 Bandwidth Board *
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
CAL FREQ
Resolution Bandwidth Switching
CAL AMP
* These assemblies require a combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures. Performing
the combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures using the manual procedures is
quicker than performing these adjustments using the automated procedures because these assemblies require no other
automated adjustments. Note that the CAL YTF adjustment is not required for the HP 85422E.
A4A10 Tracking Generator *
2-6
Making Adjustments
Table 2-2.
Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies (continued)
Replaced or Repaired Assembly
A12 Amplier Control Board *
A13 Bandwidth Board *
A14 Log Amplier Board *
A15 Motherboard *
A16 Power Supply Assembly *
Related Adjustments and Adjustment
Routines
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
Log and Linear Amplier
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
Display
A17 Graphic Signal Processor
Assembly
A18 Speaker
A19 Disk Drive
None
None
A20 10 MHz Reference
A21 Disk Drive Controller Board
10 MHz Reference
None
A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board
A23 Counter Lock Assembly *
None
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
10 MHz Reference
CAL FREQ
CAL AMP
CAL YTF (HP 85462A only)
CAL MXR (HP 85462A only) y
Cal Attenuator Error y
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration y
Flatness Calibration y
PREAMP Flatness Calibration y
Time and Date
None
None
None
A23AT2 10dB Attenuator *
A24 Processor Board Assembly
A25 Graphics Processor Board
A26 Rear Panel
B1 Fan
Related Performance Verication Tests
Log Fidelity
Displayed Average Noise
IF Overload Check
IF Bandwidth Shape Check
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Resolution Bandwidth Switching
Log Fidelity
Reference Level Switching Uncertainty
All Performance Tests
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Residual Responses
None
AM and FM Demodulation Check
Insert the Limit Line and Antenna
Factor Library Disk into the disk drive
and make sure that you can load a
limit line into the receiver RF section.
10 MHz Reference Output Check
Insert the Limit Line and Antenna
Factor Library Disk into the disk drive
and make sure that you can load a
limit line into the receiver RF section.
Initial Setup
Frequency Readout Accuracy
Marker Count
Frequency Readout Accuracy
Marker Count
Reference Level Switching Uncertainty
Flatness
Display
10 MHz Reference Output Check
Power-Line Related Sidebands
Residual Responses
* These assemblies require a combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures. Performing
the combination of the CAL FREQ, CAL AMP, and CAL YTF adjustment procedures using the manual procedures is
quicker than performing these adjustments using the automated procedures because these assemblies require no other
automated adjustments. Note that the CAL YTF adjustment is not required for the HP 85422E.
y These adjustments are not necessary if valid correction constants are recovered from the defective A24 processor
assembly. See the A24 processor assembly replacement procedure in this service guide.
Making Adjustments
2-7
Preparing the instrument for adjustments
If the HP 85422E / HP 85462A is connected to a preselector, perform the following steps to
disconnect the preselector prior to performing adjustments. If a preselector is not present, then
this section may be omitted.
Disconnecting the HP 85420E / HP 85460A preselector
CAUTION
To prevent instrument damage, the power cords must be disconnected from
both instruments prior to disconnecting the 9-pin bus cable.
1. Switch o the power switch on the instruments front panel.
2. Detach the power cords from both instruments.
3. Disconnect the 9-pin bus cable that is connected to the AUX INTERFACE ports on both
instruments.
4. Disconnect the rest of the cables between the two instruments, then separate the receiver
from the preselector.
5. Attach the power cord to the HP 85422E / HP 85462A.
6. Turn the POWER switch ON. Let the instrument warm-up for 30 minutes before performing
any adjustments.
2-8
Making Adjustments
Display
Display
The display adjustments allow the vertical position and the background intensity of the display
to be set. Instructions are also included for degaussing the display. These are the only display
adjustments that can be performed outside the factory.
Before beginning the display adjustments allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30
minutes.
Equipment Required
CRT Demagnetizer or Bulk Tape Eraser
Procedure
Vertical Position Adjustment
Figure 2-1. Display Adjustment Location
1. Insert a non-conductive adjustment tool into the vertical position access hole in the left side
of the instrument.
2. Adjust the control until the softkey labels are aligned with the softkeys.
Degaussing (Demagnetizing)
Color purity problems may be caused by a magnetized display or by a magnetic
Note
eld generated external to the instrument. Before attempting to degauss the
display, try moving the instrument to a new location to determine if its location
was creating the color purity problem.
1. If the display is magnetized or if it has a color purity problem, cycle the instrument power
several times, leaving the instrument turned o for at least 15 seconds before turning it
back on.
This will activate a degaussing circuit in the display.
Making Adjustments
2-9
Display
2. If the problem still exists, degauss the display using a CRT demagnetizer or bulk tape eraser.
CAUTION
Applying an excessively strong magnetic eld to the display face can
permanently damage the display. Follow the manufacturer's instructions,
keeping following in mind:
The degaussing device should be placed not closer than 4 inches (10 cm) from
the face of the display.
Like most displays, this display can be sensitive to large magnetic elds generated by
unshielded motors. In countries that use 50 Hz, some 50 Hz jitter may be observed. The
device creating the magnetic eld must be moved to correct the problem.
Background Adjustment
The background adjustment should be performed in a dimly-lit room (or with the display
shaded from bright lights).
1. Press the following keys:
4PRESET5
4DISPLAY5 Display Config
INTENSTY 415 4ENTER5
BRIGHT 465 4ENTER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Adjust Color Edit Colors
2. Set the background color by pressing the following keys:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
BACKGRND
HSL RGB until RGB is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
RED 405 4ENTER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GREEN 405 4ENTER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
BLUE 405 4ENTER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PREVIOUS MENU
3. Set the graticule color by pressing the following keys:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GRATICUL
HSL RGB until RGB is underlined.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
RED 415 4ENTER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GREEN 415 4ENTER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
BLUE 415 4ENTER5
4. Insert a non-conductive adjustment tool into the background adjustment access hole in the
left side of the instrument.
5. Adjust the background adjustment until the graticule barely visible. The background should
be black.
2-10
Making Adjustments
Display
6. Set the monitor to its default colors by pressing the following keys:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Previous Menu More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Previous Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEFAULT COLORS
Making Adjustments
2-11
Sampler Match
The match between the sampling oscillator and the sampler is optimized by rst setting the
sampling-oscillator frequency for midrange, then adjusting the sampler-match adjustment for
maximum dc volts as read on a digital multimeter.
Equipment Required
Digital multimeter
DMM test leads
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the 4LINE5 switch to OFF. Remove the instrument cover.
Turn the 4LINE5 switch to ON.
Set the center frequency of the instrument to 194 MHz.
Press the following keys:
4CONFIG5 (local)
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Signal Analysis
Frequency5
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Center Freq
194 4MHz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPAN
10 4MHz5
4SWEEP5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AUTO
5. Connect the digital multimeter (DMM) from chassis ground to A23TP1. Refer to Figure 2-2.
6. Adjust A23C107 for maximum voltage as read on the DMM. This voltage must be +1.5 V
61.0 V.
7. Measure the voltage at A23TP2. It should be 01.5 V 61.0 V. If it is not, readjust A23C107
until a compromise is established between the two test points, such that the voltage
specications of steps 6 and 7 are met.
2-12
Making Adjustments
Sampler Match
Figure 2-2.
A23 Counter Lock Assembly Test Points
(On the Bottom of the Instrument)
Making Adjustments
2-13
10 MHz Reference
Readjustment Not Recommended.
Replacement oscillators are factory adjusted after a complete warmup and after the specied
aging rate has been achieved. Readjustment should not be necessary after oscillator
replacement, and is not recommended.
Note that the instrument must be ON continuously for at least 24 hours immediately prior
to adjusting the oscillator to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to
stabilize. Failure to allow sucient stabilization time could result in the misadjustment of the
oscillator.
The frequency of the internal 10 MHz frequency reference is compared to a known frequency
standard and adjusted for minimum frequency error. This procedure does not adjust the
short-term stability or long-term stability of the 10 MHz Ovenized Crystal Oscillator (OCXO),
which are determined by characteristics of the particular oscillator and the environmental
and warmup conditions to which it has been recently exposed. The instrument must be ON
continuously for at least 24 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the
temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize.
Equipment Required
Frequency standard
Frequency counter
Cable, BNC, 122 cm (48 in) (two required)
Figure 2-3. Precision Frequency Reference Setup
2-14
Making Adjustments
10 MHz Reference
Procedure
1. Place the instrument on its side as shown in Figure 2-3 and set the LINE switch of the
instrument to ON.
2. Allow the instrument to remain powered ON and undisturbed for at least 24 hours, so that
both the temperature and frequency of the OCXO can stabilize.
3. Connect the frequency standard to the frequency counter rear-panel TIMEBASE IN/OUT
connector. Refer to Figure 2-3.
4. Disconnect the jumper between the 10MHz REF OUTPUT and EXT REF IN jacks on the
rear panel. Connect a BNC cable between the 10MHz REF OUTPUT jack and INPUT A of
the frequency counter.
5. Set the frequency counter controls as follows:
FUNCTION/DATA
FREQ A
INPUT A:
x10 ATTN
OFF
AC
OFF (DC coupled)
50 Z
OFF (1 M
input impedance)
AUTO TRIG
ON
100 kHz FILTER A
OFF
INT/EXT switch (rear panel)
EXT
6. On the frequency counter, select a 1 second gate time and a 10 MHz oset of the displayed
frequency by pressing the following frequency counter keys:
4GATE TIME5 1 4GATE TIME5
MATH 4SELECT/ENTER5
4CHS/EEX5 10 4CHS/EEX5 6 4SELECT/ENTER5
4SELECT/ENTER5
The frequency counter should now display the dierence between the frequency of the
INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a displayed resolution of 0.001 Hz.
7. Locate the FREQ ADJ control on the OCXO. See Figure 2-4. Remove the dust cap screw.
8. Use a nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the FREQ ADJ control on the OCXO for a
frequency counter indication of 0.00 Hz.
9. Select a 10 second gate time by pressing the following frequency counter keys:
4GATE TIME5 10 4GATE TIME5
The frequency counter should now display the dierence between the frequency of the
INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.001 Hz.
10. Wait at least 2 gate periods for the frequency counter to settle, and then adjust the FREQ
ADJ control on the OCXO for a stable frequency counter indication of 0.000 60.010 Hz.
11. Replace the dust cap screw on the OCXO.
Making Adjustments
2-15
10 MHz Reference
Figure 2-4. Oven Reference Adjustment Location
2-16
Making Adjustments
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
The crystal and LC bandwidth lter circuits are adjusted for symmetry, center frequency, and
peak amplitude.
First, correction constants are turned o. This allows for uncorrected 3 dB resolution
bandwidth centering and amplitude adjustments.
New corrections are then generated by performing the CAL FREQ and CAL AMP adjustment
routines.
Equipment Required
Crystal shorts (set of three, P/N 5062-4855)
Note
This part is very small and can easily fall into the card cage. Use extreme care
when inserting them. It might be useful to create a handle for the jumper with
wood and epoxy.
Procedure
1. Turn the 4LINE5 switch to OFF. Remove the instrument cover assembly.
2. Turn the 4LINE5 switch to ON, then press the following keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
4CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 4
CORRECT ON OFF (OFF)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Crystal Alignment
3. Connect a short cable from the 300 MHz port to the RF INPUT of the instrument under
test.
4. Press the following keys:
4FREQUENCY5 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 10 4MHz5
4PEAK SEARCH5
4MARKER FUNCTION5 MK TRACK ON OFF (ON)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPAN5 200 4kHz5
4AMPLITUDE5 20 40dBm5
4
SCALE LOG LIN (LIN)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3 Amptd Units dBm
BW5 3 4kHz5
5. Press 4AMPLITUDE5, then use the knob to place the signal at the sixth graticule line from the
bottom.
6. Press 4BW5 30 4kHz5 on the instrument.
4
Making Adjustments
2-17
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
CAUTION
Shorting the crystal test points to ground may permanently damage the
bandwidth board assembly. If you make your own shorts, it is advisable to
insulate the bare wires and connectors.
7. Connect the crystal shorts (through the access holes on the assembly cover) across the
following pairs of test points:
A13TP1 and A13TP2
A11TP1 and A11TP2
A11TP4 and A11TP5
8. Adjust A13C54 CTR for minimum signal amplitude. Then adjust A13C38 SYM and A13C54
CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass response.
There is a notch near the peak of the signal. This notch can be ignored when adjusting for
centering and symmetry.
9. Remove the crystal short from A13TP1 and A13TP2 and connect it across A13TP4 and
A13TP5.
10. Adjust A13C25 CTR for minimum signal amplitude. Then adjust A13C15 SYM and A13C25
CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass response.
11. Remove the crystal short from A11TP4 and A11TP5. Connect the short across A13TP1 and
A13TP2.
12. Adjust A11C54 CTR for minimum signal amplitude. Then adjust A11C38 SYM and A11C54
CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass response.
13. Remove the crystal short from A11TP1 and A11TP2. Connect the short across A11TP4 and
A11TP5.
14. Adjust A11C25 CTR for minimum signal amplitude. Then adjust A11C15 SYM and A11C25
CTR for a centered and symmetrical bandpass response.
15. Remove the crystal shorts and press the following keys:
4PEAK SEARCH5
4MARKER FUNCTION5 MK TRACK ON OFF (ON)
4SPAN5 50 4kHz5
4MARKER FUNCTION5 MK TRACK ON OFF (OFF)
4BW5 3 4kHz5
4PEAK SEARCH5 MARKER 1
4BW5 30 4kHz5
4PEAK SEARCH5
16. Verify that the MARKER 1 frequency does not exceed 3 kHz.
If the signal shift is out of tolerance, repeat steps 3 through 16.
17. Press the following keys:
4MKR5
MARKER 1 ON OFF (OFF)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2-18
Making Adjustments
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
LC Alignment
18. Press the following keys:
4BW5 100 4kHz5
4SPAN5 5 4MHz5
19. Widen all but one of the LC lter poles by shorting A11TP10 and A11TP11, A11TP12 and
A11TP13, and A13TP10 and A13TP11 using the crystal shorts.
CAUTION
Use a tool with a nonmetallic body to make the LC dip adjustment.
Shorting components to ground may result in permanent damage to the
bandwidth board assembly.
20. Center the signal on the display by pressing the following keys:
4PEAK SEARCH5
4MARKER FUNCTION5 MK TRACK ON OFF (ON)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
21. Adjust A13C47 LC dip for a minimum signal amplitude.
22. Move the short from A13TP10 and A13TP11 to A13TP12 and A13TP13, then adjust A13C17
LC dip for a minimum signal amplitude.
23. Move the short from A11TP10 and A11TP11 to A13TP10 and A13TP11, then adjust A11C17
LC dip for a minimum signal amplitude.
24. Move the short from A11TP12 and A11TP13 to A11TP10 and A11TP11, then adjust A11C47
LC dip for a minimum signal amplitude.
LC Centering
Note that the center frequency of the 100 kHz bandwidth is referenced to the 30 kHz
bandwidth. During this procedure it is advisable to switch to the 30 kHz bandwidth
occasionally and recenter it using 4PEAK SEARCH5 MARKER ! CF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
25. Short A11TP10 and A11TP11, A11TP12 and A11TP13, and A13TP10 and A13TP11 using
the crystal shorts used in the crystal alignment section. Press the following keys:
4BW5 30 4kHz5
4SPAN5 200 4kHz5
4MARKER FUNCTION5 MK TRACK ON OFF (OFF)
4BW5 100 4kHz5
26. Adjust A11C45 LC CTR for maximum signal at center-screen.
27. Move the short from A11TP10 and A11TP11 to A11TP12 and A11TP13, then adjust A11C23
LC CTR for maximum signal at center-screen.
28. Move the short from A13TP12 and A13TP13 to A11TP10 and A11TP11, then adjust A13C45
LC CTR for maximum signal at center-screen.
29. Move the short from A13TP10 and A13TP11 to A13TP12 and A13TP13, then adjust A13C23
LC CTR for maximum signal at center-screen.
30. Disconnect all the shorts from A11 and A13 bandwidth board assemblies.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Making Adjustments
2-19
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
LC Amplitude
31. Press the following keys:
4BW5 3 4MHz5
4SPAN5 2 4MHz5
32. Press 4AMPLITUDE5 and adjust the signal level one division below the top graticule using the
knob.
33. Press the following keys:
4PEAK SEARCH5 MARKER 1
4MARKER FUNCTION5 MK TRACK ON OFF (ON)
4BW5 100 4kHz5
It may be necessary to occasionally recenter the 30 kHz bandwidth.
34. Adjust A11R26 LC and A13R26 LC equally for a MARKER 1 amplitude of 0 dB. Each
potentiometer should be adjusted to accomplish one-half of the necessary increase in signal
amplitude. If A11R26 or A13R26 reaches its limit, recenter both potentiometers and repeat
steps 31 through 35.
35. Press 4MARKER FUNCTION5, MK TRACK ON OFF (OFF) on the instrument.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Final LC Centering
36. Press the following keys:
4BW5 30 4kHz5
4SPAN5 100 4kHz5
4PEAK SEARCH5 MARKER ! CF
4BW5 100 4kHz5
37. Make nal adjustments by adjusting A11C23, A11C45, A13C23, and A13C45 in succession
to peak the amplitude of the marker at center-screen.
38. Repeat steps 36 and 37 until the 30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidths are centered in relation
to each other.
39. Press the following keys:
4BW5 30 4kHz5
4PEAK SEARCH5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKER 1
BW5 100 4kHz5
PEAK SEARCH5
40. Verify that the MARKER 1 frequency does not exceed 10 kHz.
If the signal shift is out of tolerance, repeat steps 26 through 39.
4
4
2-20
Making Adjustments
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
Crystal Amplitude
41. Press the following keys:
4BW5 30 4kHz5
4SPAN5 10 4kHz5
4PEAK SEARCH5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKER 1
MARKER FUNCTION5 MK TRACK ON OFF (ON)
4BW5 1 4kHz5
42. Adjust A11R31 XTL and A13R31 XTL equally for a MARKER 1 amplitude reading of 0 dB.
Each potentiometer should be adjusted to accomplish one-half of the necessary increase in
signal amplitude. If A11R31 or A13R31 reaches its limit, recenter both potentiometers and
repeat steps 41 and 42.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4
Final BW Amplitude Check
43. Run the \CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine" and the \CAL AMP Adjustment Routine".
44. Remember to press CAL STORE after the completion of the routines to store data in
nonvolatile memory.
45. Press the following keys to verify that the bandwidth amplitude corrections are within
specications:
4CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY CAL DATA
46. Refer to the BW-AMP column of the display to locate the LC and XTL bandwidth
amplitude-correction numbers of the instrument. All LC and XTL bandwidth readings
should be between 00.8 dB to +0.5 dB. Table 2-3 describes and shows an example of
the LC and XTL bandwidth amplitude-correction numbers that will be displayed on the
instrument. Perform the following steps that apply to your instrument.
If the dierence between the bandwidth amplitude-correction numbers of the 30 kHz
XTL and 3 MHz LC is greater than 0.8 dB, pad A11R8 or A13R8 and repeat the Final BW
Amplitude Check. Refer to Figure 2-5 for the location of A11R8 and A13R8.
If the 30 kHz XTL bandwidth amplitude correction is greater than the 3 MHz LC
bandwidth correction, increase the value of A11R8 or A13R8.
If the 3 MHz LC bandwidth amplitude correction is greater than the 30 kHz XTL
bandwidth correction, decrease the value of A11R8 or A13R8.
If just the 100 kHz LC amplitude is out of range, repeat steps 23 through 38 and steps 43
through 46.
If the 1 kHz XTL amplitude is out of the above range, repeat steps 41 through 46.
Making Adjustments
2-21
Crystal and LC Bandwidth Filter
Table 2-3. Bandwidth Amplitude-Correction Map
Resolution
BW-AMP
Bandwidths Correction Numbers
not used
0.00
not used
0.00
not used
0.00
not used
0.00
0.00
XTL: 9 kHz
300 Hz
0.46
1 kHz
0.06
3 kHz
00.02
10 kHz
0.00
30 kHz
0.00
LC: 100 kHz
00.27
300 kHz
00.40
1 MHz
00.43
3 MHz
00.47
5 MHz
00.54
120 kHz
00.17
Figure 2-5. R8 of the A11/A13 Bandwidth Filter Board
2-22
Making Adjustments
Cal Attenuator Error
Cal Attenuator Error
This is an automated adjustment.
The A12 amplitude control assembly has one 10 dB and two 20 dB nonadjustable ampliers. It
also has 1 dB, 2 dB, 4 dB, and 16 dB attenuators which are correctable. The 16 dB step is not
used at this time.
The attenuator error correction procedure involves disabling the attenuator correction
constants, determining the attenuator step errors, and entering the new correction constants
into the instrument memory.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB Cable (two required)
Level generator
Cable, BNC, 120 cm (48 in)
Adapter Type N (m) to BNC (f)
Figure 2-6. Cal Attenuator Error Correction Setup 1
Figure 2-7. Cal Attenuator Error Correction Setup 2
Making Adjustments
2-23
Log and Linear Amplier
A 21.4 MHz signal is injected into an IF test board that has been inserted in place of the rst
resolution bandwidth assembly, A11. The gain of the A14 log amplier assembly is adjusted by
observing the voltage at the AUX VIDEO output on the rear panel with a digital multimeter.
Equipment Required
Level generator
Digital multimeter (DMM)
IF test board (P/N 5062-6421)
Cable, BNC, 120 cm (48 in)
Cable, BNC (f) to dual banana plug
Test cable
Figure 2-8. Log and Linear Amplier Adjustment Setup
Procedure
1. Turn the 4LINE5 switch to OFF. Remove the instrument cover assembly.
2. Remove the rst IF bandwidth lter assembly, A11. Install the IF test board into the A11
slot. Turn the 4LINE5 switch to ON.
3. Set the DMM to read dc volts.
2-24
Making Adjustments
Log and Linear Amplier
4. Press the following keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
4CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3
CORRECT ON OFF (OFF) More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STP GAIN ZERO
SPAN5 0 4Hz5
BW5 10 4kHz5
4
4
AVG BW AUTO MAN 300 4Hz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AMPLITUDE5 10 40dBm5
SCALE LOG LIN (LIN)
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Set the level generator as follows:
FREQUENCY
21.4 MHz
MANUAL TUNE
ON
AMPTD INCR
0.01 dBm
AMPLITUDE
06 dBm
6. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-8. Connect the output of the level generator to
J2 of the IF test board. Connect the DMM to the AUX VIDEO output located on the rear
panel.
Log Fidelity Adjustment
7. Adjust the level generator knob for maximum signal amplitude on the display. Adjust the
level generator amplitude as necessary to keep the signal on the display.
8. Adjust the level generator output level for a DMM reading of 1000 mV 61.0 mV. Record the
dBm
level generator amplitude readout for later reference:
9. Press AMPTD INCR 10 dB on the level generator.
10. Press SCALE LOG LIN (LOG) on the instrument.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11. Set the level generator to the level recorded in step 8 and adjust A14R23 SLOPE (refer to
Figure 2-9) for a DMM reading of 1000 mV 61 mV.
Making Adjustments
2-25
Log and Linear Amplier
Figure 2-9. Log and Linear Amplier Adjustment Location
12. Set the level generator amplitude 60 dB below that recorded in step 8 by pressing
AMPLITUDE and then pressing STEP DOWN six times. Adjust A14R10 OFFSET for the
DMM reading of 250 mV 61 mV.
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 until no further adjustment is necessary.
14. Set the level generator amplitude 30 dB below that recorded in step 8 and adjust the
A14R23 SLOPE for a DMM reading of 625 mV 61 mV.
15. Set the level generator amplitude to the level recorded in step 8 and adjust the A14R69
030 dB for a DMM reading of 1000 mV 61 mV.
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 until no further adjustment is necessary.
17. Set the level generator amplitude 10 dB below that recorded in step 8 and adjust the
A14R23 SLOPE for a DMM reading of 875 mV 61 mV.
18. Set the level generator amplitude to the level recorded in step 8 and adjust the A14R39
010 dB for a DMM reading of 1000 mV 61 mV.
19. Repeat steps 17 and 18 until no further adjustment is necessary.
20. Repeat steps 11 through 19 until the limits in Table 2-4 are met.
2-26
Making Adjustments
Log and Linear Amplier
Table 2-4. Log Fidelity Check
Level Generator
Output Level
DMM Reading
Reference (from step 8) 1000 mV 61 mV
Reference 0 10 dB
875 mV 63 mV
Reference 0 30 dB
625 mV 64 mV
Reference 0 20 dB
750 mV 64 mV
Reference 0 40 dB
500 mV 65 mV
Reference 0 50 dB
375 mV 66 mV
Reference 0 60 dB
250 mV 67 mV
Reference 0 70 dB
125 mV 68 mV
Linear Output and Step Gain Adjustments
21. Press the following keys:
4AMPLITUDE5 50 40dBm5
SCALE LOG LIN (LIN) More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
Amptd Units dBm
22. Set the level generator amplitude to the level recorded in step 8 and adjust A14R34 LIN for
a DMM reading of 1000 mV 61 mV.
23. Use Table 2-5 to set the level generator amplitude and receicer level, then complete the
adjustments indicated.
Table 2-5. Linear Gain Check
Adjust
Level Generator
Output Level
A14R34 Reference (from step 8)
A14R33
A14R30
A14R27
N/A
Reference 0 10 dB
Reference 0 20 dB
Reference 0 30 dB
Reference 0 40 dB
Reference
Level (dBm)
DMM Reading
050
060
070
080
090
1000 mV 61 mV
1000 mV 65 mV
1000 mV 65 mV
1000 mV 65 mV
1000 mV 630 mV
Making Adjustments
2-27
CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine
This is an automated adjustment.
The CAL FREQ adjustment routine accesses an internal self-adjustment routine. This routine
adjusts the instrument to obtain frequency accuracy using the CAL OUT signal. The following
adjustments are performed by the CAL FREQ routine:
Sweep time calibration.
YTO oset and slope.
FM coil timing constants.
Span attenuator.
FM detector sensitivity.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB cable
Figure 2-10. CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine Setup
Alternate Manual Procedure
These manual procedures are provided so that you do not have to perform this procedure using
the automated version. This is only for your convenience
Interrupting this routine may result in corrupt data being stored in RAM. If this occurs, rerun
the CAL FREQ adjustment routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Press the following keys:
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 CAL FREQ
4
The CAL FREQ adjustment routine will take a few minutes to run.
The internal adjustment data will be stored in working RAM. To store this data in nonvolatile
memory, press CAL STORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2-28
Making Adjustments
CAL AMP Adjustment Routine
CAL AMP Adjustment Routine
This is an automated adjustment.
The CAL AMP adjustment routine accesses an internal self-adjustment routine. The following
adjustments are automatically performed by this adjustment routine:
The reference level is calibrated by adjusting the gain of the IF section.
The 3 dB resolution bandwidths are adjusted.
Bandwidth amplitude errors are determined. Errors are corrected with video osets.
Step-gain and input-attenuator errors are determined. Errors are corrected with video
osets.
Log delity is checked in 1 dB steps. Errors are corrected with video osets.
Frequency accuracy is tested and adjusted by using frequency osets.
Equipment
Computer
HP-IB cable
Figure 2-11. CAL AMP Adjustment Routine Setup
Alternate Manual Procedure
These manual procedures are provided so that you do not have to perform this procedure using
the automated version. This is only for your convenience
Perform the \CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine" before to performing this adjustment routine.
1. Press the following keys:
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 CAL AMP
4
The CAL AMP routine takes approximately 5 to 7 minutes to run. The internal adjustment data
will be stored in working RAM. To store this data in nonvolatile memory, press CAL STORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Making Adjustments
2-29
CAL YTF Adjustment Routine
This is an automated adjustment.
For the HP 85462A only.
The CAL YTF adjustment routine accesses an internal adjustment routine. This routine adjusts
the slope and oset of the A4A4 YTF tune voltage for each harmonic mixing band. Perform
the \CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine" before performing this adjustment.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB cable
Figure 2-12. CAL YTF Adjustment Routine Setup
Alternate Manual Procedure
These manual procedures are provided so that you do not have to perform this procedure using
the automated version. This is only for your convenience
1. Perform the \CAL FREQ Adjustment Routine". This adjustment is located in this chapter.
2. Press the following keys:
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3 CAL YTF
4
The CAL YTF routine will take a few minutes to run. The internal adjustment data is
displayed when the routine has nishes.
If the message \NO CAL SIGNAL FOUND" is displayed, perform the Mixer Bias DAC
Initialization procedure located on the next page.
3. Press CAL STORE to store the YTF correction data in nonvolatile memory.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2-30
Making Adjustments
CAL YTF Adjustment Routine
Mixer Bias DAC Initialization
Perform this procedure only if the \NO CAL SIGNAL FOUND" message is displayed during the
\CAL YTF Adjustment Routine".
The \NO CAL SIGNAL FOUND" message indicates the current mixer bias DAC settings may not
be adequate to ensure that a signal is displayed. Initialization of the mixer bias DAC may be
required.
1. Press the following keys:
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY CAL DATA
2. Record the displayed \Optimum Bias" DAC value.
The optimum bias DAC value is the numbers located at the right of \MXRB" on the display.
Table 2-6. Mixer Bias DAC Correction Value
Displayed Optimum Acceptable Bias Range
Bias Value
800 to 1900
3. If the recorded \Optimum Bias" value is within the acceptable range indicated in Table 2-6,
RF section troubleshooting is necessary.
If the recorded \Optimum Bias" value is not within the acceptable range indicated in
Table 2-6, complete the rest of this procedure to initialize the mixer bias DAC values.
4. Press the following keys to allow entry of the default mixer bias DAC value:
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FREQUENCY5 02001 4Hz5
4DISPLAY5
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CHANGE TITLE
5. Enter CALMXRDATA 1600,1; as a title entry to set the mixer bias value to 1600 for band 1.
6. Press the following keys to store the mixer bias value for band 1 in nonvolatile memory:
4CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Cal
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EXECUTE TITLE
7. Repeat the \CAL YTF Adjustment Routine".
8. Perform the \CAL MXR Adjustment Routine".
Making Adjustments
2-31
CAL MXR Adjustment Routine
This is an automated adjustment.
For the HP 85462A only.
The CAL MXR adjustment routine optimizes the dc bias for the A4A6 Dual Band Mixer when
in high band. Perform the \CAL YTF Adjustment Routine" before performing this adjustment.
New frequency response correction constants must be developed following this adjustment
routine.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB cable
Figure 2-13. CAL MXR Adjustment Routine Setup
2-32
Making Adjustments
Third Converter and Second IF Bandpass
Third Converter and Second IF Bandpass
The 321.4 MHz, second IF bandpass lter is adjusted for maximum signal amplitude.
The CAL OUT amplitude is measured and adjusted for 020 dBm 60.4 dB. The insertion loss of a
low pass lter (LPF) and 10 dB attenuator are characterized. The harmonics of the CAL OUT
signal are suppressed with the LPF before the amplitude accuracy is measured using a power
meter.
Equipment Required
Synthesized sweeper
Microwave spectrum analyzer
Measuring receiver (used as a power meter)
Power meter
Low power sensor with a 50 MHz reference attenuator
Power sensor, 1 MHz to 350 MHz
Power splitter
Attenuator, 10 dB, Type N (m to f)
Low pass lter, 300 MHz
IF test board
Cable, Type N, 152 cm (60 in)
Cable, BNC, 120 cm (48 in)
Test cable, (two required)
Adapter, APC 3.5 (f) to Type N (f)
Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (m) (two required)
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f)
Figure 2-14. Second IF Bandpass Filter Adjustment Setup
Making Adjustments
2-33
Third Converter and Second IF Bandpass
Procedure
Second IF Bandpass Filter
1. Press INSTRUMENT PRESET on the microwave spectrum analyzer, then set the controls as
follows:
CENTER FREQUENCY
21.4 MHz
FREQUENCY SPAN
50 MHz
REFERENCE LEVEL
030 dBm
dB/DIV
1 dB/DIV
2. Set the synthesized sweeper controls as follows:
CW
321.4 MHz
POWER LEVEL
026 dBm
3. Turn the Receiver RF section 4LINE5 switch to OFF. Remove the instrument cover and the
RF cover.
4. Remove the A11 IF bandwidth lter assembly from the instrument.
5. Install the IF test board into the A11 slot.
6. Remove the W9 cable from A9J4, 321.4 MHz IF INPUT.
7. Connect the synthesized sweeper output to A9J4. Refer to Figure 2-14.
8. Press the Receiver RF section 4LINE5 switch to ON.
9. Press the following keys:
4PRESET5
4SPAN5 0 4Hz5
10. Connect the microwave spectrum analyzer RF INPUT to J1 of the IF test board. Refer to
Figure 2-14.
11. Adjust A9C44, A9C46, and A9C47 for maximum signal amplitude as observed on the
microwave spectrum analyzer. Adjust the reference level of the microwave spectrum
analyzer, as necessary, to display the signal below the top graticule.
12. Remove the test board from the A11 slot and reinstall the A11 IF bandwidth lter
assembly.
13. Reconnect W9 to A9J4, 321.4 MHz INPUT.
LPF, Attenuator and Adapter Insertion Loss Characterization
14. Zero and calibrate the measuring receiver and power sensor combination in LOG mode as
described in the measuring receiver operation manual.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to calibrate the power sensor without the reference attenuator
or damage to the power sensor will occur.
15. Zero and calibrate the power meter and 300 MHz power sensor, as described in the power
meter operation manual.
16. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-15. Connect the 300 MHz power sensor
directly to the power splitter (bypass the LPF, attenuator, and adapters).
2-34
Making Adjustments
Third Converter and Second IF Bandpass
Figure 2-15. LPF Characterization
17. Press INSTRUMENT PRESET on the synthesized sweeper. Set the controls as follows:
CW
300 MHz
POWER LEVEL
015 dBm
18. Allow the power sensors to settle, then on the measuring receiver, press RATIO mode.
Power indication should be 0 dB.
19. On the power meter, press the dB REF mode key. Power indication should be 0 dB.
20. Connect the LPF, attenuator, and adapters as shown in Figure 2-15.
21. Record the measuring receiver reading in dB. This is the relative error due to mismatch.
Mismatch Error
dB
22. Record the power meter reading in dB. This is the relative uncorrected insertion loss of the
LPF, attenuator, and adapters.
dB
Uncorrected Insertion Loss
23. Subtract the Mismatch Error (step 21) from the Uncorrected Insertion Loss (step 22). This
is the corrected insertion loss.
Corrected Insertion Loss
dB
For example, if the mismatch error is +0.3 dB and the uncorrected insertion loss is
010.2 dB, subtract the mismatch error to the insertion loss gives a corrected reading of
010.5 dB.
Making Adjustments
2-35
Third Converter and Second IF Bandpass
300 MHz Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment
24. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-16. The instrument should be positioned so
that the setup of the adapters, LPF, and attenuator do not bind. It may be necessary to
support the center of gravity of the devices.
Figure 2-16. 300 MHz Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup
25. On the power meter, press the dBm mode key. Record the power meter reading in dBm.
dBm
Power Meter Reading
26. Subtract the Corrected Insertion Loss (step 23) from the power meter reading (step 25) and
record as the CAL OUT power. The CAL OUT should be 020 dBm 60.4 dB.
CAL OUT Power = Power Meter Reading 0 Corrected Insertion Loss
For example, if the Corrected Insertion Loss is 010.0 dB, and the measuring receiver
reading is 030 dB, then 030 dB 0 (010.0) dB = 020 dB
dBm
CAL OUT Power
27. Adjust A9R19 CAL OUT ADJ accordingly if the CAL OUT amplitude is not 020 dBm
60.4 dB as calculated in step 26.
2-36
Making Adjustments
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
Absolute Amplitude Calibration
This is an automated adjustment.
The absolute amplitude calibration calibrates and checks HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver
RF section for absolute amplitude using the HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section
rmware's absolute amplitude calibration feature. This feature provides the correct value for
the calibration path error.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB cable
Calibration cable, 9 in, BNC
Adapter, BNC (f) to Type N (m) (two required)
Figure 2-17. Absolute Amplitude Calibration Setup
Making Adjustments
2-37
Low Frequency Flatness Calibration
This is an automated adjustment.
Using the absolute accuracy of the level generator, this adjustment nds the correct frequency
response of the instrument at certain frequency points. Once the measurement is taken, the
correct number is entered into the instrument's RAM. The instrument then uses this number to
correct the frequency response of the instrument.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB cable
Level generator
Cable, BNC 122 cm (48 in)
Adapter, BNC (f) to Type N (m)
Figure 2-18. Low Frequency Flatness Calibration Setup
2-38
Making Adjustments
Flatness Calibration
Flatness Calibration
This is an automated adjustment.
Using power meter leveling, this adjustment nds the correct frequency^M response of the
power meter level to determine the correct for the frequency^M response of the instrument at
certain frequency points. Once the measurement^M is taken, the correct number is entered
into the instrument's RAM. The^M instrument then uses this number to correct the frequency
response of the^M instrument.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB cable (three required)
Synthesized sweeper
Power meter
Power splitter
Power sensor
Cable, APC 3.5
Adapter, APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) (two required)
Adapter, APC 3.5 (f) to Type N (m)
Figure 2-19. Flatness Calibration Setup
Making Adjustments
2-39
PREAMP Flatness Calibration
This is an automated adjustment.
This test uses power meter leveling to level the source power so that the frequency response
of the instrument can be measured. Once the measurement is taken, the correction data is
entered into the instrument's RAM. The instrument then uses this data to correct for it's
frequency response.
Equipment Required
Computer
HP-IB cable (three required)
Synthesized sweeper
Power meter
Power splitter
Power sensor, low power
Cable, APC 3.5
Adapter, APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) (two required)
Adapter, APC 3.5 (f) to Type N (m)
Figure 2-20. PREAMP Flatness Calibration Setup
2-40
Making Adjustments
Time and Date
Time and Date
The time and date are displayed in the top left corner of the display when the time-date mode
is activated. The time and date are changed using the front-panel keys.
Procedure
1. To turn the time and date ON or OFF, press the following keys:
4CONFIG5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Time Date
TIMEDATE ON OFF (ON) or (OFF) as desired
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The time and date will be displayed in the top-left corner with ON underlined.
2. The time and date may be displayed as month, day, and year (MDY) or as day, month, and
year (DMY). To change the display, press the following keys:
4CONFIG5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Time Date
DATEMODE MDY DMY (MDY) or (DMY) as desired
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. To change the date, press the following keys:
4CONFIG5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Time Date
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SET DATE
The active function block of the instrument will display YYMMDD (year, month, and day). Use
the data keys on the instrument to enter the correct date as YYMMDD. Terminate the entry
with one of the 4ENTER5 data keys.
4. To change the time, press the following keys:
4CONFIG5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Time Date
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SET TIME
The active function block of the instrument will display HHMMSS (hours, minutes, and
seconds). Use the data keys on the instrument to enter the correct time as HHMMSS.
Terminate the entry with one of the 4ENTER5 data keys.
Making Adjustments
2-41
First LO Distribution Amplier
The gate bias for the A4A7 LO distribution amplier assembly is adjusted to the value specied
on a label on the RF section. The LO power is adjusted so that the LO SENSE voltage is equal
to the value specied on the label. The adjustments are made on the A8 tracking generator
control assembly, which is located in the card cage.
Equipment Required
Measuring receiver
Digital multimeter
Power sensor
DMM test leads
Adapter, dual banana plug
Figure 2-21. First LO Distribution Amplier Adjustment Setup
Procedure
1. Set the 4LINE5 switch to o, then disconnect the line cord. Remove the cover assembly and
the RF cover, then reconnect the line cord.
2. Remove the 50 termination from the rear-panel LO OUTPUT connector.
3. Connect the positive DMM test lead to A8TP5, GB (gate bias). Connect the negative DMM
test lead to A8TP2, AGND (analog ground). See Figure 2-21.
4. Set the digital voltmeter controls as follows:
FUNCTION
DC VOLTS
RANGE
10 V
RESOLUTION
1 mV
2-42
Making Adjustments
First LO Distribution Amplier
5. Set the 4LINE5 switch to on.
6. Adjust A8R29 (GATE) for a digital voltmeter reading within 5 mV of the GATE (gate bias)
voltage printed on the RF section label. This label is attached to the top of the A4 RF
section below the lters located on top.
7. Zero and calibrate the measuring receiver and power sensor in LOG mode. (Power levels
read in dBm.) Enter the power sensor's 5 GHz cal factor into the measuring receiver.
8. Connect the power sensor to the LO OUTPUT.
9. On the instrument, press:
4PRESET5, 4SPAN5, ZERO SPAN , 4FREQUENCY5, 4.6786, 4GHz5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Connect the positive DMM test lead to A8TP4, LOS (LO sense).
11. Note the SENS (LO sense) voltage printed on the RF section label. Adjust A8R25, LO AMP
(LO power) until the DMM reads equal to the SENS voltage printed on the RF section label.
12. Check that the measuring receiver power level reads greater than +12 dBm.
13. Disconnect the power sensor from LO OUTPUT, then reconnect the 50 termination to LO
OUTPUT.
14. Disconnect the DMM leads from A8TP4 and A8TP2.
Making Adjustments
2-43
Tracking Generator Power Level
Not recommended for eld repair.
This is not a routine adjustment. This adjustment should only be performed if the tracking
generator fails the tracking generator level atness test or the tracking generator absolute
amplitude, vernier, and power test.
The tracking generator has two adjustments for setting the output power. The 010 dB ADJ
(A4A10R13) sets the power level when the source power level is set to 010 dBm, and the 0 dB
ADJ (A4A10R18) sets the power level when the source power level is set to 0 dBm. The 010
dB ADJ acts as an oset adjustment, while 0 dB ADJ acts as a gain adjustment.
These adjustments are set in the factory for a 10 dB dierence in output power between the
010 dBm and 0 dBm source power level settings. When installing a replacement tracking
generator, it should only be necessary to adjust 010 dB ADJ (the oset adjustment) to account
for variations in cable loss from the tracking generator to the TRACKING GENERATOR
OUTPUT connector. This adjustment is done at a 0 dBm source power level setting. This
ensures that the absolute power level with a 0 dBm source power level setting is 0 dBm, with
little or no aect on the vernier accuracy.
In some cases, the power level at the 010 dBm source power level setting might be out of
tolerance. In such cases, the 010 dB ADJ is set at a source power level setting of 010 dBm and
the 0 dB ADJ is set at a source power level setting of 0 dBm. These two adjustments must be
repeated until the power level at the two settings are within the given tolerances.
Equipment Required
Measuring receiver
Power sensor, 1 MHz to 350 MHz
Cable, Type N, 62 cm (24 in.)
Procedure
1. Set the 4LINE5 switch to o. Disconnect the line cord. Remove the instrument cover and the
RF cover, then reconnect the line cord.
2. Set the AOFST by pressing the following keys:
4PRESET5
4DISPLAY5 Change Title
Enter the following :
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MWR 16753252,0:CAL STORE;
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag DISPLAY CAL DATA NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE
Verify that AOFST=0 under the tracking generator readouts.
3. Connect the cable between the TRACKING GENERATOR OUTPUT and RF INPUT
connectors on the instrument.
4. Press 4PRESET5 on the instrument and set the controls as follows:
CENTER FREQ
300 MHz
SPAN
0 Hz
2-44
Making Adjustments
Tracking Generator Power Level
5. On the instrument, press the following keys:
4BW5 10 4kHz5
4TRACK GEN5 SRC PWR ON OFF (ON) 10 40dBm5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. On the instrument, press TRACKING PEAK . Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Zero and calibrate the measuring-receiver/power-sensor combination in log mode (power
levels readout in dBm). Enter the power sensor 300 MHz cal factor into the measuring
receiver.
8. Disconnect the cable from the TRACKING GENERATOR OUTPUT connector, then connect
the power sensor to the TRACKING GENERATOR OUTPUT connector. See Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22. Tracking Generator Power Level Adjustment Setup
Making Adjustments
2-45
Tracking Generator Power Level
Figure 2-23. Tracking Generator Power Level Adjustment Locations
9. On the instrument, press SRC PWR ON OFF (ON), 0, 4dBm5, 4SWEEP5.
Note that some instruments may have sealing compound over A4A10R13 (010 dB ADJ)
and A4A10R18 (0 dB ADJ) adjustments. Remove this compound before making these
adjustments.
10. Adjust 010 dB ADJ (A4A10R13) for a 0 dBm 60.05 dB reading on the measuring receiver.
Refer to Figure 2-23 for adjustment location.
11. Set the SRC PWR level to 010 dBm. Note the power displayed on the measuring receiver.
If the power level is 09.77 dBm to 010.23 dBm, then the adjustment is complete. If the
power level is not within the range, then continue with step 12.
Power at 010 dBm Setting
dBm
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2-46
Making Adjustments
Tracking Generator Power Level
12. If the power level noted in step 11 was outside the range of 010 dBm 60.23 dB perform
the following:
1. With the SRC PWR level set to 010 dBm, adjust 010 dB ADJ (A4A10R13) for a 010
dBm 60.1 dB reading on the measuring receiver. Refer to Figure 2-23 for adjustment
location.
2. Set the SRC PWR level to 0 dBm. Adjust 0 dB ADJ (A4A10R18) for a 0 dBm 60.2 dB
reading on the measuring receiver. Refer to Figure 2-23 for adjustment location.
3. Repeat this step until the output power level is within the tolerances indicated at
both the 010 dBm and 0 dBm SRC PWR level settings. Adjust 010 dB ADJ only with
the SRC POWER level set to 010 dBm, and adjust 0 dB ADJ only with the SRC PWR level
set to 0 dBm.
Making Adjustments
2-47
Tracking Oscillator
Not recommended for eld repair.
This is not a routine adjustment. This adjustment should only be performed if the range of
either the automatic tracking peak adjustment ( TRACKING PEAK ) or the manual tracking peak
adjustment ( MAN TRK ADJUST ) is insucient to peak a signal.
The centering of the tracking oscillator range is adjusted in the factory to ensure that the
tracking adjustment will work properly. Over a period of 5 years, however, the center
frequency of the tracking oscillator range may drift outside of acceptable limits.
The tracking oscillator range is checked rst. A tracking peak test is performed and the
output frequency is recorded. Then the manual tracking adjustment is set to its minimum
and maximum values and the output frequency is recorded. The minimum and maximum
frequencies are compared to the peaked frequency. If the dierence is less than 5 kHz,
adjustment is necessary.
The adjustment recenters the tracking oscillator range. The A4 RF assembly is placed in its
service position to perform this adjustment. A frequency counter is used to measure the output
frequency.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Equipment Required
Microwave frequency counter
Termination, 50 Alignment tool, non-metallic
Cable, BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (two required)
Adapter, Type N (f) to APC-3.5 (f)
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f)
Figure 2-24. Frequency Tracking Range Setup
2-48
Making Adjustments
Tracking Oscillator
Procedure
Frequency Tracking Range Check
1. Connect a cable between the TRACKING GENERATOR OUTPUT and RF INPUT connectors
on the instrument.
2. Remove the rear-panel jumper that is between the 10MHz REF OUTPUT and EXT REF IN
jacks. Connect the frequency counter FREQ STD OUT connector to the instrument EXT
REF IN connector as shown in Figure 2-24.
3. Press 4PRESET5 on the instrument, then set the controls as follows:
CENTER FREQ
500 MHz
SPAN
0 Hz
4. On the instrument, press the following key:
4BW5 10 4kHz5
4TRACK GEN5 SRC PWR ON OFF (ON) 5 40dBm5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. On the instrument press TRACKING PEAK . Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Set the microwave frequency counter controls as follows:
SAMPLE RATE
Midrange
10 Hz-500 MHz/500 MHz-26.5 GHz Switch
500 MHz - 26.5 GHz
RESOLUTION
1 Hz
7. Connect the TRACKING GENERATOR OUTPUT connector to the microwave frequency
counter input as shown in Figure 2-24.
8. Wait for the microwave frequency counter to gate two or three times, then record the
microwave frequency counter reading below as the peaked frequency:
Peaked Frequency:
MHz
9. On the instrument, press MAN TRK ADJUST , 4095, 4ENTER5. Wait for the microwave
frequency counter to gate two or three times, then record the microwave frequency
counter reading below as the minimum frequency:
Minimum Frequency:
MHz
10. On the instrument, press MAN TRK ADJUST , 0, 4ENTER5. Wait for the microwave frequency
counter to gate two or three times, then record the microwave frequency counter reading
below as the maximum frequency:
Maximum Frequency:
MHz
11. If the absolute value of the dierence between either the minimum or maximum frequency
and the peaked frequency is less than 5 kHz, proceed with the adjustment procedure
below. If the dierences are greater than 5 kHz, no adjustment is necessary.
12. Disconnect the cable from the EXT REF IN connector, then replace the rear-panel jumper.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Making Adjustments
2-49
Tracking Oscillator
Adjust the Tracking Oscillator
13. Remove the A4 RF section assembly as described in Chapter 6. With A4 sitting on top of
the instrument, reconnect all cables from A4 to their respective jacks on the A5 analog
interface board, the A9 3rd converter board, the A23 counter lock assembly, and the
A8 tracking generator control board. Reconnect W40 to A4A10J8. Connect the 50 termination to the end of W42.
14. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-25. The microwave frequency counter
provides the frequency reference for the instrument.
Figure 2-25. Tracking Oscillator Adjustment Setup
15. Set the 4LINE5 switch to on. Press 4TRACK GEN5, SRC PWR ON OFF (ON). Allow the
instrument to warm up for at least 5 minutes. Set the controls as follows:
CENTER FREQ
300 MHz
SPAN
0 Hz
16. Set the microwave frequency counter controls as follows:
SAMPLE RATE
Fully CCW
10 Hz-500 MHz/500 MHz-26.5 GHz Switch
10 Hz-500 MHz
50 - 1 M
Switch
50 17. Remove the screw, located on the front of the tracking generator, used to seal the tracking
oscillator adjustment.
18. On the instrument, press 4TRACK GEN5, MAN TRK ADJUST , 0, 4Hz5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
19. Record the microwave frequency counter reading in Table 2-7 as F1.
20. On the instrument, press MAN TRK ADJUST , 4095, 4Hz5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
21. Record the microwave frequency counter reading in Table 2-7 as F2.
22. Calculate Fcenter as shown below, and record it in Table 2-7.
Fcenter = (F1 + F2)/2
2-50
Making Adjustments
Tracking Oscillator
23. Set SRC TRACK ADJ to 350. This sets the tracking oscillator near the center of its frequency
range. (The relationship between the SRC TRACK ADJ DAC number and the output
frequency is nonlinear.) Adjust SRC TRACK ADJ until the microwave frequency counter
reads Fcenter 6100 Hz.
24. Record the value of SRC TRACK ADJ in Table 2-7.
CAUTION
A4A10C3 (TRK OSC CTR) is rated for a maximum of 10 adjustment cycles. Due
to this limitation, adjust TRK OSC CTR only when absolutely necessary.
25. Adjust A4A10C3 (TRK OSC CTR) until the microwave frequency counter reads 300 MHz
6500 Hz.
26. Repeat steps 18 through 24 at least once more until no further adjustment of A4A10C3 is
necessary.
27. Set the 4LINE5 switch to o, then replace the screw removed in step 17.
28. Reinstall the A4 RF section assembly into the instrument.
29. Replace the rear-panel jumper between the 10MHz REF OUTPUT and EXT REF IN
connectors.
Table 2-7. Tracking Oscillator Range Centering
N
F1
(MHz)
F2
(MHz)
Fcenter
(MHz)
SRC TRACK ADJ
Setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
Making Adjustments
2-51
3
Troubleshooting the Instrument
This chapter provides information that is useful when starting to troubleshoot an instrument
failure. It provides procedures for troubleshooting common failures and isolating problems in
the instrument.
Additional troubleshooting details for specic assemblies are available in Chapter 4 and
Chapter 5 of this service guide. Assembly descriptions are located in Chapter 8.
Before You Start
There are four things you should do before starting to troubleshoot a failure:
Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the instrument, and read the
general safety instructions and the symbol denitions given in the front of the service guide.
The instrument contains static sensitive components. Read the section entitled \Protection
From Electrostatic Discharge" in Chapter 1.
Become familiar with the organization of the troubleshooting information in this chapter and
the chapters that follow.
Read the rest of this section.
WARNING
This instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages.
Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the instrument
and read the symbol denitions given in the front of this guide before
you begin the procedures in this chapter. Refer to \General Safety
Considerations" at the front of this manual for general WARNINGS and
CAUTIONS related to safety considerations. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
related to specic procedures are included with the procedure.
Failure to heed the safety precautions can result in severe or fatal injury.
Service equipment you will need
Refer to Chapter 13 of this guide for a list of the recommended test equipment needed to
troubleshoot and repair the instrument. Although Hewlett-Packard equipment is recommended,
any equipment that meets the critical specications given in the table can be substituted for
the recommended model.
Refer to Chapter 13 of this guide for a list of required service and hand tools needed to
troubleshoot and repair the instrument.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-1
Replacement Assemblies
None of the HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver or HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF
section assemblies are repairable to the component level. The following lists the replaceable
assemblies.
A2 display
A4A1 2.9 GHz low-pass lter
A4A3 second converter
A3A4 input attenuator
A4A6 dual band mixer
A4A9 EYO
A4A4 switched YIG-tuned lter (SYTF)
A4A2 321.4 MHz band-pass lter
A4A7 local oscillator distribution amplier (LODA)
A4A10 tracking generator
A16 power supply assembly
A20 10 MHz precision reference
A23A1 counter lock sampler
A6 narrow bandwidth board
Refer to Chapter 10 when ordering replacement assemblies.
After a repair
If one or more assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related adjustments and
performance verication tests. Refer to Chapter 2 for a table of the related adjustments and
performance verication tests required for each assembly.
3-2
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Problems at Instrument Power-Up
This section describes symptoms that can occur when the instrument is rst powered on.
CAUTION
Immediately unplug the instrument from the ac power line if the unit shows
any of the following symptoms:
Smoke, arcing, or unusual noise from inside the unit.
No response of any kind when unit is plugged into ac power mains and
turned on.
The instruments's ac power fuse blows.
A circuit breaker or fuse on the main ac power line opens.
These potentially serious faults must be corrected before proceeding. Refer to
\Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument."
The AM/FM speaker normally emits noise from the speaker at power-up. This is not a problem,
adjust the volume control as desired.
Table 3-1 lists symptoms that can occur when the instrument is rst powered on. Refer to this
table for an overview of symptoms at power-up and their possible cause.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-3
Table 3-1. Instrument Failure Symptoms at Power-On
Line
LED
A16
LED
024 V
A16
LED
015 V
A16
LED
+15 V
A16
LED
+5 V
A16 A24 LEDs
LED DS1-DS16
+12 V
B1
Fan
A2
Display
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
M
M
ON
ON
ON
M
ON
ON
ON
M
ON
ON
W1 wiring to Line LED, or Line
LED
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Line fuse, A16 primary circuit
failure
M
M
M
X
M
X
A16 primary overload
OFF
ON
ON
ON
X
ON
X
ON
OFF
M
M
M
X
M
X
015 V supply failure
015 V supply overload
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
X
ON
X
+15 V supply failure
ON
ON
M
OFF
M
M
X
M
X
+15 V supply overload
OFF
M
M
M
OFF
M
X
M
X
+5 V supply failure or supply
overload
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
X
OFF
OFF
+12 V supply failure
ON
M
M
M
M
OFF
X
OFF
OFF
+12 V supply overload
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
M
OFF
ON
Fan failure or open along +12
V supply line to fan
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
No HPWRUP signal
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
X
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
M
ON
OFF
Display failure,
intensity-control failure, or A24
memory failure
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
M
ON
M
Intensity control failure, or A24
memory failure
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
X
X
X
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
X
X
X
024 V supply failure
024 V supply overload
M = LED or assembly may be momentarily on, then go o.
X = Status of LED or assembly does not matter.
1 DS13 remains on after 4PRESET5 is pressed
3-4
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Possible Cause
Normal Operation1
A24 assembly failure
Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument
When an instrument appears to be dead there is often little evidence that points directly to
the cause. This section provides steps and solutions to typical failure modes relating to an
inoperative instrument.
Before troubleshooting a instrument, ensure that it has been set up correctly and the power
supply is functioning properly by performing Step 1 and Step 2 below.
Step 1. Check the Instrument Setup
Check that the voltage-selector switch on the rear of the A16 power supply is correct for the
ac power line in use.
Check that the ac line-power voltage is present and that the instrument line cord is in good
condition.
Check the line fuse. If it has blown, perhaps a nonstandard fuse with too low a current
rating was installed. If the line fuse still blows, continue with the section entitled \If the line
fuse has blown."
CAUTION
If the fuse must be replaced, make sure that the replacement fuse is specied
for the line voltage in use. Failure to use the proper fuse specied for the
instrument can cause substantial instrument damage, and is a serious re
hazard.
Step 2. Check the Power Supply
The power supply voltages are checked using a digital voltmeter.
Figure 3-1. A24 Power Supply Test Point Location
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-5
1. Turn the 4LINE5 switch to OFF. Remove the instrument cover assembly.
2. Connect the DMM test leads from the chassis (ground) to A24TP403. See Figure 3-1.
WARNING
The instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the
safety symbols provided on the instrument, and in the general safety
instructions in this guide, before operating the unit with the cover
removed. Ensure that safety instructions are strictly followed. Failure to
do so can result in severe or fatal injury.
3. Turn the 4LINE5 switch to ON.
4. Locate the power supply test point using Figure 3-1. Check the supply voltages as indicated
in Table 3-2. Be sure the voltage readings are within the limits shown in Table 3-2.
5. Repeat step 4 for each power supply listed in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. Power Supply Tolerances
Power Supply Test Point
3-6
Specication
+5.1 V
A24TP403
+5.0 to +5.25 Vdc
+12.0 V
A24TP404
+11.1 to +12.8 Vdc
+15.0 V
A24TP401 +14.7 to +15.25 Vdc
015.0 V
A24TP402
Troubleshooting the Instrument
014.7 to 015.25 Vdc
If the line fuse has blown
If the instrument was set up correctly, and the line fuse still blows, suspect that the power
supply is defective.
CAUTION
The A16 power supply assembly is a switching power-supply and does not
operate normally without a load on the dc power-supply outputs. Do not
attempt to operate the power supply out of the instrument. Damage to the
power supply may occur.
If the fan is not operating
CAUTION The A16 power supply may be hot if the instrument has been operating
without the fan running. Allow the instrument to cool down before
troubleshooting.
The B1 fan receives +12 V dc from the A16 power supply after the power supply receives the
start-up signal, low-power-on (LPWRON) from the front-panel LINE switch. First check the
+12 V dc supply to the fan at the Rear Frame.
1. Disconnect the line-power cord from the instrument.
2. Look through the fan grill. If the cables routed near the fan are jammed in the fan, remove
the fan from the rear frame, reroute the cables, and remount the fan.
3. Remove the fan from the rear frame and disconnect its wiring connector from A15J19.
4. Reconnect line power to the instrument and turn it on.
5. Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" in Chapter 4 for the pin
identication of the fan-supply connector, A15J19, and the A16 power-supply connector,
A16J1.
6. Check that pin 2 on A15J19 is connected to digital common-ground (DCOM). If the ground
connection is open, suspect the A15 Motherboard.
7. Check pin 1 on A15J19 for +12 V dc.
If the +12 V dc is present, check for a defective B1 fan assembly by connecting the fan to
an external DC supply.
If the +12 V dc is absent, do the following:
Disconnect the instrument from the line power.
Remove the A16 power supply.
Check the continuity of the A15 motherboard from pin 1 on A15J19 to pin 8 on A15J13.
If the continuity of the motherboard is correct, suspect a bad connection on the
D sub-connector (between pin 8 on A15J13 and pin 8 on A16J1), a defective power
supply, or a damaged ribbon cable between the motherboard and the power supply.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-7
If all the A16 power-supply LEDs are o
If all the power-supply LEDs remain o, the low-power-on (LPWRON) control line must
be checked from the front-panel line switch, through the A24 processor assembly and A15
motherboard, to the A16 power supply.
1. Disconnect the instrument line-power cord, remove the instrument cover, and turn the
instrument so its bottom side faces up.
2. Check that the line switch provides the correct LPWRON signal at pin 2 on A24J9.
LPWRON becomes TTL low when the line switch is on. The closed switch connects A24J9
pin 2 to the digital common-ground (DCOM) through the W1 wiring harness.
LPWRON is pulled TTL high by the power supply when the line switch is in STANDBY.
3. Check the continuity of the LPWRON signal trace from pin 2 on A24J9 to pin 19 on A15J13.
Refer to Figure 3-2 for the pin designations of the A15J13 connector.
4. Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" in Chapter 4 for the
connector-pin designations of the A24 and A15 assemblies.
5. If the LPWRON signal path from the previous step is correct, suspect a bad connection on
the D sub-connector (between pin 19 on A15J13 and pin 19 on A16J1), a defective power
supply, or a damaged ribbon cable between the motherboard and the power supply. Isolate
the failure to the power supply by substituting another power supply assembly into the
instrument.
Figure 3-2. A15J13 Connector-Pin Designation
3-8
Troubleshooting the Instrument
If individual A16 power-supply LEDs are o
If one or more of the A16 power-supply LEDs remain o, determine whether the power supply
is defective or circuitry on the dc power-supply distribution network is loading the power
supply down by substituting another power supply assembly.
If all the A16 power-supply LEDs are on
If all the A16 power-supply LEDs are on, check the dc power-supply voltages on the A24
processor assembly. Check each voltage at the A24 assembly test points, TP401 through TP404.
Refer to Figure 8-5, for the dc-voltage assignment of each test point.
If a dc voltage is missing, suspect an open connection in the dc power-supply distribution
network. Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" in Chapter 4 for the
connector-pin designation of each assembly connected to the missing dc voltage supply.
If Using Defaults <N> is displayed
A dead BT1 battery will cause the loss of all correction-factor and correction-constant data.
When the data stored in memory is lost, the instrument substitutes the default-correction data
stored in ROM and performs the instrument-preset routine. The message Using Defaults <N>
will appear on the display. Where N is an integer that represents a code that was used during
the development of the rmware.
If the battery is dead, replace the battery as described in Chapter 6.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-9
Troubleshooting the A2 Display Assembly
Use this section when the A16 power supply is functioning but there appears to be a defective
A2 display assembly. Check the following conditions before proceeding with the A2 display
troubleshooting procedures.
Check that the B1 fan is running and the green LED above the 4LINE5 switch is on when
the instrument is on. If they are not operating, refer to the appropriate section of
\Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument."
Check the ve LEDs on the A16 power supply assembly. If they are not on, refer to the
appropriate section of \Troubleshooting an Inoperative Instrument."
Note that the A16 power supply draws current whenever ac line power is applied, even
when the LINE switch is in the STANDBY position. However, no voltages are distributed
outside the A16 power supply assembly when the LINE switch is in the STANDBY position,
except for a TTL high on LPWRON.
WARNING
The following procedures are likely to expose dangerous voltages.
These servicing instructions are for use by qualied personnel only.
To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are
qualied to do so.
Refer to \General Safety Considerations" in the front of this manual.
Check the dc power supplied to the A17 graphic signal processor assembly. There is +65
Vdc and +5 Vdc supplied to A17 via W73. These supplies can be checked at the output
connector on top of the power supply. Refer to Figure 3-3.
These supplies can also be checked on the A17 graphic signal processor assembly to make
sure the continuity of the cable assembly supplying the A17 graphic signal processor
assembly is good.
Figure 3-3. Detail of Power Supply Connector, A16J6
Check the dc power supplied to W84 for the A2 display. There should be +65 Vdc on pins 1
through 2 of J5 on the A17 graphic signal processor assembly.
3-10
Troubleshooting the Instrument
WARNING
High voltage is present within the A2 display and remains for some time
after it has been disconnected. Be careful while troubleshooting the
display outside of its enclosure.
If an A2 display assembly failure is suspected, the display must be removed from its enclosure
for further troubleshooting. Refer to the A2 display assembly removal procedure in Chapter 6
before checking the continuity of the W2 wire harness. If W2 is good, suspect the A2 display or
W84. W84 is part of the A2 display.
The A2 display is not eld-repairable, and must be replaced as an assembly. Refer to
Chapter 10 for HP part number information.
After replacement, adjust the new display, refer to Chapter 2.
If the display has an intensity problem
CAUTION The A1R1 potentiometer leads are easily broken. Do not twist the W102 wire
harness where it attaches to A1R1.
1. Disconnect W102 from the A1R1 intensity control potentiometer on the front frame.
2. Check the continuity and resistance range (0 to 100 k
) of the inner potentiometer on A1R1.
3. Reconnect W102 to A1R1.
If the display is blank
1. Verify the RGB monitor outputs, located on the rear frame, by performing the following:
Attach an external color monitor to the RGB monitor output connectors. The MONITOR
OUTPUT drives an RGB monitor with horizontal at 3.14 s and a vertical rate of 111.0 s.
The \G" line from the A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly is also used as the \Sync"
line. If a normal instrument display is present, the display failure is limited to the A2
display and its related circuitry.
2. Verify that there is a good connection between the A25 graphics processor board and the
A24 processor board assembly by pressing on the connection.
3. Verify the High-Power-Up signal from the A16 power supply by Checking for the +5 V
TTL HPWRUP signal at pin 54 on the A24J1. The A24J1 connector is on the trace side
of the A24 processor assembly. Refer to Figure 3-4 for the numbering order of A24J1
connector-pins accessible from the component side of the A24 processor assembly.
Note that the A16 power supply assembly sends the high-power-up (HPWRUP) signal to the
A24 processor assembly after it receives the low-power-on (LPWRON) signal and the +5
V supply has stabilized. If HPWRUP is low, the display remains blank and the A24 failure
LEDs (DS1 through DS16) will not come on during power-up.
If the HPWRUP signal is missing, trace the signal back through the A15 motherboard to
the A16 power supply assembly, pin 37 on A16J1. Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15
Motherboard Assembly" in Chapter 4 for the connector-pin designation of the HPWRUP
signal path.
The HPWRUP signal can be measured on pin 55 of each card-cage slot on the A15
motherboard. Refer to Figure 3-5 for the numbering order of the connector pins on A15J3
through A15J6.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-11
If the HPWRUP signal is present, yet one or more of the A24 processor assembly outputs
is incorrect, suspect a defective A24 processor assembly.
If all the A24 display outputs are correct, suspect a defective A2 display.
Figure 3-4. A24J1 Connector-Pin Orientation
Figure 3-5. Card-Cage Connector-Pin Orientation
3-12
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Isolating an RF, LO, IF, or Video Problem
This section provides techniques for isolating amplitude failures along the signal path from the
instrument input to the A24 processor assembly. These troubleshooting methods isolate the
failure to one of four functional sections in the instrument:
The RF section. This section includes the assemblies from the instrument input to the input
of the A9 third converter assembly.
The LO section. This section involves the assemblies that provide a local oscillator output to
the RF section. The A23 counter lock assembly is one of the assemblies involved.
The IF section. This section includes the assemblies from the input of the A9 Third
Converter to the output of the A14 log amplier assembly.
The video section. This includes the circuitry from the output of the A14 log amplier
assembly to the ADC section on the A24 processor. This section of the instrument processes
the detected 21.4 MHz IF signal from the IF section.
Procedure for Isolating an RF, LO, IF, or Video Failure
Perform the following procedure to isolate an RF, LO, IF, or Video problem:
1. With the failure symptoms present, switch the instrument from positive-peak detector to
sample-detector mode.
If the instrument returns to normal operation, the positive-peak detector is defective.
If the failure symptoms remain, continue with the next step.
2. Verify the 2 V reference detector and the ground reference detector are operating properly
by performing the internal service-diagnostic routines in this chapter.
If either the 2 V or ground reference detectors are not operating properly, suspect the
ADC circuitry on the A24 processor board assembly.
If the 2 V or ground reference detectors are functioning properly, continue with the next
step.
3. Use the display calibration data to nd the DAC value used to adjust the gain at the output
of the A9 third converter assembly. The DAC value is in the REF LVL CAL DAC block. Refer
to the internal service-diagnostic routines in this chapter.
The DAC value is unique for each instrument. The CAL AMP self-calibration routine adjusts
this value based on the amplitude of the digitized video signal on the processor board
assembly. The calibration routine makes this adjustment while calibrating the reference
level at top screen.
After running the CAL AMP calibration routine, the REF LVL CAL DAC has a typical value of
165 with a range of 130 to 185. The higher the DAC value, the greater the output from the
A9 third converter assembly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-13
4. Check the signal path from the instrument input to the output of the A14 log amplier
assembly. Refer to \IF Power-Level Measurement" located in Chapter 4 of this guide.
5. Measure the 321.4 MHz input to the A9 third converter assembly by connecting the CAL
OUT to the INPUT 50 with a BNC cable.
Then, disconnect the W9 cable assembly from the third converter and measure at the cable
output.
The 321.4 MHz input typically measures between 036 and 039 dBm with zero input
attenuation.
If the REF LVL CAL DAC value is 255 and the input to the A9 third converter assembly
is above the test limit, suspect a low gain problem in the IF section. Continue with the
troubleshooting procedures in \IF Power-Level Measurement."
If the REF LVL CAL DAC value is 0 and the input to the A9 third converter assembly is
nominal, suspect a high gain problem in the IF section. Continue with the troubleshooting
procedures in \IF Power-Level Measurement."
If the REF LVL CAL DAC value is 255 and the input to the A9 third converter is below the
test limit, suspect a low gain problem in the RF/LO sections. Continue with the next step.
If the REF LVL CAL DAC value is 0 and the input to the A9 third converter is above the
test limit, suspect a high gain problem in the RF section. Continue with the next step.
6. Set up the instrument as shown in \Instrument Settings for RF Power-Level Measurement"
in this chapter.
7. Isolate the failure to an RF or LO assembly by performing the \Making the RF Power-Level
Measurements" procedure in Chapter 5 of this guide.
Once the problem has been isolated to one of the four sections, use standard troubleshooting
methods to locate the source of the failure.
The following failure symptoms are examples to help isolate a failure to either the RF, LO, IF,
or Video sections.
If there is only a horizontal trace with no signal or noise oor present
1. Check for a peak-detector failure by switching between the positive-peak detector and
sample detector modes.
2. Perform the 2 V reference detector and ground reference detector diagnostic routines. Refer
to \Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines" in this chapter.
3. Check the signal path from the instrument input to the output of the A14 log amplier
assembly. Refer to \IF Power-Level Measurement" located in Chapter 4 of this service guide.
3-14
Troubleshooting the Instrument
If the instrument displays a low signal level
A low signal level can cause the CAL AMP self-calibration routine to stop if the REF LVL
CAL DAC reaches 255. The routine does not store the correction factors from an incomplete
calibration; however, the corrections from the incomplete calibration are temporarily retained
and can be viewed by displaying the calibration data ( DISPLAY CAL DATA ) as described in
\Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines." Refer to Chapter 12 for a description of the
displayed error message.
Perform the following steps to help isolate the problem.
1. Check the amplitude of the CAL OUT signal and ensure that the CAL OUT signal is properly
connected to the instrument input. (The self-calibration routines perform an initial set-up
check. If the signal level is below 040 dBm, the routine fails.)
2. Use DEFAULT CAL DATA to set the REF LVL CAL DAC to a default value of 200 by pressing
the following keys:
4FREQUENCY5 0 2001 4Hz5
4CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEFAULT CAL DATA
3. Check the signal path from the instrument input to the output of the A14 log amplier
assembly. Refer to \IF Power-Level Measurement" located in Chapter 4 of this service guide.
If the instrument displays a high noise oor
This problem can be due to low gain somewhere along the RF or IF signal path.
The CAL AMP self-calibration routine compensates for the low gain by increasing the gain of
the A9 Third Converter assembly using the REF LVL CAL DAC. The excessive gain may cause
the high noise oor by amplifying the noise level from the RF section or over-driving a stage in
the IF section.
The instrument may also fail the displayed average noise performance verication test.
1. Check the REF LVL CAL DAC value using DISPLAY CAL DATA as described in \Using the
Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines." This type of problem causes the DAC value to be close
to the 255 maximum.
2. Measure the 321.4 MHz input to the A9 third converter assembly by connecting the CAL
OUT to the INPUT 50 with a BNC cable. Make sure the preamplier is o.
Then, disconnect the W9 cable assembly from the third converter and measure at the cable
output.
The 321.4 MHz input typically measures between 036 and 039 dBm with zero input
attenuation.
3. Check the signal path from the instrument input to the output of the A14 log amplier
assembly. Refer to \IF Power-Level Measurement" located in Chapter 4 of this service guide.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-15
If the displayed signal amplitude appears too high
This problem is caused by high gain somewhere along the RF or IF signal path. The displayed
CAL OUT signal appears to have an amplitude greater than 020 dBm. The excessive gain
causes a calibration error that makes the CAL OUT signal appear higher than normal.
The CAL AMP self-calibration routine may not fail.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Check for a REF LVL CAL DAC value of 0 using DISPLAY CAL DATA as described in \Using
the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines." The values in the ERR column are 0.00 or have a
negative value.
Measure the 321.4 MHz input to the A9 third converter assembly by pressing:
4INPUT5
VIEW CAL ON OFF until ON is underlined
Then, disconnect the W9 cable assembly from the third converter and measure at the cable
output.
The 321.4 MHz input typically measures between 036 and 039 dBm with zero input
attenuation.
Check the signal path from the instrument input to the output of the A14 log amplier
assembly. Refer to \IF Power-Level Measurement" located in Chapter 4 of this service guide.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the displayed signal is distorted
This failure may result in the displayed signal having distinct lobes on each side. A high noise
oor may also be present.
Note that an intermittent hardware failure during the CAL AMP self-calibration routine
can cause this type of amplitude failure. The erroneous calibration data causes the failure
symptoms even while the hardware is operating normally.
1. If the signal looks normal when CORRECT ON OFF is o, check the values in the RFATN
and SGAIN columns using DISPLAY CAL DATA as described in \Using the Internal
Service-Diagnostic Routines."
If a correction factor in either column is greater than two, there may be a failure on the
input attenuator or the A12 amplitude control assembly.
Refer to Chapter 11 for the description of the corrections that are disabled when
CORRECT ON OFF is o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Troubleshoot the input attenuator or step gain symptoms with CORRECT ON OFF turned o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Measure the 321.4 MHz input to the A9 third converter assembly by connecting the CAL
OUT to the INPUT 50 with a BNC cable.
Then, disconnect the W9 cable assembly from the third converter and measure at the cable
output.
The 321.4 MHz input typically measures between 036 and 039 dBm with zero input
attenuation.
4. Check the signal path from the instrument input to the output of the A14 log amplier
assembly. Refer to \IF Power-Level Measurement" located in Chapter 4 of this service guide.
3-16
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Recalibration of the instrument is necessary after the adjustment or replacement of each
suspect assembly. A functioning instrument may still appear to be defective if calibration data
from before the repair is used.
If the signal is o frequency
This failure may result in the CAL FREQ self-calibration routine failing.
Perform all of the internal service-diagnostic routines. Refer to \Using the Internal
Service-Diagnostic Routines" in this chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal is o frequency in spans <10 MHz only
1. Perform all of the internal service-diagnostic routines. Refer to \Using the Internal
Service-Diagnostic Routines" in this chapter.
2. Disconnect the A23 counter lock assembly, perform the frequency calibration routine by
pressing:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FREQ CAL
Then operate the instrument as an unlock instrument.
If the problem is corrected, suspect the A23 counter lock assembly.
If the signal displays in low band only
(HP 8546A/HP 85462A only)
Perform all of the internal service-diagnostic routines. Refer to \Using the Internal
Service-Diagnostic Routines" in this chapter.
If the A5 Analog Interface board assembly appears to be functioning properly, see
Chapter 5.
Note that the HP 8542E only has low band.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-17
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines
The HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver and HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section have an
internal service-diagnostics routine menu available within the calibration menus.
Reference voltages and ramps are routed through a mux located on the A5 analog interface
board assembly. These voltages and ramps can be displayed on the instrument or on an
oscilloscope by connecting a probe to A5TP2 when a service-diagnostic routine is performed.
The only exception is the 2VREF and GNDREF, these reference voltages originate on the
A24 processor board assembly.
The service-diagnostic routines included in this section are the most useful routines used
to help isolate problems with the A5 analog interface and A24 processor board assemblies.
Illustrations are included with each procedure to show the expected displayed results.
Access the service-diagnostic routine softkeys by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
Note that whenever an instrument setting has been changed while in a service-diagnostic
routine, you must return to the service-diagnostic routine softkey menu by pressing the key
sequence listed above.
If a at line appears at mid screen
When a service-diagnostic routine is selected and only a at line appears at mid screen, connect
an oscilloscope to A5TP2. If the expected signal is there, then the ANA TEST line is either
shorted or open. This can be caused by bent pins or solder bridges on either the A5, A24, or
A15 board assemblies. This condition will cause the frequency calibration routine to fail, as it
uses this line to set up the sweep ramp at the beginning of the calibration routine.
If a service-diagnostic routine fails
When a service-diagnostic routine fails it is recommended to continue verifying the rest of the
service-diagnostic routines to isolate a failure for further troubleshooting. For example, the
main coil driver is dependant on the sweep ramp and the 010 V reference to function properly.
3-18
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Verify the displayed calibration data
1. Press the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY CAL DATA
2. Verify that the digital correction values are within their limits. Refer to Chapter 12 for
typical examples of the calibration data displays.
If default values are being used, all digital corrections should be zero.
If corrections are being used, make sure that all digital corrections are present. Typical
values should be below 1.00.
3. Return to the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4PRESET5
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-19
Verify the 2 V reference detector
This service-diagnostic routine veries the 2 V reference circuitry on the A24 processor board.
1. Access the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4PRESET5
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
2. Press More 1 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Verify the 2 V reference by pressing 2V REF DETECTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is at the top of the display the 2 V reference is functioning properly.
See Figure 3-6.
If the signal is not at the top of the display the problem is isolated to the A24 processor
board assembly. Refer to \Troubleshooting the A24 Processor Board Assembly," located in
this chapter for further troubleshooting.
3-20
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-6. 2 V Reference Detector
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Verify the ground reference detector
This service-diagnostic routine veries the ground reference circuitry on the A24 processor
board.
1. Access the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4PRESET5
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
2. Press More 1 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Verify the ground reference by pressing GND REF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is at the bottom of the display the ground reference is functioning
properly. See Figure 3-7.
If the signal is not at the bottom of the display the problem is isolated to the A24
processor board assembly. Refer to \Troubleshooting the A24 Processor Board Assembly,"
located in this chapter for further troubleshooting.
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-7. Ground Reference Detector
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-21
Verify the main coil driver
This service-diagnostic routine veries that the ramp is driving the EYO.
1. Select a single band (if more than one band is available on your instrument).
Note that any band is acceptable unless the problem is isolated to a specic band. In that
case, choose the appropriate band.
2. Access the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
3. Press More 1 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Verify the main coil driver by pressing MAIN COIL DR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is similar to Figure 3-8 the main coil driver is functioning properly.
If the signal is not similar suspect the A5 analog interface assembly.
Note
3-22
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-8. Main Coil Driver Typical Display
Figure 3-8 shows the trace on the HP 85462A receiver RF section. The trace
starts mid-screen at the left side of the display and rises almost 1 graticule
when reaching the right side of the display. The same trace on the HP 85422E
receiver RF section starts at the same position (mid-screen at the left side of
the display), however, it only rises about one-half of a graticule when reaching
the right side of the display. Of course, the settings between the two models
are also dierent.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Verify the FM coil driver
It is only necessary to perform this service-diagnostic routine if the failure appears in narrow
spans (10 MHz and below).
1. Band lock the instrument in band 0 and set the span to 10 MHz by pressing the following
keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
4FREQUENCY5 More 1 of 2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Band Lock 0-2.9 Gz BAND 0
SPAN5 10 4MHz5
Be sure to set the span before performing the service-diagnostic routine.
2. Return to the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
Note
The instrument shows intermittent FREQ UNCAL messages in this state.
However, observing the trace indicates how the FM coil driver is working in
this state.
3. More 1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Verify the FM coil driver by pressing FM COIL DRIVE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is similar to Figure 3-9 the FM coil driver is functioning properly.
If the signal is not similar suspect the A5 analog interface board assembly.
If all other service-diagnostic routines operate properly, disconnect the A23 counter lock
assembly, perform the FREQ CAL calibration routine, then operate the instrument as an
unlocked instrument.
If the problem is corrected, suspect the A23 counter lock assembly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-23
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-9. FM Coil Driver with 10 MHz Span
3-24
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Verify the FM coil driver for spans >10 MHz
It is only necessary to perform this service-diagnostic routine if the failure appears in spans
wider than 10 MHz.
1. Set the instrument span to 11 MHz.
2. Return to the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
3. Press More 1 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Verify the FM coil driver by pressing FM COIL DRIVE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is similar to Figure 3-10 the FM coil driver is functioning properly.
If the signal is not similar continue with the next service-diagnostic routine.
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-10. FM Coil Driver with >10 MHz Span
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-25
Verify the sweep ramp
1. Access the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
2. Press More 1 More 2 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Verify the sweep ramp by pressing SWEEP RAMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is similar to Figure 3-11 the sweep ramp is functioning properly.
Note that before a successful frequency calibration is performed the ramp will not be
corner to corner, but will have some overshoot or undershoot.
If the signal is not similar suspect the A5 analog interface board assembly. Refer to
Chapter 5 for further information about troubleshooting the A5 board assembly.
4. Change the instrument sweep time.
Note that it is recommended to check all sweep times due to the A5 analog interface board
assembly operating dierently for the dierent RC combinations. This can result in the
instrument appearing to operate properly in one sweep time and not in another.
3-26
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-11. Typical Sweep Ramp Display
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Verify the 10 V reference detector
This service-diagnostic routine veries the 10 V reference. +10 V is used as a reference for
the DACs and originates on the A5 analog interface board assembly. Frequency and amplitude
errors will occur if this voltage is incorrect.
1. Access the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
2. Press More 1 More 2 More 3 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Verify the 10 V reference detector by pressing +10V REF DETECTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is at the top of the display the 10 V reference detector is functioning
properly. See Figure 3-12.
If the signal is not at the top of the display the problem is isolated to the A5 analog
interface board assembly. Refer to Chapter 5 for further troubleshooting.
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-12. 10 V Reference Detector
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-27
Verify the 010 V reference detector
This service-diagnostic routine veries the 010 V reference. 010 V is summed with the tuning
voltages and used in the main coil driver and originates on the A5 analog interface board
assembly. Frequency and amplitude errors will occur if this voltage is incorrect.
1. Access the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
2. Press More 1 More 2 More 3 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Verify the 010 V reference detector by pressing 010V REF DETECTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is at the bottom of the display the 010 V reference detector is
functioning properly. See Figure 3-13.
If the signal is not at the bottom of the display the problem is isolated to the A5 analog
interface board assembly. Refer to Chapter 5 for further troubleshooting.
3-28
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-13. 010 V Reference Detector
Troubleshooting the Instrument
Verify the YTF driver
HP 85462A only.
This routine veries the YTF driver. The YTF is a sensitive device and the minimum of ramp
voltage error can result in the YTF being out of specication.
1. Enter band 1 by pressing the following keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
4FREQUENCY5 More 1 of 2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Band Lock 2.75 - 6.5 BAND 1
2. Access the diagnostics menu by pressing the following keys:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
3. Press More 1 More 2 More 3 More 4 More 5 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Verify the YTF driver by pressing YTF DRIVER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the signal trace is similar to Figure 3-14 the YTF driver is functioning properly.
If the signal is not similar suspect the A5 analog interface board assembly. Refer to
Chapter 5 for further information about troubleshooting the A5 board assembly.
d
a
c
b
Figure 3-14. YTF Driver
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-29
Troubleshooting the A24 Processor Board Assembly
If the LED power-on sequence is not operational
When the instrument is powered-on or 4PRESET5 is pressed, LED's DS1 through DS16 should
turn on. These LED's indicate the status of the instrument self tests. As dierent sections of
the test are completed, the corresponding LED will turn o. The exception is DS13 which will
remain on after 4PRESET5 is pressed.
Refer to \FAIL XXXX XXXXXXXXXX" in Chapter 12 for more information on diagnostics.
If an LED does not light, refer to Table 3-3 for information on possible failures and where they
may have occurred.
Table 3-3. A24 Processor Board Assembly LED Diagnostics
LED
Failure
Description
Failure
Location
DS1
ROM even A
U24
DS2
ROM odd A
U7
DS3
ROM even B
U23
DS4
ROM odd B
U6
DS5
not used
DS6
not used
DS7
User RAM
U22
DS8
User RAM
U5
DS9
User RAM
U22
DS10
User RAM
U5
DS11
I/O bus even
U3
DS12
I/O bus odd
U2
DS13
68230
U57 *
DS14
CPU
U12
DS15
I/O Address
U18
DS16
Video Circuit
U305, U306
*
Failure may also occur in peripheral IC's that
enable communication
If a signal cannot be displayed
If a signal cannot be displayed, and it has been determined that a top-screen signal of two volts
is present at VIDEO IF, the problem may be on the A24 processor board assembly.
1. Put 0 V into the video circuit, simulating a bottom-screen signal level condition by setting
the diagnostic to the ground reference detector. Refer to \Verify the ground reference
detector" located in this chapter.
Use an oscilloscope to check for the following conditions.
Check for 0 V throughout the signal path through U201, U61, U45, and U46.
3-30
Troubleshooting the Instrument
2.
3.
4.
5.
Check the oset by measuring the inverting and noninverting pins on U201, U61, U45,
and U46. The dierence between both measured values should not exceed 5 mV.
Replace any components with excess oset voltage.
Put 2 V into the video circuit, simulating a top-screen signal level condition by setting
the diagnostic to the 2 V reference detector. Refer to \Verify the 2 V reference detector"
located in this chapter.
Use an oscilloscope to check for the following conditions.
Check for 2 V throughout the signal path through U201, U61, U45, and U46.
Check the oset by measuring the inverting and noninverting pins on U201, U61, U45,
and U46. The dierence between both measured values should not exceed 5 mV.
Replace any components with excess oset voltage.
Switch between POS PEAK and SAMPLE detector modes. If the signal appears when in the
SAMPLE detector, suspect something in the positive-peak detector circuit.
If the instrument does not respond (locked up)
If the instrument is not responding or is continuously doing instrument presets, and cycling
power does not correct the problem perform the following steps:
1. Check for a defective Down Loadable Program (DLP) that has been installed into the
instrument.
2. Clear the user memory by performing the step, for your instrument, listed below.
If the instrument is equipped with Option 023 (RS-232 remote interface), connect it to a
computer. Execute the Break command, and pres the following keys:
4CONFIG5 More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Dispose User Mem
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Dispose User Mem
Connect the instrument to a controller. Execute the following remote program line to
erase user memory and clear the problem.
SEND 7;UNL MTA LISTEN 18 CMD 12
Performing a Free-Run Check
This procedure allows you to set the microprocessor to a known state so that certain basic
functions can be checked. A MOVEQ instruction is read from the system data bus. The MOVEQ
instruction may be thought of as a no operation (NOP) for this procedure. The microprocessor
will increment the address lines A1 through A23, then continue to read data on the system
data bus.
1. Turn the power o.
2. Remove A24U25 (16 pin dip jumper pack)
3. Connect a clip lead from A24TP1 pin 7 to ground.
4. Turn the power on.
Troubleshooting the Instrument
3-31
CAUTION
While measuring pins on the microprocessor chip, exerting too much pressure
on a pin may cause one of the data lines to open. This may result in factory
correction constants to be erased.
5. Check A24U12 for the conditions described in Table 3-4 while in the free-run mode.
Figure 3-15. A24U12 Pin Location
Table 3-4.
Free-Run Conditions for A24 Processor Board Assembly U12
A24U12
Pin
Location
A24U12
Free-Run Mode
Condition
6
AS is toggling
7
UDS is toggling
8
LDS is toggling
9
R/W is logical one
32{55
Address lines A1 through A23
are counting in binary where:
A1 (pin 32) = LSB
6. Check for +5 V at pin 1 of ROM's U6, U7, U23, and U24.
The Free-Run Check is now complete.
7. Turn the power o.
8. Remove the clip lead from A24TP1 pin 7 and ground.
9. Replace A24U25 (16 pin dip jumper pack)
10. Turn the power on.
3-32
Troubleshooting the Instrument
4
Troubleshooting the IF Section
This chapter provides troubleshooting information for the IF section of the
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section. Troubleshooting information for tracing signals on
the A15 motherboard is also provided.
Refer to Chapter 3 for procedures that are useful when rst starting to troubleshoot a failure.
Before You Start
There are four things you should do before starting to troubleshoot a failure:
Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the instrument, and read the
general safety instructions and the symbol denitions given in the front of the Service Guide.
The instrument contains static sensitive components. Read the section entitled \Protection
From Electrostatic Discharge" in Chapter 1.
Become familiar with the organization of the troubleshooting information in this service
guide.
Read the rest of this section.
WARNING
This instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages.
Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the instrument
and read the symbol denitions given in the front of this guide before
you begin the procedures in this chapter. Refer to \General Safety
Considerations" at the front of this manual for general WARNINGS and
CAUTIONS related to safety considerations. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
related to specic procedures are included with the procedure.
Failure to heed the safety precautions can result in severe or fatal injury.
Service equipment you will need
Refer to Chapter 13 of this guide for a table listing the recommended test equipment needed to
troubleshoot and repair the instrument. Although Hewlett-Packard equipment is recommended,
any equipment that meets the critical specications given in the table can be substituted for
the recommended model.
Refer to Chapter 13 of this guide for a list of required service and hand tools needed to
troubleshoot and repair the instrument.
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-1
After an instrument repair
If one or more assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related adjustments
and performance verication tests. Refer to Chapter 2 for a table of Adjustments and Tests for
Replaced or Repaired Assemblies, for the related adjustments and performance verication
tests required for each assembly.
4-2
Troubleshooting the IF Section
IF Section Information
This section provides the control details for the assemblies in the IF section. The control-line
outputs are valid when the instrument settings provided with each table are used.
For many IF functions, the A5 analog interface board converts the digital control signals
from the A24 processor board assembly to analog control signals. Some instrument functions
are performed directly by the A24 processor board assembly. The A24 processor board
assembly also makes amplitude error corrections to improve instrument performance. The
instrument-setting changes and error-correction functions performed on the A24 assembly are a
combined mathematical oset of the digitized video signal.
For more information about the A15 motherboard and the tracing of specic signals in the IF
section, refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly".
Note
Before starting to troubleshoot the instrument, set it to the signal analysis
mode by pressing:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
IF Power-Level Measurement
The following measurement procedures are used for troubleshooting along the 21.4 MHz IF
signal path from the A9 third converter board, through the IF section, to output of the A14 log
amplier board.
To calibrate the reference level of the instrument, the CAL AMP self-calibration routine
adjusts the gain of the 21.4 MHz IF variable amplier on the A9 third converter board and
mathematically osets the digitized video signal on the A24 processor board assembly. Due to
component variations it is unlikely that any two instruments will have the same 21.4 MHz IF
signal level for the same instrument settings. Furthermore, a defective instrument may produce
misleading IF signal levels if the CAL AMP routine has been run.
An IF test board is used in the following procedures to simplify troubleshooting. The test board
is used to isolate the RF section from the IF section and allows the testing of individual IF
assemblies. Refer to Chapter 13 for the part number of the IF test board.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-3
To set up the instrument for an IF power-level measurement
The power levels provided with the measurement procedures in this section are accurate when
the following steps are followed.
1. Ensure that the CAL OUT amplitude is within specication. Refer to the calibrator
amplitude performance test in the HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver and
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section User's Guide.
2. Set up the CAL OUT signal to be checked internally by pressing:
4INPUT5
VIEW CAL ON OFF (ON)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4PRESET5 on the instrument, then wait for the preset routine to nish. Set the
instrument by pressing the following keys:
4FREQUENCY5 CENTER FREQ 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 0 4Hz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4-4
Troubleshooting the IF Section
To check the gains for the IF assemblies
The overall gain of individual assemblies in the IF section are listed below. The gain level
provided for the A12 amplitude control board is correct only when the instrument is set as
provided in step three, above.
The A11 bandwidth lter board produces 10 dB of gain.
The A12 amplitude control board produces +5 dB of gain.
The A13 bandwidth lter board produces 10 dB of gain.
A +10 dBm signal at the input of the A14 log amplier board produces a 2 volt signal
(VIDEO IF) that is equivalent to a top-screen display.
To measure the IF signal from the A9 third converter board
Measure the 21.4 MHz IF output from the A9 third converter board with the following
procedure. Refer to the IF/control section block diagram (Figure 8-5) while performing this
procedure.
1. Remove the A11 bandwidth lter board.
2. Insert the IF test board in the A11 bandwidth lter board slot.
3. Measure the 21.4 MHz IF output at J1 on the IF test board using an active probe, with
a instrument attached. (Use of a 50
instrument will cause erroneous power-level
measurements.)
4. The test limit for the 21.4 MHz IF signal is 025 dBm 62 dB. The test board receives the
signal at measurement point A (near the input of the A11 bandwidth lter board) on the
block diagram.
Note that the variable IF amplier at the output of the A9 third converter board has a gain
range of 015 to +2 dB. This level is dependent on the output from the reference level DAC,
located on the A5 analog interface board, that is adjusted during the CAL AMP self-calibration
routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-5
To inject a signal at the output of the A11 bandwidth lter board
Inject a 21.4 MHz signal at the output of the A11 bandwidth lter board using the following
procedure. Refer to the IF/control section block diagram (Figure 8-5).
1. Remove the A11 bandwidth lter board.
2. Insert the IF test board in the A11 bandwidth lter board slot.
3. Connect a level generator to the J2 input connector on the IF test board. The test board
injects the signal at A15J8 pin 22.
4. Set the signal source for 21.4 MHz at +4 dBm. This signal level provides +10 dBm at the
input to the A14 log amplier board and simulates a top-screen signal.
5. Check for the following nominal signal outputs.
A 010 dBm at the AUX IF OUTPUT connector on the rear panel. Refer to Figure 8-5.
Use an active probe to make the measurement. If a 50
instrument is used, an additional
6 dB drop in signal level results. (The AUX IF OUTPUT has a 50
output impedance.)
One volt at the AUX VIDEO OUTPUT connector on the rear panel. A voltage divider on
the A15 motherboard reduces the uncorrected 2 volt video signal (AUX VIDEO) to a
1 volt output.
A signal at the top graticule line and a marker reading of approximately 0 dBm.
Use CORRECT ON OFF to observe the magnitude of video osets that the A24 processor board
assembly is currently using to correct the signal position at top-screen. Refer to Chapter 11 for
more information about CORRECT ON OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4-6
Troubleshooting the IF Section
To inject a signal at the output of the A13 bandwidth lter board
Inject a 21.4 MHz signal at the output of the A13 bandwidth lter board with the following
procedure. Refer to the \IF/Control Section Block Diagram" (Figure 8-5).
1. Remove the A13 bandwidth lter board.
2. Insert the IF test board in the A13 bandwidth lter board slot.
3. Connect a level generator to the J2 input connector on the IF test board. The test board
injects the signal at A15J11 pin 22.
4. Set the signal source for 21.4 MHz at +13 dBm. This signal level provides +10 dBm at
the input to the A14 log amplier board and simulates a signal at top-screen. The output
impedance of the IF test board interacts with circuitry on the A15 motherboard to cause a
3 dB signal loss.
5. Check for the following nominal signal outputs.
A 010 dBm at the AUX IF OUTPUT connector on the rear panel. Refer to Figure 8-5.
Use an active probe to make the measurement. If a 50
instrument is used, an additional
6 dB drop in signal level results. (The AUX IF OUTPUT has a 50
output impedance.)
One Volt at the AUX VIDEO OUTPUT connector on the rear panel. A voltage divider
on the A15 motherboard reduces the uncorrected 2 V video signal (AUX VIDEO) to a
1 V output.
A signal at the top graticule line and a marker reading of approximately 0 dBm.
Use CORRECT ON OFF to observe the magnitude of video osets that the A24 processor board
assembly is currently using to correct the signal position at top-screen. Refer to Chapter 11 for
more information about CORRECT ON OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-7
To check bandwidth control lines for the A11 and A13 bandwidth lter
board
Table 4-1 provides nominal bandwidth control voltages sent to the A11 and A13 bandwidth
lter board from the A5 analog interface board. A calibrated instrument produces control
voltages similar to the values in Table 4-1. (The values in Table 4-1 were measured while
default calibration data was in use.)
Use the dierence in control voltage between bandwidths from the table as a guide for
normal bandwidth operation.
Use an extender board to measure the bandwidth control voltages at the motherboard
connector for the A5 assembly or the A11/A13 lter assemblies.
Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" for the location of the control
lines for each assembly.
Table 4-1. Nominal Resolution Bandwidth Control Line Voltages
Resolution
Bandwidth
BW5
BW6
BW7
+14.0
+14.0
+14.0
+14.0
+14.0
01.0
01.0
01.0
01.0
01.0
-9.9
-9.9
-9.9
-9.9
-9.9
+9.25
+8.96
+8.51
+7.5
+7.5
+4.4
+6.4
+8.5
+9.4
+9.7
+9.7
+9.7
+9.7
+9.7
+9.7
01.0
01.0
+7.5
+8.81
-9.9
-9.9
+9.7
+9.7
+9.6
+8.5
3 dB
5 MHz
3 MHz
1 MHz *
.3 MHz
.1 MHz
30 kHz
10 kHz
3 kHz
1 kHz
.3 kHz
6 dB EMI
200 Hz
9 kHz
120 kHz
1 MHz y
*
y
4-8
Troubleshooting the IF Section
+14.0
+14.0
Firmware dates before 940811.
Firmware date 940811 and later.
To check IF section gain control
Table 4-2 lists the changes in IF Section gain that alter the displayed signal position when the
reference level is changed in increments as small as 1 dB. The control voltages from the A5
analog interface board that change the gain of specic IF assemblies are provided in Table 4-3,
Table 4-4, and Table 4-5.
When the reference level is changed, the A24 processor board assembly performs two step-gain
functions that change the position of the displayed signal. Refer to Table 4-2 for the reference
levels where the A24 processor board assembly changes the signal position in increments of
10 dB. When a reference-level change of less than 1 dB is required, the A24 assembly makes
a corresponding change in the signal position. These changes in signal position are made by
mathematically osetting the digitized video signal on the A24 assembly.
The A24 processor board assembly also makes amplitude error corrections to improve
instrument performance. The reference-level changes and error-correction functions are a
combined mathematical oset of the digitized video signal. This makes it dicult to distinguish
which oset is contributing to a change in displayed signal level when the reference level is
changed. Disable the error corrections by setting CORRECT ON OFF to OFF.
Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" when tracing control lines in the IF
section.
The entries in Table 4-2 are valid after pressing the following keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
CALIBRATE5
4
CORRECT ON OFF (OFF)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Be sure that the input attenuator setting remains at 10 dB.
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-9
Table 4-2. IF Section Gain Table in dB
Reference
Level
(dBm)
A12
A12
A14
A24
A24
Calibration
Step Gain *
Gain
Video Oset Video Oset
Attenuator
(Log/Linear Mode) (Log/Linear Mode) (Linear Mode) (Log Mode) y (Linear Mode) y
0
10
0
0
0
0
01
9
0
0
0
0
02
8
0
0
0
0
03
7
0
0
0
0
04
6
0
0
0
0
05
5
0
0
0
0
06
4
0
0
0
0
07
3
0
0
0
0
08
2
0
0
0
0
09
1
0
0
0
0
010
10
10
0
0
0
020
10
20
0
0
0
030
10
30
0
0
0
040
10
40
0
0
0
050
10
50
0
0
0
060
10
50
10
10
0
070
10
50
20
20
0
080
10
50
30
30
0
090
10
50
40
40
0
0100
10
50
40
50
10
0110
10
50
40
60
20
0120
10
50
40
70
30
0130
10
50
40
80
40
0131
9
50
40
80
40
0132
8
50
40
80
40
0133
7
50
40
80
40
0134
6
50
40
80
40
0135
5
50
40
80
40
0136
4
50
40
80
40
0137
3
50
40
80
40
0138
2
50
40
80
40
0139
1
50
40
80
40
* The gain
of
the
10
dB
step-gain
stage
is
15
dB
when
enabled
and
5
dB
when
disabled.
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
y Turn CORRECT ON OFF o to remove the amplitude error corrections generated by CAL AMP .
4-10
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Control lines for the A12 amplitude control board
Table 4-3 and Table 4-4 provide the control line output from the A5 analog interface board that
change the gain of the A12 amplitude control board when the reference level is changed. The
calibration attenuator settings in Table 4-4 provide reference-level changes in 1 dB increments
for the full reference-level range of the instrument.
Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" when tracing control lines in the IF
section. The entries in Table 4-3 and Table 4-4 are valid after pressing the following keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
CALIBRATE5
4
CORRECT ON OFF (OFF)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Be sure that the input attenuator setting remains at 10 dB.
Table 4-3. 10 dB Step-Gain Control Lines
IFG3
IFG2
IFG1
Reference
10 dB
Step Gains (10 dB Step) (20-1 dB Step) (20-2 dB Step)
Level
A12J2-12
A12J2-13
A12J2-14
(dBm)
0
0
L
L
L
010
10
H
L
L
020
20
L
H
L
030
30
H
H
L
040
40
L
H
H
050
50
H
H
H
H = >2.5 V (TTL High)
L = <0.8 V (TTL Low)
For each reference level in Table 4-3, the Calibration Attenuator control lines are set to 10 dB
of attenuation as shown in the rst entry of Table 4-4. The control line settings from Table 4-4
repeat, starting with each reference level in Table 4-3 to produce reference-level changes in
1 dB increments.
Table 4-4. Calibration-Attenuator Control Lines
Reference Calibration IFA1
IFA2
IFA3
IFA4
IFA5
Level
Attenuator (1 dB)
(2 dB)
(4 dB)
(8 dB)
(16 dB)
(dBm)
A12J2-4 A12J2-3 A12J2-2 A12J2-1 A12J2-11
0
10
L
H
L
H
L
01
9
H
L
L
H
L
02
8
L
L
L
H
L
03
7
H
H
H
L
L
04
6
L
H
H
L
L
05
5
H
L
H
L
L
06
4
L
L
H
L
L
07
3
H
H
L
L
L
08
2
L
H
L
L
L
09
1
H
L
L
L
L
H = >2.5 V (TTL High)
L = <0.8 V (TTL Low)
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-11
To check linear gain control lines for the A14 log amplier board
Table 4-5 provides the control line voltages from the A5 analog interface board to the A14 log
amplier board. When the instrument is in linear mode, the seven A14 log amplier board
stages are biased to operate as linear ampliers. Four of the seven stages are also used to
provide 40 dB of gain in 10 dB increments. The linear gains are enabled for the reference
levels indicated in Table 4-2 and Table 4-5. Two of the four stages operate as one 20 dB
amplier and are controlled by the same control line, IFG6.
Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" when tracing control lines in the IF
section.
When enabled, each control line has a 07.6 V dc output. This voltage is supplied by the 08 VT
temperature-compensated power supply located on the A14 log amplier board.
The entries in Table 4-5 are valid when the instrument is set up as follows:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
AMPLITUDE5
4
SCALE LOG LIN (LIN)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Amptd Units5 dBm
4CALIBRATE5
4
CORRECT ON OFF (OFF)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 4-5.
Linear Gain Control Lines on the
A14 Log Amplier Board
IFG4
IFG5
IFG6
Reference A14 Gain in
Linear Mode (10-1 dB Step) (10-2 dB Step) (20 dB Step)
Level
(dB)
(dBm)
050
0
H
H
H
060
10
L
H
H
070
20
L
L
H
080
30
L
H
L
090
40
L
L
L
H = +14.3 V dc (disabled)
L = 07.6 V dc (enabled)
4-12
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Troubleshooting IF Overload Failures
This section helps identify which assembly is most likely causing the IF Overload Check of the
performance test to fail.
If the failure message from the IF Overload Check indicates that the IF video overload failed,
the primary assembly to suspect is the A7 demodulator/quasi-peak/average detector board. This
is almost certainly the case if the remaining IF overload checks function properly.
If the failure message from the IF Overload Check indicates that the main IF overload
failed, the primary assembly to suspect is the A12 amplitude control board. The secondary
assembly to suspect in this case is the A7 demodulator/quasi-peak/average detector
board. Also, check W96, the wire pair between A12 amplitude control board and A7
demodulator/quasi-peak/average detector board, to make sure that there is continuity between
the board assemblies.
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-13
Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly
Use this section to identify and locate all the signals and voltages that pass through the A15
motherboard. The location of active components on the motherboard are also provided.
The following information is provided in this section:
Figure 4-1, A15 Motherboard Connector Designation. Shows the location and reference
designator for each connector on the motherboard.
Figure 4-2, A15 Connectors with Additional Associated Circuitry. Provides a simplied
circuit diagram for the components on the motherboard. To help locate the components, the
motherboard connector-pin that is connected to each component is shown.
Figure 4-3, A15J13 Connector-Pin Designation. Provides the pin numbering sequence for the
connector that connects the A16 power supply assembly to the motherboard.
Figure 4-4, Card-Cage Connector Pin Designation. Provides the pin-numbering sequence for
the four motherboard connectors in the card cage. The motherboard connector for the A5
analog interface board (not shown) has the same pin-numbering sequence, but is installed in
a position that is reversed when compared to the card-cage connectors.
Table 4-6, A15 Motherboard Mnemonic Descriptions. Provides the mnemonic, full name, and
functional description for each signal and voltage on the motherboard.
Table 4-7, A15 Motherboard Pin Designations. Identies the signal or voltage distribution for
each signal and voltage on the motherboard.
Each column identies the instrument assembly that is connected to the A15 motherboard.
The associated motherboard reference designator for each assembly is also supplied.
The mnemonics from Table 4-6 are arranged alphabetically by row on the left-hand side of
the table.
For a given mnemonic, read across the row to nd all the assemblies that the signal or
voltage is connected to. The A15 connector pin numbers in each box indicate the A15
connector pins where the signal or voltage appear.
Be sure to read the footnotes at the bottom of Figure 4-1.
4-14
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Figure 4-1. A15 Motherboard Connector Designation
All connector pins on A9J20 are tied to ground (ACOM).
The A15J1 connector for the A5 analog interface board is installed in a position that is
reversed when compared to card-cage connectors A15J3, A15J4, A15J5, and A15J6;
therefore, the pin-numbering order is also reversed for A15J1 when compared to the
card-cage connectors.
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-15
Figure 4-2. A15 Connectors with Additional Associated Circuitry (1 of 2)
4-16
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Figure 4-2. A15 Connectors with Additional Associated Circuitry (2 of 2)
The A15 motherboard pin designation for the 21.4 MHz IF signal path is provided in
Table 4-7.
All the connector pins with the same number are connected in parallel for the card-cage
connectors A15J3, A15J4, A15J5, and A15J6.
Figure 4-3. A15J13 Connector-Pin Designation
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-17
Figure 4-4. Card-Cage Connector Pin Designation
4-18
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Table 4-6. A15 Motherboard Mnemonic Descriptions
Mnemonic
21.4 MHz IF
Full Name
21.4 MHz IF
Description
The 21.4 MHz IF signal between the A9 third converter
assembly and the detector on the A14 log amplier board.
+10V
+10 V Supply
The A5 analog assembly provides a +10 V bias supply
for the LC bandwidth lters on the A11/A13 bandwidth
lter assemblies.
+12V
+12 V Supply
+12 V supply for the A2 Display and the RS-232 option,
referenced to DCOM.
+15VF
+15 V Supply
+15 V power supply, referenced to ACOM.
+5V
+5 V Supply
+5 V power supply, referenced to DCOM.
015V
015 V Supply
015 V power supply, referenced to ACOM.
08VT
08 V Temperature
Provides 08 V from the temperature-compensated
(TC) power supply on the A14 log amplier board
to the A5 analog interface board. The A5 provides
temperature-compensation for the IFG4-IFG6 and the
Log/Lin control lines using the 08 VT as a TC
reference.
ACOM
Analog Common
A common ground for all analog circuitry.
ADC SYNC
A/D Conversion
Synchronization
A positive-going signal that indicates when the main
ADC on the A24 processor board assembly has started
a A/D conversion. ADC SYNC resets the peak detectors
located on assemblies installed in the card cage.
ADR0-ADR4
Address 0-4
Input/Output (IO) address lines.
ANA TEST
Analog Test
Provides a series of test signals from A5 analog interface
assembly to A24 processor board assembly during instrument
calibration and troubleshooting. (Refer to the A5 overview
section)
AUX IF
Auxiliary IF
An uncorrected, buered 21.4 MHz IF signal from the
output of the A13 bandwidth lter board to the
four card-cage slots.
AUX IF BP
Auxiliary IF
Back Panel
A uncorrected, buered 21.4 MHz IF signal from the
output of the A13 bandwidth lter board to J17,
AUX IF OUTPUT.
AUX VIDEO
Auxiliary Video
A detected video signal (0|2 V) that has passed through
the video lters. No amplitude corrections have been
applied to this signal. A voltage divider at J16, AUX
VIDEO OUTPUT, reduces the signal amplitude to 0|1 V.
Compensated Supply
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-19
Table 4-6. A15 Motherboard Mnemonic Descriptions (continued)
Mnemonic
BW5
Full Name
Bandwidth 5
Description
A bias voltage that activates either the LC or crystal
bandwidth-lter mode.
BW6
Bandwidth 6
Controls the crystal-lter bandwidth.
BW7
Bandwidth 7
Controls the LC lter bandwidth.
COUNT IF
Counterlock IF
A buered 21.4 MHz IF signal from the output of the
A13 bandwidth lter board to A23 counter lock assembly.
CRD ANLG 1
Card Cage Analog 1
An analog signal from assemblies installed in the card
cage to the A24 input multiplexer. When it is selected,
the signal passes through the A24 video-lter and
peak-detector sections. It is available on AUX VIDEO
after it passes through the video lter.
CRD ANLG 2
Card Cage Analog 2
An analog signal from assemblies installed in the card
cage. The signal goes directly to A24 A/D conversion
section, bypassing both the video-lter and peak-detector
sections.
DCOM
Digital Common
A common ground for all digital circuitry.
DISCRIM
or
DISCRIMINATOR
Discriminator
For Spans 10 MHz, the A23 counter lock assembly sends
a dc tuning voltage through the A24 processor board assembly
to the A5 analog interface board. The A5 assembly
then adjusts the YTO to reduce residual FM.
EXT HSWP
External High Sweep
EXT HSWP performs two functions:
1) It provides external control of high sweep on the
A24 processor when an external signal is connected
to J15, HIGH SWEEP INPUT/OUTPUT.
2) It provides the HSWP signal as a rear-panel output
at J15, HIGH SWEEP INPUT/OUTPUT. This is an open-collector
signal. It should never be driven high.
FAN
FAN
+12 V power supply for the B1 fan.
HPWRUP
High Power Up
Enables the initial start-up sequence for the CPU on
the A24 processor board assembly when the instrument is rst
turned on. This occurs prior to the start-up of other
related assemblies.
HSWP
High Sweep
Provides control for the instrument display sweep and
retrace. A TTL high starts a sweep and a TTL low
initiates a retrace. This is an open-collector signal.
It should never be driven high.
4-20
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Table 4-6. A15 Motherboard Mnemonic Descriptions (continued)
Mnemonic
IFA1
Full Name
IF Attenuation 1
Description
Control line for 1dB step attenuator on the A12 amplitude
control board.
IFA2
IF Attenuation 2
Control line for the 2 dB step attenuator on the
A12 amplitude control board.
IFA3
IF Attenuation 3
Control line for the 4 dB step attenuator on the
A12 amplitude control board.
IFA4
IF Attenuation 4
Control line for the 8 dB step attenuator on the
A12 amplitude control board.
IFA5
IF Attenuation 5
Control line for the 16 dB step attenuator on the
A12 amplitude control board.
IFG1
IF Gain 1
Control line for the 10 dB step gain on the A12 amplitude
control board.
IFG2
IF Gain 2
Control line for the rst 20 dB step gain on the
A12 amplitude control board.
IFG3
IF Gain 3
Control line for the second 20 dB step gain on the
A12 amplitude control board.
IFG4
IF Gain 4
Temperature-compensated control line for the 10 dB
linear gain on the A14 log amplier board.
IFG5
IF Gain 5
Temperature-compensated control line for the 10 dB
linear gain on the A14 log amplier board.
IFG6
IF Gain 6
Temperature-compensated control line for the 20 dB
linear gain on the A14 log amplier board.
INTERBUS
Interbus
A communication line between the four slots in the
card cage. It coordinates functions between options
when more than one option is installed in the card cage.
IOB0-IOB15
Input/Output Bus 0 {
Input/Output Bus 15
Input/Output (IO) data lines used between the A24 processor
assembly and related assemblies.
LBIO
Low Bottom-box
Input/Output
Strobe line for Input/Output (IO) data transfers.
LINE TRIG
Line Trigger
Provides a TTL signal at the power-line frequency rate.
It enables the line-trigger mode on the A24 processor
assembly.
LOG LIN
Log Linear
Controls switching between log and linear modes on
the A14 log amplier board.
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-21
Table 4-6. A15 Motherboard Mnemonic Descriptions (continued)
Mnemonic
LPWRON
Full Name
Low Power On
Description
The front-panel line switch provides a TTL low when
the switch is depressed. This initiates start-up of
the A16 power supply and A24 processor board assembly.
LTIO
Low Top-box
Input/Output
Strobe line for Input/Output (I/O) data transfers.
REF CAL
Reference Cal
A DAC on the A5 analog interface board adjusts the
gain of the A9 third converter board through REF CAL.
(Refer to the A5 overview section)
SWEEP RAMP
Sweep Ramp
A 0 to +10 V ramp signal that corresponds to signal
sweep across the display. The signal is sent to J14,
SWEEP OUTPUT, on the rear frame.
VIDEO IF
Video IF
The detected 21.4 MHz IF signal from the detector on
the A14 log amplier board to the input multiplexer
on the A24 processor board assembly.
VTO TUNE
Voltage-Tuned
Oscillator Tune
A tuning voltage from the A23 counter lock assembly
to A9 third converter board. It locks the 600 MHz
oscillator on the A9 assembly to the frequency reference.
4-22
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Mnemonic
21.4 MHz IF
+10 V
+12 V
+15 V
Table 4-7. A15 Motherboard Pin Designations
Instrument Assemblies
Card Cage
A5
A16
A9
A11
A12
A13
A14
A24 Slots 1, 2, 3, 4
A15J1 A15J13 A15J7 A15J8 A15J9 A15J10 A15J11 A15J12 A15J2 A15J3, 4, 5, 6
9
22
y
1
20
29
22, 23
29
z
z
44
z
13, 32
3, 33
1, 2, 3,
27, 57
z
27
z
8, 18
27
z
27
z
8, 38
9, 39
25, 26,
26, 56
20, 21,
22
+5 V
22, 23
19, 49
y
9, 10, 11,
12, 28,
z
10, 20
z
6, 16
55, 56
29, 30,
31
015 V
4, 34
4, 5, 6,
23, 24,
25
08 VT
ACOM
y
z
25
y
23
2, 32
8
7, 26, 27
z
9, 39
10, 40
y
1-8, 10,
1-21,
2-5, 7, 9,
5-10,
1-21,
1, 3-7,
2, 4, 6,
2, 4, 6, 8, 29,
12, 14,
24-26,
11-15,
15-19
24-26,
9-24, 26,
32-37
31-38, 59, 60
16, 18,
28, 33-44
17, 19
28, 33-44
28-30,
20
32-37,
41-43
ADC SYNC
ADR0
ADR1
ADR2
ADR3
ADR4
ANA TEST
AUX IF
AUX IF BP
AUX VIDEO z
BW5
BW6
BW7
COUNT IF z
CRD ANLG 1
CRD ANLG 2
DCOM
30
6
11
36
41
7
12
37
42
8
13
31
31
22
22
24
54
25
y
y
y
30
30
31
31
32
32
27
12
42
13
43
14
30
7
3
5
y
y
y
7
3
5
11, 16,
14-17,
16, 21,
17, 22, 41, 44,
35, 38,
33-36
40, 43,
49, 54
43, 48
y
z
yz
yz
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
48, 53
Pin numbers indicate assembly where signal or voltage originates.
Refer to Figure 4-2.
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-23
Mnemonic
DISCRIMINATOR
EXT HSWP z
FAN z
HPWRUP
HSWP z
IFA1
IFA2
IFA3
IFA4
IFA5
IFG1
IFG2
IFG3
IFG4
IFG5
IFG6
INTERBUS
IOB0
IOB1
IOB2
IOB3
IOB4
IOB5
IOB6
IOB7
IOB8
IOB9
IOB10
IOB11
IOB12
IOB13
IOB14
IOB15
y
z
Table 4-7. A15 Motherboard Pin Designations (continued)
Instrument Assemblies
Card Cage
A5
A16
A9
A11
A12
A13
A14
A24 Slots 1, 2, 3, 4
A15J1 A15J13 A15J7 A15J8 A15J9 A15J10 A15J11 A15J12 A15J2 A15J3, 4, 5, 6
21
28
8
50
37
y
y
29
59
30
60
55
26
56
27
57
28
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
55
57
4
3
2
1
11
14
13
12
38
39
40
58
z
9
14
15
39
44
45
10
5
16
40
45
46
41
46
47
12
17
18
42
47
48
13
18
19
14
19
20
44
49
50
15
20
21
45
50
51
46
51
52
17
22
23
47
52
53
18
23
24
Pin numbers indicate assembly where signal or voltage originates.
Refer to Figure 4-2.
4-24
54
58
58
y
Troubleshooting the IF Section
Mnemonic
LBIO
LINE TRIG
LOG LIN
LPWRON
LTIO
REF CAL
SWEEP RAMP z
VIDEO IF
VTO TUNE
y
z
Table 4-7. A15 Motherboard Pin Designations (continued)
Instrument Assemblies
Card Cage
A5
A16
A9
A11
A12
A13
A14
A24 Slots 1, 2, 3, 4
A15J1 A15J13 A15J7 A15J8 A15J9 A15J10 A15J11 A15J12 A15J2 A15J3, 4, 5, 6
5
10
18
52
y
y
31
59
24
51
y
y
11
60
19
53
y
z
y
y
25
28
2
11
y
1
29
1
yz
Pin numbers indicate assembly where signal or voltage originates.
Refer to Figure 4-2.
Troubleshooting the IF Section
4-25
5
Troubleshooting the RF Section
This chapter provides troubleshooting information for the RF section of the
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section.
Refer to Chapter 3 for troubleshooting procedures that are useful when rst starting to
troubleshoot a failure.
Before You Start
There are four things you should do before starting to troubleshoot an instrument failure:
Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the instrument, and read the
general safety instructions and the symbol denitions given in the front of the service guide.
The instrument contains static sensitive components. Read the section entitled \Protection
From Electrostatic Discharge" in Chapter 1.
Become familiar with the organization of the troubleshooting information in this service
guide.
Read the rest of this section.
WARNING
This instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages.
Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the instrument
and read the symbol denitions given in the front of this guide before
you begin the procedures in this chapter. Refer to \General Safety
Considerations" at the front of this manual for general WARNINGS and
CAUTIONS related to safety considerations. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
related to specic procedures are included with the procedure.
Failure to heed the safety precautions can result in severe or fatal injury.
Service equipment you will need
Refer to the calibration guide for your instrument for a table listing the recommended test
equipment needed to troubleshoot and repair the instrument. Although Hewlett-Packard
equipment is recommended, any equipment that meets the critical specications given in the
table can be substituted for the recommended model.
Refer to Chapter 13 of this guide for a list of required service and hand tools needed to
troubleshoot and repair the instrument.
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-1
After an instrument repair
If one or more instrument assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related
adjustments and performance verication tests. Refer to Chapter 2 for a table of Adjustments
and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies, for the related adjustments and performance
verication tests required for each assembly.
5-2
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Note
Before starting to troubleshoot the instrument, set it to the signal analysis
mode by pressing:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
Making RF Power-Level Measurements
The RF section block diagram (Figure 8-2), located in Chapter 8 includes measurement points A
through E. Table 5-1 lists power level readings for these measurement points. The power level
ranges listed in Table 5-1 apply after performing the following steps:
1. Ensure that the CAL OUT amplitude is within specication.
2. Select the appropriate input signal for the desired frequency band:
Band 0
300 MHz at 020 dBm (CAL OUT signal)
Band 1
5 GHz at 0 dBm (HP 85462A only)
3. Press 4PRESET5, then wait for the instrument to complete the preset routine.
4. Press the following instrument keys:
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS
FREQUENCY5 (same as input signal)
SPAN5 0 4Hz5
4AMPLITUDE5 0 4dBm5
ATTEN AUTO MAN (MAN) 10 4dB5
4BW5
IF BW AUTO MAN (MAN) 3 4MHz5
4SWEEP5
SWEEPTIME AUTO MAN 20 4ms5
4
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-3
Table 5-1. RF Section Block Diagram Measurement Point Power Levels
Measurement
Point
Measurement
Frequency
Power Level Range *
Band 0
A
C
Same as input
frequency
Same as input
frequency
321.4 MHz
D
3.9214 GHz
B
*
y
5-4
030 to 033
dBm
|
|
Band 1
(HP 85462A only)
|
014 to 019
dBm
10 to 16 dB
below B y
|
8 to 12 dB
below A y
E
321.4 MHz
5 to 11 dB
1 to 6 dB
below C y
below D y
A frequency-selective measuring device, such as a spectrum analyzer, is recommended for making these
measurements. Broadband measuring devices, such as power meters, will give erroneous results due to
the presence of other, higher-amplitude signals.
The power-level range is relative to the actual measurement taken at the measurement point indicated.
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Connector Pin-Out Information
The RF section receives control voltages from the A5 analog interface board. It also receives
power-supply voltages for the attenuator and second converter assemblies from the A5 analog
interface board. Table 5-2 and Table 5-3 identify the signals that are supplied to the two RF
assemblies from the A5 analog interface board. Table 5-4 identify the signals from the A8
tracking generator control board and the A4A10 tracking generator.
Table 5-2. A5J4 2nd Converter Drive Pin Designation
A5J4
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Signal Description
2nd Mixer Bias
+5 A
ACOM
+10 VF
PIN SW
KEY
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
Table 5-3. A5J301 YTF Driver Pin Designation
A5J301
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
W34
Signal Description
Wire Color
Brown
Orange
Green
Violet
YIG FLT+
YIG FLT015 VF
+15 VF
Table 5-4. A8J1 Tracking Generator Control Pin Designation
A8J1
Pin
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Signal Description
+15 VF
ACOM
015 VF
OSC PWR
TUNE
ALC MON
KEY
PWR LVL
+5 VF1
ALC EXT
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-5
Preamplier Section Switch Pin-Out Information
The four switches in the A3 preamplier section (two switches controlling the preamplier and
two switches controlling the VIEW CAL ON OFF ) are controlled from J501 of the A5 analog
interface board via W70. Normally, the switch has +12 Vdc maintained on its two control lines.
To change the switch state, A5 analog interface board sends a pulse of 0 Vdc to the switch
control line. The presence of the pulse can be determined using an oscilloscope.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Preamplier Switches
Switches A3A5 (labeled 1 on top of the switch) and A3A6 (labeled 2) are changed by pressing
4PREAMP5. This toggles between including the preamplier in the signal path and bypassing the
preamplier. The following table provides the conditions for toggling A3A5 and A3A6. Refer to
the wiring diagram in Chapter 8 for additional information.
Table 5-5. Preamplier Switch Control Lines
A5 J501
Preamplier
A5 J501
Pin 5 and 6
State
Pin 1 and 2
+12 Vdc
Preamp ON +12 Vdc |0 Vdc Pulse
+12 Vdc |0 Vdc Pulse
Preamp OFF
+12 Vdc
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
VIEW CAL ON OFF
Switches
Switches A3A3 (labeled 3 on top of the switch) and A3A1 (labeled 4) are changed by pressing
INPUT5 VIEW CAL ON OFF . This toggles between sending the 300 MHz calibration signal from
the A9 third converter board out the front panel 300 MHz output (the VIEW CAL OFF state)
and sending the 300 MHz calibration signal to the A3A4 input attenuator (the VIEW CAL ON
state). The following table provides the conditions for toggling A3A3 and A3A1. Refer to the
wiring diagram in Chapter 8 for additional information.
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 5-6. VIEW CAL ON OFF Switch Control Lines
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
VIEW CAL ON OFF
State
View Cal On
View Cal O
5-6
Troubleshooting the RF Section
A5 J501
A5 J501
Pin 15 and 16
Pin 13 and 14
+12 Vdc |0 Vdc Pulse
+12 Vdc
+12 Vdc
+12 Vdc |0 Vdc Pulse
To check control of the A3A4 input attenuator
The A5 analog interface board controls the three attenuator steps and blocking capacitor in the
A3A4 input attenuator using eight control lines. Refer to the RF section block diagram for your
instrument at the end of Chapter 8. Each attenuator step requires two control lines, as shown
in Table 5-7. The attenuator is connected to A5J5 on the A5 analog interface board with the
ribbon cable, W36.
Use a digital multimeter (DMM) and the values from Table 5-7 to check the control voltages.
Measure the voltages at the A5J5 pins on the trace side of the A5 analog interface board.
Table 5-7. Input Attenuator Control Output at A5J5
10 dB
Step
40 dB
Step
20 dB
Step
Blocking
Capacitor
Attenuator
Setting (dB)
Pin 2 Pin 1 Pin 9 Pin 4 Pin 8 Pin 5 Pin 7 Pin 6
0
H
L
H
L
H
L
|
|
10
L
H
H
L
H
L
|
|
20
H
L
H
L
L
H
|
|
30
L
H
H
L
L
H
|
|
40
H
L
L
H
H
L
|
|
50
L
H
L
H
H
L
|
|
60
H
L
L
H
L
H
|
|
70
L
H
L
H
L
H
|
|
Blocking Capacitor In
|
|
|
|
|
|
L
H
Blocking Capacitor Out |
|
|
|
|
|
H
L
H = 010 V (with the attenuator connected at A5J5)
H = 0 V (A oating output if the attenuator is disconnected.)
L = 015 V (A low at pin 2, 9, or 8 indicates that the attenuator step is in
the signal path. A low at pin 7 indicates the blocking capacitor is in
the signal path.)
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-7
To check the A4A10 tracking generator operation
The following troubleshooting information is aimed at isolating tracking-generator-related faults
to either the A4A10 tracking generator or one of the other supporting assemblies, such as A9,
A8, or A4A7.
If the output goes unleveled (TG UNLVL message displayed)
A window comparator on the A8 tracking generator control board is used to monitor the
control line ALC MON (ALC Monitor) from the A4A10 tracking generator. If ALC MON is
greater than +1.0 Vdc or less than 00.10 Vdc TG UNLVL will be displayed, indicating that the
output of the tracking generator (TG) is unleveled. The tracking generator can typically be
set for +2.75 dBm output power and remain leveled. In any case, the output should remain
leveled for output power settings of +1 dBm or less. It is normal for the tracking generator to
be unleveled at frequencies below 300 kHz.
The ALC MON line is continuously monitored during a sweep, but the TG UNLVL message
will only be displayed at the end of the sweep. For this reason, it is possible that the output
could be unleveled during a portion of a sweep, and although the output returns to a leveled
condition by the end of the sweep, TG UNLVL will be displayed at the end of the sweep.
If TG UNLVL is displayed, proceed as follows:
1. Check at which frequencies the output is unleveled. Set the instrument to zero span and
step the center frequency in 50 MHz increments. Note at which frequencies the output is
unleveled.
2. Check at which power levels the output is unleveled. Connect the RF OUT 50
connector
to the INPUT 50
connector. With the instrument in zero span, set CENTER FREQ to 300
MHz or one of the frequencies noted in step 1, with the instrument in zero span. Press the
following keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
TRACK GEN5
4
SRC PWR ON OFF (ON)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TRACKING PEAK
Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear. Step the SRC POWER setting in 1 dB increments
and note at which power levels the output is unleveled. The output should be unleveled
only when the power level is greater than +1 dBm or if the frequency is outside of the
specied range.
3. Check maximum power available from the tracking generator. Connect the RF OUT 50
connector to the INPUT 50
connector. Press the following keys:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
AMPLITUDE5 20 4+dBm5
SCALE LOG LIN (LOG) 5 4dB5
4TRACK GEN5
SRC PWR ON OFF (ON)
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE 1 OF 2
ALC INT EXT (EXT)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-8
Troubleshooting the RF Section
4.
5.
6.
7.
The available power should always be greater than +1 dBm. If the output is unleveled only
at specic frequencies, a power hole will usually be visible at those frequencies.
Check the LO OUTPUT power level as follows:
a. Set the instrument to zero span at a 0 Hz center frequency.
b. Zero and calibrate a power-meter/power-sensor combination. Set the power meter to
readout power in dBm. Enter the power sensor's 4 GHz cal factor into the power meter.
c. Connect the power sensor to the LO OUTPUT connector on the instrument's rear panel.
d. Record the power meter reading. The power level should be greater than +12.5 dBm.
e. Increase the instrument's center frequency setting by 100 MHz. The LO OUTPUT
frequency will be 3.9214 GHz greater than the center frequency setting.
f. Enter the appropriate power sensor cal factor into the power meter.
g. Repeat steps d through f until the center frequency setting is 2.9 GHz.
If the LO OUTPUT power-level check fails, note the center frequency setting at which the
power level was out of tolerance. If the LO OUTPUT power level check passes, proceed to
step 7.
Place the A3/A4 front end assembly in its service position. Place the A4A10 tracking
generator in its service position. Disconnect W41 from A4A10J4 (LO IN). Connect the power
sensor to the free end of W41. Repeat the LO OUTPUT power level check above, noting the
center frequency settings at which the power level is out of tolerance. The power level for
this check should be +16.5 dBm 62 dB.
If the power level is within tolerance at W41, but out of tolerance at the LO OUTPUT
(rear panel), and the center frequency setting of the out-of-tolerance power levels is close
to the frequencies at which the output is unleveled, suspect A4A10.
If the power level at W41 is also out of tolerance, suspect either the A4A7 local oscillator
distribution amplier (LODA), A4A9 EYO, or W41. Refer to the \LO Section Assemblies" in
Chapter 8.
If the output is unleveled only at certain power level settings or certain frequencies, monitor
A8J1 pin 8 with a DMM. Connect the negative DMM lead to A5TP1. Vary the SRC POWER
setting or center frequency setting, as appropriate, and plot the voltage variation versus
power level or frequency. A discontinuity in the plot near the frequency or power level
at which the output is unleveled indicates a problem on the A8 tracking generator control
board .
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-9
To check excessive residual FM
Either the tracking oscillator or the ALC circuitry could be responsible for excessive residual
FM. The residual FM should be measured on a spectrum analyzer, such as an HP 8566A/B or
HP 8568A/B, using slope detection with the instrument set to zero span. Proceed as follows to
troubleshoot residual FM problems:
1. Perform the Residual FM performance test for the instrument (see the HP 8546A/HP 8542E
EMI Receiver and HP 85462A/HP 85422E Receiver RF Section User's Guide). If this test
passes, the 1st LO input and 600 MHz drive signals should be within tolerance. If the test
fails, troubleshoot the LO section.
2. Monitor A8J1 pin 5 (TUNE) with an oscilloscope. Connect the oscilloscope probe ground lead
to A5TP1. The voltage at this point should be greater than 500 mV.
If the voltage is less than 500 mV, perform the \Frequency Tracking Range Check" in
the Tracking Oscillator adjustment procedure, in Chapter 2. If this check fails, perform
the tracking oscillator adjustment procedure following the \Frequency Tracking Range
Check".
If the noise on this tune line is greater than 10 mV, troubleshoot the A8 tracking generator
control board .
3. With the instrument set in zero span, monitor the output of the tracking generator with a
spectrum analyzer. Check for high-amplitude spurious responses from 100 kHz to at least
3 GHz. If the spurious responses are too high in amplitude, the (broadband) ALC detector
may cause the ALC loop to oscillate, generating FM sidebands. If any spurious responses are
excessively high, refer to \If harmonic/spurious outputs are too high" in this section.
4. If no spurious responses are present, or if the spurious responses are suciently low enough
in amplitude to not cause a problem, suspect the tracking oscillator in the A4A10 tracking
generator.
5-10
Troubleshooting the RF Section
If atness is out of tolerance
The output level atness of the tracking generator is specied at a 0 dBm output power setting.
In general, most atness problems will be a result of a failure in the A4A10 tracking generator
microcircuit. However, the PWR LVL signal from the A8 tracking generator control board
and the 1ST LO IN signal from the A4A7 local oscillator distribution amplier (LODA) can also
contribute to atness problems.
1. Check the function of the PWR LVL signal from the A8 tracking generator control board .
Set the SRC POWER setting to a level at which the atness is out of tolerance. Monitor A8J1
pin 8 with a DMM, step the center frequency setting in 100 MHz increments from 100 MHz
to 2.9 GHz, and plot the voltage variation versus frequency. A discontinuity in the plot
near the frequency at which the atness is out of tolerance indicates a problem on the A8
tracking generator control board .
2. Check the atness of the 1ST LO IN signal. Perform the LO OUTPUT amplitude check as
described in \If the output goes unleveled (TG UNLVL message displayed)," in this section.
If the check passes, the fault is most likely in the A4A10 tracking generator.
If the test fails, note the center frequency setting at which the power level was out of
tolerance and compare against the frequencies at which the atness was out of tolerance.
Repeat the check with the power sensor connected to the end of W41 that is nearest the
A4A10 tracking generator, noting the center frequency of any out of tolerance power
levels. The power level should be +16.5 dBm 62 dB.
If the power level is within tolerance at W41, but out of tolerance at the LO OUTPUT
connector (rear panel), and the center frequency settings of the out-of-tolerance power
levels are close to the frequencies at which the atness is out of tolerance, suspect the
A4A10 tracking generator.
If the power level at W41 is also out of tolerance, suspect either the A4A7 local
oscillator distribution amplier (LODA) or the A4A9 EYO. Refer \LO Section Assemblies"
in Chapter 8.
3. Check all coax cables, especially semi-rigid cables. A fault in one of these cables can cause a
very-high-Q power hole.
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-11
If vernier accuracy is out of tolerance
Vernier accuracy is a function of the PWR LVL drive signal from the A8 tracking generator
control board and the ALC circuitry on A4A10. The vernier accuracy is specied at 300 MHz.
Since vernier accuracy is tested using a broadband power sensor, abnormally high spurious
responses could cause the measured vernier accuracy to fail when in fact the accuracy of the
300 MHz signal alone is within specication.
1. Check the PWR LVL drive signal from A8 tracking generator control board . Monitor A8J1
pin 8 with a DMM. Change the SRC POWER setting in 1 dB steps and note the voltage at each
power level setting. The voltage should change by the same amount for each 1 dB step. If
the voltage does not change by the same amount for each 1 dB step, the fault lies on the A8
tracking generator control board .
2. Check for abnormally high spurious outputs. Connect the RF OUT 50
connector to the
input of a spectrum analyzer. Set the spectrum analyzer to sweep from 9 kHz to 2.9
GHz, with a sweeptime of 100 msec or less. Set the instrument to sweep from 9 kHz to
2.9 GHz with a 50 second sweeptime. Press 4SINGLE5 on the instrument and observe any
responses on the spectrum analyzer, ignoring the desired output signal. If any spurious
responses are greater than 020 dBc, the vernier accuracy measurement may fail. Refer to
\If harmonic/spurious outputs are too high" in this section.
3. Check for excessive LO feedthrough. Use the LO Feedthrough performance test in the
HP 8546A/HP 8542E EMI Receiver and HP 85462A/HP 85422E Receiver RF Section User's
Guide, but check over a center frequency range of 9 kHz to 100 MHz. The LO feedthrough
will be 3.9214 GHz greater than the center frequency setting.
5-12
Troubleshooting the RF Section
If harmonic/spurious outputs are too high
Harmonic and spurious outputs may be generated by A4A10 itself or may be present on either
the 600 MHz drive or 1st LO drive signal. There is a direct relationship between spurious
signals on the 1st LO and spurious signals on the tracking generator output. There is a
ve-to-one relationship between spurious signals on the 600 MHz drive and the spurious
signals on the tracking generator output. For example, if the 600 MHz signal moves 1 MHz,
the tracking generator output signal will move 5 MHz. This is due to the multiplication in the
pentupler.
1. If the Harmonic Spurious Responses performance test failed, connect another spectrum
analyzer, such as an HP 8566A/B, to the instrument's LO OUTPUT connector on the rear
panel. Set the instrument to each frequency as indicated in the performance test, with
the SPAN set to 0 Hz. The 1st LO frequency will be 3.9214 GHz greater than the center
frequency setting. Use the HP 8566A/B to measure the level of the second and third
harmonics of the 1st LO signal.
Note
The 1st LO typically has a higher harmonic content than the tracking generator
output. For the purposes of this check, it is the variation in harmonic content
versus frequency which is important.
If the variation of the harmonic level of the 1st LO versus frequency tracks
the harmonic level variation of the tracking generator output, repeat step 1
while measuring the 1st LO signal at the end of W41 nearest A4A10. If there is
little variation in the 1st LO harmonic level between the LO OUTPUT connector
and W41, and the relative variation in harmonic level tracks with the tracking
generator output harmonic level, suspect either the A4A7 local oscillator
distribution amplier (LODA) or the A4A9 EYO.
If the harmonic level variation of the 1st LO versus frequency does not track
the harmonic level variation of the tracking generator output, suspect A4A10.
2. If sidebands are present at the same frequency oset at every output frequency, use
another spectrum analyzer to check the spectral purity of the 1st LO and the 600 MHz drive
signals. When checking the 1st LO, the instrument must be set to zero span. The 1st LO
frequency will be 3.9214 GHz greater than the center frequency setting. A 1 MHz sideband
on the 1st LO will appear as a 1 MHz sideband on the output signal.
To verify that the 600 MHz drive or 1st LO signal is responsible for the sidebands, substitute
a clean signal for the 600 MHz drive or 1st LO signal. If the sidebands on the output
disappear when using the clean signal, the substituted signal was responsible for the
sidebands.
Note
The 600 MHz drive signal should be 08 dBm 63.5 dB. The 1st LO signal should
be +16 dBm 62 dB.
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-13
If power sweep is not functioning properly
Power sweep is accomplished by summing an attenuated SWEEP RAMP signal with the
PWR LVL signal. The SWEEP RAMP is attenuated using the 12-bit power sweep DAC. The
power sweep DAC output is then fed to a summing amplier where it is summed with the
power level DAC output to yield the PWR LVL signal.
1. If some power sweep ranges do not appear to work properly, the fault is probably the power
sweep DAC on the A8 tracking generator control board . Check the operation of the power
sweep DAC as follows:
a. Monitor A8U9 pin 7 with an oscilloscope. Connect the ground lead of the oscilloscope
to A8TP1. Trigger the oscilloscope using the spectrum analyzer's HIGH SWEEP IN/OUT
signal on the rear panel.
b. Set the instrument by pressing the following keys:
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 0 4Hz5
BW 300 4kHz5
4TRACK GEN5
SRC POWER ON OFF (ON) 010 4dBm5
PWR SWP ON OFF (ON) 10 4dB5
c. The amplitude of the positive-going ramp displayed on the oscilloscope should be
approximately 7.8V.
d. Change the power sweep setting to any value between 1 and 11 dB. The ramp amplitude
displayed on the oscilloscope should be 780 mV per dB of the power sweep setting.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
Although the source power sweep may be set to a 12.75 dB sweep width, the
power sweep function is only warranted to have a 11 dB sweep width.
2. Perform the Vernier Accuracy performance test. See the Installation, Verication, and
Operation Manual. If this test fails, refer to \If vernier accuracy is out of tolerance" located
earlier in this section.
5-14
Troubleshooting the RF Section
If there is no output power
The A4A10 tracking generator requires power supplies, a 1st LO signal, and a 600 MHz drive
signal in order to provide power output.
1. Check the power supplies on A8J1 and A4A10J1.
2. Verify that the voltage at A8J1 pin 4 is greater than +14 Vdc when the tracking generator is
on. If the voltage is not greater than +14 Vdc, troubleshoot A8.
3. Check that ALC EXT, measured at A8J1 pin 10, is at a TTL low when the tracking generator
is set to ALC INT and at a TTL high when the tracking generator is set to ALC EXT.
4. Check that the 600 MHz drive signal is 08 dBm 63.5 dB. If the signal is outside of this range,
troubleshoot the A9 third converter board.
5. Check that the 1st LO input signal is +16 dBm 62 dB. Perform the LO OUTPUT amplitude
check described in \If the output goes unleveled (TG UNLVLD message displayed)" earlier in
this section, measuring instead at the end of W41 nearest A4A10.
6. Check the tracking adjustment controls. Monitor A8J1 pin 5 with a DMM. On the
instrument, use the step keys and knob to change the MAN TRACK ADJUST value from 0 to
4095. The voltage measured should increase from 0 V to +12 V.
CAUTION
The following step requires adjustment of A4A10C3. The lifetime of A4A10C3
is rated for less than 10 cycles. Do not adjust A4A10C3 unless it is absolutely
necessary.
7. If all of the checks above are acceptable, the tracking oscillator might not be functioning.
Setup the instrument as indicated in the Tracking Oscillator adjustment procedure in
Chapter 2, using a spectrum analyzer, such as an HP 8566A/B, in place of the frequency
counter. Try to adjust A4A10C3 until a signal is displayed on the HP 8566A/B. If adjusting
A4A10C3 does not result in the tracking generator beginning to function, the A4A10
tracking generator is suspect.
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-15
To check the A4A7 local oscillator distribution amplier (LODA) operation
The following troubleshooting information is aimed at isolating 1st LO amplitude-related faults
to either the A4A7 local oscillator distribution amplier (LODA), A8 tracking generator control
board , or the A4A9 EYO.
1. Place the A3/A4 Front End assembly in its service position. Place the A8 tracking
generator control board on an extender board. Remove W33, the semi-rigid coax cable
between A4A7 and A4A6. Do not reconnect W20 to A23AT2.
2. Connect a DMM's negative lead to A8TP2, AGND. Connect the positive lead to A8TP6
(PIN).
3. Set the instrument by pressing the following keys:
4FREQUENCY5
CENTER FREQ 300 4MHz5
4SPAN5 20 4MHz5
4TRIG5 SWEEP CONT SGL (SGL)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Measure the LO power at A4A7J2 and the free end of W20. Refer to the LO section block
diagram (Figure 8-3) for acceptable power level ranges.
5. If both LO power levels are lower than acceptable, the voltage on A8TP6 (PIN) should be
above 0 V. If both LO power levels are higher than acceptable, this voltage should be more
negative than 010 V.
6. If the voltage measured in step 5 is as described, the LODA drive circuitry is acceptable.
Check the A4A9 EYO output power level. Refer to the RF section block diagram (Figure
8-2) for acceptable power level range.
7. If the voltage measured in step 5 is not as described, either the LODA drive circuitry or the
LODA itself is malfunctioning. Check that the operational amplier's output is consistent
with its inputs.
8. Set the instrument 4LINE5 switch to o, disconnect W38 from A8J2, then set the instrument
4LINE5 switch to on.
9. Connect a jumper between A8J2 and A8TP2. This connects ground A2, a oating ground,
to AGND. Connect another jumper between A8TP4, LOS (LO sense) and +10VR.
10. The voltage measured on the DMM should be greater than +14 Vdc.
11. Move the jumper from +10VR to 010VR. The voltage measured should be more negative
than 013 Vdc.
12. If the voltages do not meet the limits described in steps 10 and 11, troubleshoot the A8
tracking generator control board .
13. Connect the positive DMM lead to A8J2 pin 1.
14. The measured voltage should be approximately +5 Vdc. If the voltage is not +5 Vdc,
troubleshoot the A8 tracking generator control board .
15. Connect the positive DMM lead to A8TP5, GB (gate bias). The voltage should measure
within 5% of the GATE voltage listed on the RF section label.
16. If the voltage is not within this range, rotate A8R29 (GATE) through its range while
monitoring the DMM.
17. If the voltage varies between 0 Vdc and 02 Vdc, adjust A8R29 (GATE) for a DMM reading
within 5% of the GATE voltage listed on the RF section label. If the voltage does not vary
outside the range of 0 Vdc and 02 Vdc, troubleshoot the A8 assembly.
5-16
Troubleshooting the RF Section
18. Set the instrument 4LINE5 switch to o, reconnect W38 to A8J2, then set the instrument
4LINE5 switch to on.
19. If the DMM reading changes more than 50 mV, the A4A7 LODA is probably defective.
Troubleshooting the RF Section
5-17
6
Replacing Major Assemblies
Introduction
The procedures in this chapter describe the removal and replacement of major assemblies.
The words \right" and \left" are used throughout these procedures to indicate the sides of the
instrument as normally viewed from the front of the instrument. Numbers in parentheses, for
example (1), indicate numerical callouts on the gures.
Before You Start
There are four things you should do before starting to troubleshoot an instrument failure:
Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the instrument, and read the
general safety instructions and the symbol denitions given in the front of the Service Guide.
The instrument contains static sensitive components. Read the section entitled \Protection
From Electrostatic Discharge" in Chapter 1.
Become familiar with the organization of the troubleshooting information in this service
guide.
Read the rest of this section.
WARNING
This instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages.
Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the instrument
and read the symbol denitions given in the front of this guide before
you begin the procedures in this chapter. Refer to \General Safety
Considerations" at the front of this manual for general WARNINGS and
CAUTIONS related to safety considerations. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
related to specic procedures are included with the procedure.
Failure to heed the safety precautions can result in severe or fatal injury.
Service equipment you will need
Refer to the Chapter 13 for a list of the recommended test equipment needed to troubleshoot
and repair the instrument. Although Hewlett-Packard equipment is recommended, any
equipment that meets the critical specications given in the table can be substituted for the
recommended model.
Chapter 13 also includes a list of required service and hand tools needed to troubleshoot and
repair the instrument.
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-1
After a repair
If one or more assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related adjustments
and performance verication tests. Refer to Chapter 2 for a table of Adjustments and Tests for
Replaced or Repaired Assemblies, for the related adjustments and performance verication
tests required for each assembly.
Removal and Replacement Procedures in this Chapter
1. Instrument Cover
2. RF Cover
3. A1 Front Panel Assembly
4. A1A1 Keyboard
5. A26 Rear Panel
6. A16 Power Supply Assembly
7. B1 Fan
8. A24 Processor Board Assembly
9. A24 Processor Board Assembly ROMs
10. A25 Graphics Processor Board
11. BT1 Battery
12. A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board
13. A2 Display
14. A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly
15. A15 Motherboard/IF Section Assembly
16. A21 Disk Drive Controller Board
17. A19 Disk Drive
18. A20 10 MHz Precision Reference
19. A23 Counter Lock Assembly
20. A5 Analog Interface Board
21. A3 Preamplier Section/A4 RF Section Assembly
6-2
Replacing Major Assemblies
1. Instrument Cover
1. Instrument Cover
Removal
1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the front-frame, use a soft cloth or towel between the
work surface and the front-frame.
2. Place the instrument on the work surface with its front panel down.
3. Remove the four rear-feet screws using a Torx screwdriver.
4. Pull the cover o towards the rear.
Figure 6-1. Instrument Cover Replacement
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-3
1. Instrument Cover
Replacement
1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power.
CAUTION
To prevent damage when replacing the instrument cover, remember the
following:
Place a soft cloth or towel between the work surface and the front-frame.
Ensure that cables do not bind between the instrument cover and its internal
assemblies.
2. Place the instrument on the work surface with its front panel down.
3. Replace the instrument cover assembly by matching the seam on the cover with the bottom
of the instrument.
4. Fit the leading edge of the cover completely into the slot on the back of the front-frame
assembly. The cover should t snugly against the EMI gasket in the slot.
5. Replace and tighten the four rear-feet screws using a Torx screwdriver.
6-4
Replacing Major Assemblies
2. RF Cover
2. RF Cover
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
Remove the 4 screws that attach the rear panel to the RF cover (1).
Remove the 7 screws that attach the RF cover to the right side frame (2).
Remove the 3 screws that attach the RF cover to the front of the RF section frame (3).
Remove the 5 screws that attach the RF cover to the left side of the RF section frame (4).
Remove the 2 screws that attach the RF cover to the bracket at the right side of the power
supply (5).
7. Remove the 4 screws that attach the RF cover to the top of the power supply (6).
8. Remove the RF cover from the instrument.
Figure 6-2. RF Cover Replacement
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-5
2. RF Cover
Replacement
CAUTION When placing the RF cover in the instrument, make sure that the grounding
gasket is not bent by the edges of the instrument. The front edges of the RF
cover are areas to watch closely.
1. Place the RF cover into its location in the instrument.
2. Replace the 4 screws that attach the RF cover to the top of the power supply (6).
3. Replace the 2 screws that attach the RF cover to the bracket at the right side of the power
supply (5).
4. Replace the 5 screws that attach the RF cover to the left side of the RF section frame (4).
5. Replace the 3 screws that attach the RF cover to the front of the RF section frame (3).
6. Replace the 7 screws that attach the RF cover to the right side frame (2).
7. Replace the 4 screws that attach the rear panel to the RF cover (1).
8. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
6-6
Replacing Major Assemblies
3. A1 Front Panel Assembly
3. A1 Front Panel Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the counter lock assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \19. A23 Counter
Lock Assembly".
3. Remove the OCXO assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \18. A20 10 MHz
Precision Reference".
4. Remove the speaker bracket (1).
5. Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
6. Remove the cable ties from the cable bundle above the IF section.
7. Remove the RF/IF bracket (2).
8. Disconnect the Volume knob wires (Blue/Purple/Gray) from the Demodulator/QPD board
(3).
9. Disconnect the Earphone jack wires (Black/Red/Yellow) from the Demodulator/QPD board
(4).
10. Disconnect the ALC connector wires (Red/White) from the front side of the tracking
generator (5). Note how the excess wire is routed toward the rear on the left side of the
A4 RF section.
11. Route the Volume knob wires, Earphone jack wires, and the ALC connector wires from the
top of the instrument through to the bottom of the instrument and back to the front panel.
12. Disconnect the front-panel line switch wire harness (blue/red/orange) (6) from the
processor board.
13. Disconnect the ribbon cable (7) between the front panel and the processor board from the
processor board.
14. Disconnect the 300 MHz Output cable between the front panel and the internal bulkhead
from the internal bulkhead (8).
15. Disconnect the Tracking Generator Output cable between the front panel and the internal
bulkhead from the internal bulkhead (9).
16. Disconnect the RF Input cable between the front panel and the internal bulkhead from the
internal bulkhead (10).
17. Remove the 4 torx screws on each side of the front-panel that attach the front panel to the
side frame of the instrument (11).
18. Remove the 4 torx screws on the bottom of the instrument that secure the front panel to
the instrument (12).
19. Remove the 5 torx screws on the bottom of the instrument that secure the front panel to
the instrument (13).
20. Pull the front panel from the front of the instrument.
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-7
3. A1 Front Panel Assembly
Figure 6-3. A1 Front Panel Assembly Replacement
6-8
Replacing Major Assemblies
3. A1 Front Panel Assembly
Replacement
1. Replace the front panel into the front of the instrument.
2. Replace the 5 torx screws on the bottom of the instrument that secure the front panel to
the instrument (13).
3. Replace the 4 torx screws on the bottom of the instrument that secure the front panel to
the instrument (12).
4. Replace the 4 torx screws on each side of the front-panel that attach the front panel to the
side frame of the instrument (11).
5. Connect the 300 MHz Output cable between the front panel and the internal bulkhead to
the internal bulkhead (10).
6. Connect the Tracking Generator Output cable between the front panel and the internal
bulkhead to the internal bulkhead (9).
7. Connect the RF Input cable between the front panel and the internal bulkhead to the
internal bulkhead (8).
8. Connect the ribbon cable (7) between the front panel and the processor board to the
processor board.
9. Connect the front-panel line switch wire harness (6) (blue/red/orange) to the processor
board.
10. Route the Volume knob wires, Earphone jack wires, and the ALC connector wires from the
bottom of the instrument through to the top of the instrument.
11. Connect the ALC connector wires (5) (Red/White) to the front side of the tracking
generator. Route the wires so that the excess wire is pulled toward the rear at the left side
of the A4 RF section.
12. Connect the Earphone jack wire harness (4) (Black/Red/Yellow) to the Demodulator/QPD
board.
13. Connect the Volume knob wire harness (3) (Blue/Purple/Gray) to the Demodulator/QPD
board.
14. Replace the RF/IF bracket (2).
15. Replace the cable ties to bundle the wires and cables above the IF section.
16. Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
17. Replace the speaker bracket (1).
18. Replace the OCXO assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \18. A20 10 MHz
Precision Reference".
19. Replace the counter lock assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \19. A23
Counter Lock Assembly".
20. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-9
4. A1A1 Keyboard
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the counter lock assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \19. A23 Counter
Lock Assembly".
3. Remove the OCXO assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \18. A20 10 MHz
Precision Reference".
4. Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
5. Remove the front-panel assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \3. A1 Front Panel
Assembly".
6. Disconnect the RPG wire harness from the keyboard (1).
7. Disconnect the probe power wire harness from the keyboard (2).
8. Remove the 12 screws that attach the keyboard to the front panel (3).
9. Remove the keyboard from the front panel.
10. Remove the keypad from the front panel.
Figure 6-4. A1A1 Keyboard Replacement
6-10
Replacing Major Assemblies
4. A1A1 Keyboard
Replacement
1. Lay the keypad into the front panel.
2. Place the keyboard over the top of the keypad.
3. Gently shake the front panel back and forth a few times to make sure that the keys fall
into their openings on the front of the front panel. Check to make sure all of the keys are
in place in the front panel.
4. Replace the 12 screws that attach the keyboard to the front panel (3).
5. Connect the probe power wire harness to the keyboard (2).
6. Connect the RPG wire harness from the keyboard (1).
7. Replace the front-panel assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \3. A1 Front
Panel Assembly".
8. Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
9. Replace the OCXO assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \18. A20 10 MHz
Precision Reference".
10. Replace the counter lock assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \19. A23
Counter Lock Assembly".
11. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-11
5. A26 Rear Panel
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
3. Remove the LO OUTPUT cable from the rear panel by removing its nut (1).
Figure 6-5. A26 Rear Panel Replacement
4. Remove nuts (2) that attach the SWEEP RAMP and the HIGH SWEEP cables to the rear
panel.
5. Remove the 10 nuts (3) that attach the 10 BNC cables to the rear panel.
6. Remove the 7 screws that connect rear panel to instrument.
1 screw attached to the right-side frame (4)
1 screw attached to the left-side frame (5)
3 screws attached to the instrument deck (6)
2 screws attached to the power supply bae (7)
7. Pull the rear panel away from the instrument and remove the BNC cables from the rear
panel.
8. Disconnect fan wire harness from the motherboard.
9. Disconnect the line module cable harness from the power supply.
6-12
Replacing Major Assemblies
5. A26 Rear Panel
Replacement
1. Connect the line module cable harness to the power supply.
2. Connect the fan wire harness to the motherboard.
3. Replace the 10 BNC cables into the rear panel and secure each cable in place with a nuts
(3). The following table lists the rear-panel label where each cable must be returned.
Table 6-1. Rear-Panel BNC Connectors
Rear-Panel Label Tape Color
Tape Number
10MHz REF OUTPUT
purple
7
EXT REF IN
red
2
AUX IF
black
0
GATE TRIGGER INPUT orange
3
GATE OUTPUT
yellow
4
EXT TRIGGER
gray
8
AUX VIDEO
blue
6
B
See the Graphic Signal Processor board for labeling
G
See the Graphic Signal Processor board for labeling
R
See the Graphic Signal Processor board for labeling
4. Replace the SWEEP RAMP and the HIGH SWEEP cables to the rear panel and secure them
in place with a nut (2).
5. Replace the LO OUTPUT cable to the rear panel and secure it in place with its nut (1).
6. Position the rear panel to the back of the instrument and replace the 7 screws that connect
rear panel to instrument.
1 screw attached to the right-side frame (4)
1 screw attached to the left-side frame (5)
3 screws attached to the instrument deck (6)
2 screws attached to the power supply bae (7)
7. Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
8. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-13
6. A16 Power Supply Assembly
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
Remove the rear panel. Refer to the removal procedures for \5. A26 Rear Panel".
Remove the power supply bae by removing the remaining screw attaching it to the
instrument (1).
Figure 6-6. A16 Power Supply Assembly Replacement
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the right side of the power supply (2).
6. Disconnect the 2-wire cable harness (brown/yellow) from the right side of power supply
(3).
7. Disconnect the 8-wire cable harness from the top of the power supply (4).
8. Remove the 4 screws that secure the power supply to the instrument (5).
9. Use a 3-mm wrench to loosen the 3 nuts near the front right side of power supply (6).
10. Slide the power supply back and out of the instrument.
6-14
Replacing Major Assemblies
6. A16 Power Supply Assembly
Replacement
1. Put the power supply back in the instrument and slide it forward to its position.
2. Make sure the 3 power supply studs at the front right side of power supply (6) are in the
slots in the aluminum frame. Make sure the nuts and washers are on right side aluminum
frame.
3. Replace the 4 screws that secure power supply to the instrument (5).
4. Use a 3-mm wrench to tighten the 3 nuts near the front right side of power supply (6).
5. Connect the 8-wire cable harness to the top of the power supply (4).
6. Connect the 2-wire cable harness (brown/yellow) to the right side of the power supply (3).
7. Connect the ribbon cable to the right side of the power supply (2).
8. Replace the power supply bae by replacing the screw that attaches to the instrument (1).
9. Replace the rear panel. Refer to the replacement procedures for \5. A26 Rear Panel".
10. Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
11. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-15
7. B1 Fan
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
3. Remove the 3 screws that attach the power supply bae to the instrument (1).
Figure 6-7. B1 Fan Replacement
4. Remove the 4 screws that attach the fan housing to the rear panel (2).
5. Disconnect fan wire harness from the motherboard.
6-16
Replacing Major Assemblies
7. B1 Fan
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect fan wire harness to the motherboard.
Replace the 4 screws that attach the fan housing to the rear panel (2).
Replace the 3 screws that attach the power supply bae to the instrument (1).
Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-17
8. A24 Processor Board Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the counter lock assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \19. A23 Counter
Lock Assembly".
3. Remove the HP-IB/RS-232 board. Refer to the removal procedures for \12. A22
HP-IB/RS-232 Board".
4. Remove the graphics processor board. Refer to the removal procedures for \10. A25
Graphics Processor Board".
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the front edge of the processor board (1).
Figure 6-8. A24 Processor Board Assembly Replacement
6. Disconnect the switch cable (blue/red/orange) from front edge of the processor board (2).
7. Disconnect the 3 cables from below HP-IB/RS-232 board (3).
8. Remove the 9 screws that attach the processor board to the instrument (4).
6-18
Replacing Major Assemblies
8. A24 Processor Board Assembly
Replacement
1. Replace the 9 screws that attach the processor board to the instrument (4).
2. Connect the 3 cables to the processor board connectors located below HP- IB/RS-232 board
(3).
3. Connect the switch cable to front edge of the processor board (2).
4. Connect the ribbon cable to the front edge of the processor board (1).
5. Replace the graphics processor board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \10. A25
Graphics Processor Board".
6. Replace the HP-IB/RS-232 board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \12. A22
HP-IB/RS-232 Board".
7. Replace the counter lock assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \19. A23
Counter Lock Assembly".
8. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-19
9. A24 Processor Board Assembly ROMs
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the counter lock assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \19. A23 Counter
Lock Assembly".
3. Remove the HP-IB/RS-232 board. Refer to the removal procedures for \12. A22
HP-IB/RS-232 Board".
4. Remove the graphics processor board. Refer to the removal procedures for \10. A25
Graphics Processor Board".
Figure 6-9. A24 Processor Board Assembly ROMs Replacement
5. Remove the 4 ROM chips from the processor board (1).
Replacement
1. Install the 4 ROM chips in their processor board sockets (1).
2. Replace the graphics processor board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \10. A25
Graphics Processor Board".
3. Replace the HP-IB/RS-232 board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \12. A22
HP-IB/RS-232 Board".
4. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
6-20
Replacing Major Assemblies
10. A25 Graphics Processor Board
10. A25 Graphics Processor Board
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the counter lock assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \19. A23 Counter
Lock Assembly".
Figure 6-10. A25 Graphics Processor Board Replacement
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the graphics processor board (1).
4. Remove the 2 screws that attach the graphics processor board to the instrument (2).
5. Pull the graphics processor board straight up, disconnecting it from its processor board
socket (3).
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-21
10. A25 Graphics Processor Board
Replacement
CAUTION When installing the graphics processor board on the processor board, be careful
so that the connector pins are not bent when inserting into the processor board
socket.
Carefully press the graphics processor board into its processor board socket (3).
Replace the 2 screws that attach the graphics processor board to the instrument (2).
Connect the ribbon cable to the graphics processor board (1).
Replace the counter lock assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \19. A23
Counter Lock Assembly".
5. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-22
Replacing Major Assemblies
11. BT1 Battery
11. BT1 Battery
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the counter lock assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \19. A23 Counter
Lock Assembly".
3. Remove the HP-IB/RS-232 board. Refer to the removal procedures for \12. A22
HP-IB/RS-232 Board".
4. Remove the graphics processor board. Refer to the removal procedures for \10. A25
Graphics Processor Board".
5. Remove the processor board. Refer to the removal procedures for \8. A24 Processor Board
Assembly".
6. Unsolder the battery to remove it from the processor board (1).
WARNING
Figure 6-11. BT1 Battery Replacement
Battery BT1 contains lithium iodide. Do not incinerate or puncture this
battery. Dispose of the discharged battery in a safe manner. Only use
the same type of battery to replace BT1. Do not replace BT1 with a
rechargeable battery. Refer to Chapter 10 for the HP part number of the
replacement battery.
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-23
11. BT1 Battery
Replacement
1. Insert the new battery into the processor board, noting the polarity (1).
The positive polarity is marked with a + on the processor board.
2. Solder the battery to the processor board.
3. Replace the processor board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \8. A24 Processor
Board Assembly".
4. Replace the graphics processor board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \10. A25
Graphics Processor Board".
5. Replace the HP-IB/RS-232 board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \12. A22
HP-IB/RS-232 Board".
6. Replace the counter lock assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \19. A23
Counter Lock Assembly".
7. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
6-24
Replacing Major Assemblies
12. A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board
12. A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the 11 remaining screws on the rear panel.
1 screw attached to the right-side frame (1)
1 screw attached to the left-side frame (2)
3 screws attached to the instrument deck (3)
4 screws attached to the RF cover (4)
2 screws attached to the power supply bae (5)
3. Remove the 4 screws that secure the HP-IB/RS-232 board in the instrument (6).
Figure 6-12. A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board Replacement
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-25
12. A22 HP-IB/RS-232 Board
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If the board is an RS-232, install the ground clip over the RS-232 connector.
Place the HP-IB/RS-232 board into the instrument.
Replace the 4 screws that attach the HP-IB/RS-232 board to the instrument (6).
Replace the 11 screws on the rear panel (1 through 5).
Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
6-26
Replacing Major Assemblies
13. A2 Display
13. A2 Display
WARNING
The monitor is extremely heavy! Use both hands when handling.
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
Remove the rear panel. Refer to the removal procedures for \5. A26 Rear Panel".
Remove the power supply. Refer to the removal procedures for \6. A16 Power Supply
Assembly".
Remove the graphic signal processor assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \14.
A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly".
Remove the OCXO assembly. Refer to the removal procedures for \18. A20 10 MHz
Precision Reference".
Remove the disk drive controller board. Refer to the removal procedures for \16. A21 Disk
Drive Controller Board".
Remove the disk drive assembly. Do not remove the brackets from the disk drive assembly.
Refer to the removal procedures for \17. A19 Disk Drive".
Remove speaker and its bracket (1).
Remove the 3 screws near the top edge of the left side frame that attach the left side
frame to the monitor (2).
Remove the 5 screws from the top of the front panel that attach to the monitor (3).
Remove the 7 screws that attach the instrument deck to the bottom of the monitor (4).
Loosen the 4 top monitor screws slightly (5). Do not remove.
Slide the monitor back in the instrument.
Lift the monitor out of the instrument. Use 2 people to lift the monitor, if possible.
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-27
13. A2 Display
Figure 6-13. A2 Display Replacement
6-28
Replacing Major Assemblies
13. A2 Display
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Set the monitor into the instrument. Use 2 people to lift the monitor, if possible.
Slide the monitor forward into the instrument.
Tighten the 4 top monitor screws (5).
Replace the 7 screws that attach the instrument deck to the bottom of the monitor (4).
Replace the 5 screws that attach the top of the front panel to the monitor (3).
Replace the 3 screws near the top edge of the left side frame that attach the left side
frame to the monitor (2).
Replace speaker and its bracket (1).
Replace the disk drive assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \17. A19 Disk
Drive".
Replace the disk drive controller board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \16. A21
Disk Drive Controller Board".
Replace the OCXO assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for \18. A20 10 MHz
Precision Reference".
Replace the graphic signal processor assembly. Refer to the replacement procedures for
\14. A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly".
Replace the power supply. Refer to the replacement procedures for \6. A16 Power Supply
Assembly".
Replace the rear panel. Refer to the replacement procedures for \5. A26 Rear Panel".
Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-29
14. A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the 4 screws that attach the left side frame to the graphic signal processor
assembly.
3. Lift the graphic signal processor assembly out of the instrument.
4. Disconnect the 3 SMB cables from J1, J2, and J3 (1) that connect to the rear panel EXT VID
connectors.
Figure 6-14. A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly Replacement
5. Disconnect the 8-wire cable harness from J4 (2) that connects to the top of the power
supply.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cable from J5 (3) that connects to the monitor.
6-30
Replacing Major Assemblies
14. A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly
Replacement
1. Connect the ribbon cable from the monitor to connector J5 (3).
2. Connect the 8-wire cable harness from the top of the power supply to connector J4 (2).
3. Connect the 3 SMB cables from the rear panel EXT VID connectors to connectors J1, J2, and
J3 (1).
4. Place the graphic signal processor assembly into the instrument.
5. Replace the 4 screws that attach the left side frame to the graphic signal processor assembly.
6. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-31
15. A15 Motherboard/IF Section Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
3. Remove the analog interface board. Refer to the removal procedures for \20. A5 Analog
Interface Board".
Figure 6-15. A15 Motherboard/IF Section Assembly Replacement
4. Remove the RF/IF bracket (1).
5. Disconnect all cables attached to the IF section boards (2) and pull the cables forward in
the instrument.
6. Remove all 7 boards from IF section.
7. Remove the ribbon cable attached to the right side of the power supply (3).
8. Remove the power supply bae by removing the 3 screws (4).
9. Remove the 5 screws that attach the motherboard to the instrument (5).
10. Remove the rear panel screws and lower the rear panel.
11. Disconnect the 6 cables attached to the rear edge of the motherboard (6).
6-32
Replacing Major Assemblies
15. A15 Motherboard/IF Section Assembly
12. Rock the motherboard/IF section assembly back and forth while pulling it up to remove it
from the instrument.
13. Remove the motherboard from the IF section casting/card cage frame by removing the 42
screws from the bottom of the motherboard.
Replacement
1. Reattach the motherboard to the IF section casting/card cage frame by replacing the 42
screws on the bottom of the motherboard.
2. Place the motherboard/IF section assembly back into the instrument.
3. Connect the 6 cables to the SMB connectors on the rear edge of the motherboard (6).
Table 6-2. A15 Motherboard Cable Connections
Motherboard Connector Tape Color Tape Number
Description
J14
Orange
3
SWP RMP
J15
Yellow
4
HSWP
J16
Blue
6
AUX VID from the rear panel
J17
Black
0
AUX IF from the rear panel
J18
Green
5
COUNT IF from the counter lock assembly
J200
No Color
N/A
From the narrow bandwidth board
4. Reattach the rear panel by replacing the rear panel screws.
5. Replace the 5 screws that attach the motherboard to the instrument (5).
6. Replace the power supply bae and attach it to the instrument by replacing the 3 screws
(4).
7. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the right side of the power supply (3).
8. Reinstall all 7 boards in the IF section.
9. Reconnect all cables to the IF section boards (2).
10. Replace the RF/IF bracket (1).
11. Replace the analog interface board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \20. A5
Analog Interface Board".
12. Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
13. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-33
16. A21 Disk Drive Controller Board
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the ribbon cable (1) between the disk drive and the disk drive controller board from
the front edge of the disk drive controller board.
Figure 6-16. A21 Disk Drive Controller Board Replacement
3. Remove the ribbon cable (2) between the processor board and the disk drive controller
board from the rear edge of the disk drive controller board.
4. Remove the four screws (3) from the disk drive controller board.
5. Remove the disk drive controller board from the instrument.
6-34
Replacing Major Assemblies
16. A21 Disk Drive Controller Board
Replacement
1. Replace the disk drive controller board into the instrument.
2. Replace the four screws (3) in the disk drive controller board.
3. Replace the ribbon cable (2) from the processor board to the rear edge of the disk drive
controller board.
4. Replace the ribbon cable (1) from the disk drive to the front edge of the disk drive
controller board.
5. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-35
17. A19 Disk Drive
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the ribbon cable (1) from the front edge of the disk drive controller board.
Figure 6-17. A19 Disk Drive Replacement
3. Remove the four screws (2) holding the two disk drive brackets in the instrument.
4. Remove the disk drive with its brackets attached.
5. Remove the disk drive brackets (3) from the disk drive.
Replacement
1. Install the disk drive brackets (3) to the new disk drive.
2. Replace the disk drive with its attached brackets and install into the instrument using the
four screws (2).
3. Connect the disk drive ribbon cable (1) to the front edge of the disk drive controller board.
4. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
6-36
Replacing Major Assemblies
18. A20 10 MHz Precision Reference
18. A20 10 MHz Precision Reference
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
Figure 6-18. A20 10 MHz Precision Reference Replacement
2. Disconnect the OCXO cable (1).
3. Remove the three screws that attach the OCXO bracket to the instrument (2).
4. Remove the three screws that attach the OCXO to its bracket.
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace the three screws that attach the OCXO to its bracket.
Replace the three screws that attach the OCXO bracket to the instrument (2).
Reconnect the OCXO cable (1).
Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-37
19. A23 Counter Lock Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
Figure 6-19. A23 Counter Lock Assembly Replacement
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Disconnect the ribbon cable from the rear edge of the disk drive controller board (1).
Disconnect the large ribbon cable from the processor board (2).
Disconnect the 2 cables attached to the rear edge of the counter lock assembly (3).
Disconnect the 2 cables from the front edge of the counter lock assembly (4).
Disconnect the cable from the left edge of the counter lock assembly (5).
Remove the 4 screws that attach the counter lock assembly to the instrument (6).
Remove the counter lock assembly from the instrument.
6-38
Replacing Major Assemblies
19. A23 Counter Lock Assembly
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Replace the counter lock assembly in the instrument.
Replace the 4 screws that attach the counter lock assembly to the instrument (6).
Connect the cable to the left edge of the counter lock assembly (5).
Connect the 2 cables to the front edge of the counter lock assembly (4).
Connect the 2 cables to the rear edge of the counter lock assembly (3).
Connect the large ribbon cable to the processor board (2).
Connect the ribbon cable to the rear edge of the disk drive controller board (1).
Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-39
20. A5 Analog Interface Board
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
Remove the red/brown/blue/green cable harness (1) from the analog interface board.
Remove the multi-colored ribbon cable (2) from the analog interface board.
Remove the gray ribbon cable (3) from the analog interface board.
Remove the yellow/brown cable harness (4) from the analog interface board.
Figure 6-20. A5 Analog Interface Board Replacement
7. Remove the 4 screws from the right side frame that attaches the frame to the analog
interface board (5).
8. Remove the analog interface board about half way out of the instrument by lift it up. A
pair of needle-nose pliers may be used to grab the back corner of the board to help remove
the board.
9. Remove the remaining ribbon cable (6) from the analog interface board.
10. Remove the green/orange/purple/red wire harness (7) from the analog interface board.
11. Remove the analog interface board from the instrument completely.
6-40
Replacing Major Assemblies
20. A5 Analog Interface Board
Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the analog interface board about half way into the instrument.
Reconnect the green/orange/purple/red wire harness (7) to the analog interface board.
Reconnect the ribbon cable (6) to the analog interface board.
Place the analog interface board into the instrument completely.
CAUTION
Be careful not to bend the connector pins when installing the board.
5. Replace the 4 screws on the right side frame that attach the frame to the analog interface
board (5).
6. Reconnect the yellow/brown cable harness (4) to the analog interface board.
7. Reconnect the gray ribbon cable (3) to the analog interface board.
8. Reconnect the multi-colored ribbon cable (2) to the analog interface board.
9. Reconnect the red/brown/blue/green cable harness (1) to the analog interface board.
10. Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
11. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-41
21. A3 Preamplier Section/A4 RF Section Assembly
The A3 preamplier section assembly and the A4 RF section assembly are removed together.
Once they are out of the instrument, they may be separated and worked on separately.
Figure 6-21. A3 Preamplier Section/A4 RF Section Assembly Replacement
6-42
Replacing Major Assemblies
21. A3 Preamplier Section/A4 RF Section Assembly
Removal
1. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \1. Instrument Cover".
2. Remove the RF cover. Refer to the removal procedures for \2. RF Cover".
3. Remove the analog interface board. Refer to the removal procedures for \20. A5 Analog
Interface Board".
4. Disconnect the tracking generator output cable from the connector on the bulkhead (1).
5. Disconnect the 300 MHz output cable from the A3A3 switch (2).
6. Disconnect the RF input cable from the A3A1 switch (3).
7. Remove the 4 screws from the bottom of the A3 preamplier section (4).
8. Remove the 4 screws from the bottom of the A4 RF section (5).
9. Remove the RF/IF bracket from the instrument (6).
10. Remove the wires and cables from the boards in the IF section (7).
11. Disconnect the ALC connector wires (Red/White) from the front side of the tracking
generator (8). Note how the excess wire is routed toward the rear on the left side of the
A4 RF section.
12. Remove the A3 preamplier section/A4 RF section from the instrument.
Replacement
1. Place the A3 preamplier section/A4 RF section assembly in the instrument.
2. Connect the ALC connector wires (8) (Red/White) to the connector at the front of the
tracking generator. Route the wires so that the excess wire is pulled toward the rear at the
left side of the A4 RF section.
3. Reconnect the wires and cables to the boards in the IF section (7).
4. Replace the RF/IF bracket in the instrument (6).
5. Replace the 4 screws at the bottom of the A4 RF section (5).
6. Replace the 4 screws at the bottom of the A3 preamplier section (4).
7. Connect the RF input cable to the A3A1 switch (3).
8. Connect the 300 MHz output cable to the A3A3 switch (2).
9. Connect the tracking generator output cable to the connector on the bulkhead (1).
10. Replace the analog interface board. Refer to the replacement procedures for \20. A5
Analog Interface Board".
11. Replace the RF cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \2. RF Cover".
12. Replace the instrument cover. Refer to the replacement procedures for \1. Instrument
Cover".
Replacing Major Assemblies
6-43
7
Customer Support
Your EMI receiver is built to provide dependable service. It is unlikely that you will experience
a problem. However, Hewlett-Packard's worldwide sales and service organization is ready to
provide the support you need.
If You Have a Problem
Before calling Hewlett-Packard or returning the EMI receiver for service, please make the
checks listed in \Check the Basics." If you still have a problem, please read the warranty
printed at the front of this manual. If your EMI receiver is covered by a separate maintenance
agreement, please be familiar with its terms.
Hewlett-Packard oers several maintenance plans to service your EMI receiver after warranty
expiration. Call your HP Sales and Service Oce for full details.
If you want to service the EMI receiver yourself after warranty expiration, contact your HP
Sales and Service Oce to obtain the most current test and maintenance information.
Calling HP Sales and Service Oces
Sales and service oces are located around the world to provide complete support for your
EMI receiver. To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts, contact the
nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service oce listed in Table 7-1. In any correspondence or
telephone conversations, refer to the EMI receiver by its model number and full serial number.
With this information, the HP representative can quickly determine whether your unit is still
within its warranty period.
Customer Support
7-1
Check the Basics
In general, a problem can be caused by a hardware failure, a software error, or a user error.
Often problems may be solved by repeating what was being done when the problem occurred.
A few minutes spent in performing these simple checks may eliminate time spent waiting for
instrument repair.
If Your EMI Receiver Does Not Turn On
Check that the EMI receiver is plugged into the proper ac power source.
Check that the line socket has power.
Check that the rear-panel voltage selector switches are set correctly.
Check that the line fuses are good.
Check that the EMI receiver is turned on.
If the RF Filter Section Does Not Seem to be Working
Check the ac power to the EMI receiver as described above.
Verify that the rear-panel auxiliary interface cable is properly connected.
Verify that the rear-panel sweep ramp and high sweep cables are properly connected.
If the EMI Receiver Cannot Communicate Via HP-IB
Verify that the proper HP-IB address has been set.
Verify that there are no equipment address conicts.
Check that the other equipment and cables are connected properly and operating correctly.
Verify that the HP-IB cable is connected to the receiver RF section and not the RF lter
section.
Verication of Proper Operation
Check that the test being performed and the expected results are within the specications
and capabilities of the EMI receiver.
Check operation by performing the operation verication procedures in Chapter 2 of the EMI
Receiver Series Installation and Verication. Record all results in the operation verication
test record.
If the RF lter section Does Not Power O
Verify that the service power switch on the RF lter section is set to normal mode.
Error Messages
Check the EMI receiver display for error messages. Refer to Chapter 4 of the EMI Receiver
Series Installation and Verication.
7-2
Customer Support
Additional Support Services
CompuServe
CompuServe, the worldwide electronic information utility, provides technical information and
support for EMC instrumentation and communication with other EMI users.
With a CompuServe account and a modem-equipped computer, simply type GO HPSYS and select
the EMC system section to get information on documentation, application notes, product notes,
service notes, software, rmware revision listings, data sheets, and more.
If you are not a member of CompuServe and would like to join, call CompuServe and take
advantage of the Free Introductory Membership. The membership includes the following:
An introductory usage credit to CompuServe
A private User ID and Password
A complimentary subscription to CompuServe's monthly computing publication, CompuServe
Magazine
To take advantage of the CompuServe Free Introductory Membership oer, call one of the
telephone numbers below and ask for Representative Number 999.
Country
Argentina
Australia
Canada
Chile
Germany
Hong Kong
Israel
Japan
Korea
New Zealand
South Africa
Switzerland
Taiwan
United Kingdom
United States
Venezuela
Elsewhere
Toll-Free
|
008-023-158
|
|
0130 86 4643
|
|
0120-22-1200
080-022-7400
0800-441-082
|
155 31 79
|
0800 289458
800-848-8990
|
|
Direct
(+54) 01-372-7883
(+61) 2-410-4555
(+1) 614-457-8650
(+56) 2-696-8807
(+49) (+89) 66 55 0-222
(+852) 867-0102
(+972) 3-290466
(+81) 3-5471-5806
(+82) 2-569-5400
|
(+27) 12-841-2530
|
(+886) 2-515-7035
(+44) (+272) 255111
(+1) 614-457-8650
(+58) 2-793-2984
(+1) 614-457-8650
FAX Support Line
A fax sheet is provided at the end of this chapter as a method in which to directly contact the
HP EMC support team in the event of a problem. The fax cover sheet provides EMC support
team with information about your company, the product, and a detailed description about the
problem.
Customer Support
7-3
Note
All items on the fax cover sheet must be completed in order to expedite your
response. Any incomplete item may delay your response.
Simply copy the fax cover sheet, ll out the requested information, include any additional
information sheets, and fax the sheet(s) to HP EMC Support at (707) 577-4200. Depending on
the complexity of the problem, you should receive a response back within a few days.
7-4
Customer Support
Returning the EMI Receiver for Service
Use the information in this section if it is necessary to return the EMI receiver to
Hewlett-Packard.
Note
If you are returning an EMI receiver, you must return both the receiver RF
section and RF lter section to the service center for repair and calibration.
Also, you must package the units individually to avoid damage.
Package the EMI receiver for shipment
Use the following steps to package the EMI receiver for shipment to Hewlett-Packard for
service:
1. Fill in a service tag (available at the end of this chapter) and attach it to the instrument.
Please be as specic as possible about the nature of the problem. Send a copy of any or all
of the following information:
Any error messages that appeared on the EMI receiver display.
A completed operation verication test record located at the end of Chapter 2 in the EMI
Receiver Series Installation and Verication.
Any other specic data on the performance of the EMI receiver.
CAUTION
Damage to the EMI receiver can result from using packaging materials other
than those specied. Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging
materials. They do not adequately cushion the instrument or prevent it from
shifting in the carton. Styrene pellets cause equipment damage by generating
static electricity and by lodging in the fan.
2. Use the original packaging materials, if possible. You may also use strong shipping containers
that are made of double-walled, corrugated cardboard with 159 kg (350 lb) bursting
strength. The cartons must be both large enough and strong enough and allow at least 3 to
4 inches on all sides of the instrument for packing material. Containers and materials for
factory shipments are also available through any Hewlett-Packard sales or service oce.
3. Protect the front panel with cardboard.
4. Surround the instrument with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing material, or enough to
prevent the instrument from moving in the carton. If packing foam is not available, the best
alternative is SD-240 Air CapTM from Sealed Air Corporation (Hayward, CA 94545). Air Cap
looks like a plastic sheet covered with 1-1/4 inch air-lled bubbles. Use the pink Air Cap to
reduce static electricity. Wrap the instrument several times in the material to both protect
the instrument and prevent it from moving in the carton.
5. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape.
6. Mark the shipping container \FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE" to ensure careful handling.
7. Retain copies of all shipping papers.
Customer Support
7-5
Table 7-1. Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oces
US FIELD OPERATIONS
Customer Information
Hewlett-Packard Company
19320 Pruneridge Avenue
Cupertino, CA 95014, USA
(800) 752-0900
California, Northern
Hewlett-Packard Co.
301 E. Evelynjgw421 South Manhattan Ave.
Mountain View, CA 94041
(415) 694-2000
Fullerton, CA 92631
(714) 999-6700
Colorado
Hewlett-Packard Co.
24 Inverness Place, East
Englewood, CO 80112
(303) 649-5000
Georgia
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2000 South Park Place
Atlanta, GA 30339
(404) 955-1500
Illinois
Hewlett-Packard Co.
5201 Tollview Drive
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008
(708) 255-9800
New Jersey
120 W. Century Road
Paramus, NJ 07653
(201)599-5000
Texas
930 E. Campbell Rd.
Richardson, TX 75081
(214) 231-6101
California, Southern
Hewlett-Packard Co.
EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
150, Route du Nant-d'Avril
1217 Meyrin 2/Geneva
Switzerland
(41 22) 780.8111
Great Britain
Hewlett-Packard Ltd
Eskdale Road, Winnersh Triangle
Wokingham, Berkshire RF11 5DZ
England
(44 734) 696622
France
Hewlett-Packard France
1 Avenue Du Canada
Zone D'Activite De Courtaboeuf
F-91947 Les Ulis Cedex
France
(33 1) 69 82 60 60
Germany
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Berner Strasse 117
6000 Frankfurt 56
West Germany
(49 69) 500006-0
INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
Hewlett-Packard Company
3495 Deer Creek Rd.
Palo Alto, California 94304-1316
(415) 857-5027
Australia
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
31-41 Joseph Street
Blackburn, Victoria 3130
(61 3) 895-2895
Canada
Hewlett- Packard (Canada) Ltd.
17500 South Service Road
Trans- Canada Highway
Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8
Canada
(514) 697-4232
China
China Hewlett-Packard Co.
38 Bei San Huan X1 Road
Shuang Yu Shu
Hai Dian District
Beijing, China
(86 1) 256-6888
Japan
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
1-27-15 Yabe, Sagamihara
Kanagawa 229, Japan
(81 427) 59-1311
Singapore
Hewlett-Packard Singapore (Pte.) Ltd
1150 Depot Road
Singapore 0410
(65) 273-7388
Taiwan
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan
8th Floor, H-P Building
337 Fu Hsing North Road
Taipei, Taiwan
(886 2) 712-0404
7-6
Customer Support
Customer Support
7-7
8
Assembly Descriptions
This chapter describes the operation of the HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section that is
useful when rst troubleshooting a failure.
The HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section are microprocessor-controlled swept receivers
covering the following frequency ranges. The overall description briey describes each of the
major instrument assemblies.
Table 8-1.
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section Frequency Ranges
Instrument
Model
Frequency
Range
HP 85422E 9 kHz to 2.9 GHz
HP 85462A 9 kHz to 6.5 GHz
RF and LO Section
The HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section includes the following assemblies in the RF and
LO sections:
A4A1 2.9 GHz LPF
A4A3 second converter
A3A4 input attenuator
A4A6 dual-band mixer
A4A4 YTF (YIG-Tuned Filter)
A4A2 321.4 MHz band pass lter
A4A5 3 dB pad
A4A10 tracking generator
A5 analog interface
A9 third converter
A4A8 4.4 GHz low pass lter
For details about the operation of the HP 85422E/HP 85462A RF section, refer to Figure 8-2,
located in the back of this chapter.
Assembly Descriptions
8-1
RF Section Assemblies
The RF section converts all input signals to a xed 21.4 MHz IF. The microcircuits in the
RF section are controlled by signals from the A5 analog interface assembly. The A5 analog
interface assembly also includes circuitry for controlling the LO and IF sections.
The HP 8546A/HP 85462A consists of two frequency bands and the HP 8542E/HP 85422E
consists of one frequency band.
Band 0 (low band) uses triple conversion to produce the nal 21.4 MHz IF. The A4A6 dual
band mixer up-converts the RF input to a 3.9214 GHz rst IF. The A4A3 second converter
down-converts the 3.9214 GHz rst IF to a 321.4 MHz second IF. The A9 third converter
down-converts the second IF to the nal 21.4 MHz IF.
Band 1 (high band) use double conversion. The A4A6 dual-band mixer down-converts the RF
input to a 321.4 MHz rst IF. Although this rst IF passes through the A4A3 second converter,
it bypasses the second mixer. The second and nal conversion occurs in the A9 third converter
where the rst IF is down-converted to produce the nal 21.4 MHz IF.
A3A2 Preamplier
The A3A2 preamplier is a wideband preamplier with a frequency range from 9 kHz to 6.5
GHz. A bipolar amplier is used from 9 kHz to 1 GHz and a FET amplier is used from 500 MHz
to 6.5 GHz. These ampliers are connected to identical Diplexers at their inputs and outputs.
These diplexers have a cross-over frequency of approximately 900 MHz. The lowband path is
switched into a 50
load in front of the lowband amplier giving the preamplier preselection
capabilities using the highpass lter portion of the input diplexer.
Figure 8-1. A3A2 Preamplier Block Diagram
The amplier is mated to a bias board which actively biases the various FET stages. The Ids
current for the middle stages of the highband amplier can be adjusted. This Ids adjustment is
used to equalize the gain of the highband amplier with the lowband amplier. The switch
driver for switching the lowband path into 50
is also on the bias board.
8-2
Assembly Descriptions
A4A10 Tracking Generator
The A4A10 tracking generator assembly consists of several smaller circuits. The A4A10
tracking generator assembly is not component-level repairable; a rebuilt exchange assembly is
available.
The tracking generator recreates only one of the intermediate frequencies. This minimizes
isolation problems associated with a built-in tracking generator. Each of the blocks of the
A4A10 tracking generator assembly is described below.
Tracking Oscillator. The tracking oscillator enables the ne adjustment of the tracking
generator output frequency to compensate for the frequency inaccuracies of the 21.4 MHz
IF. The tracking oscillator determines the residual FM and frequency drift of the tracking
generator. The 184.28 MHz output frequency is obtained by doubling the output of a crystal
oscillator operating at 92.14 MHz.
Upconverter. The upconverter mixes the tracking oscillator output with the buered 600 MHz
reference from the A9 third converter assembly. The upconverter also contains a lter to pass
only the 784.28 MHz upper sideband.
Pentupler. The pentupler multiplies the 784.28 MHz signal by ve to generate 3.9214 GHz, the
instrument rst IF in low band. A dual cavity bandpass lter centered at 3.9214 GHz eliminates
all unwanted multiples of 784.28 MHz.
Modulator. The output of the pentupler is passed through a modulator to adjust the power
level into the output mixer. The modulator is controlled by an ALC circuit on the bias board,
which is fed by a detector in the output amplier. If the detected output power is too high, the
ALC will drive the modulator to decrease the input level into the output mixer, resulting in a
decrease in output power.
Coupler. The rst LO signal from the A4A7 rst LO distribution amplier assembly is coupled
o, then buered to drive the output mixer. The main line of the coupler is fed to the LO
OUTPUT connector on the rear panel. The loss through the coupler main line is less than 2.5
dB.
Output Mixer. The 3.9214 GHz signal from the modulator is fed into the RF port of the output
mixer. The LO port of the output mixer is driven by the buered rst LO signal from the
coupler. The output of the mixer is then amplied.
Output Amplier. The output amplier lters the signal emerging from the output mixer and
then amplies it into a usable range. The amplier also contains a detector for leveling the
output.
Bias Board. The bias board contains the ALC circuitry for the tracking generator and
distributes dc power from the A8 tracking generator control assembly to the rest of the
tracking generator. The ALC inputs come from the A8 tracking generator control assembly (for
controlling the power level), the EXT ALC INPUT line, and the detector in the output amplier.
The ALC loop drives the modulator.
Assembly Descriptions
8-3
A8 Tracking Generator Control Board
The A8 tracking generator control board has two major functions. The rst function is to
control the A4A10 tracking generator RF output power and output attenuator. The other main
function is to provide bias and a summing junction for the leveling loop used by the A4A7
Local Oscillator Distribution Amplier (LODA) microcircuit.
The tracking generator output power is controlled by the voltage at J1-pin 8 (PWR LVL). This
voltage is normally 0 to 012 Vdc for tracking generator output power levels of 010 to +2.75
dBm at 300 MHz tuned frequency. The voltage is determined from two major components:
1. The Level Reference DAC (U16A) which takes the information from the IOB bus and
converts it to a dc voltage.
2. The Power Sweep section attenuates the sweep ramp based on the amount of slope
correction calculated by the internal self cal routine and the amount of power sweep
requested by the user.
The output attenuator is controlled by a simple latch plus buer/invertor scheme.
The Tune Control section provides a dc voltage to control the tracking oscillator VCO in the
A4A10 tracking generator. This VCO is tuned to correct for errors in the host analyzer IF
centering.
The LODA Drive section consists of an opamp acting as a summing node for the ALC error
voltage and the adjustable target voltage. The voltages are compared and a control level is sent
to the PIN attenuator in the LODA microcircuit.
ALC/LODA Status block consists of two window comparitors which monitor the PIN ATTEN
and ALC MON lines from the LODA and tracking generator microcircuits.
Board identication is handled by the Address Decode and Sub Address Latch section.
A4A7 First LO Distribution Amplier (LODA)
The A4A7 rst LO distribution amplier, (LODA), amplies and levels the rst LO signal from
the A4A9 EYO and distributes it to the A23A1 sampler (through attenuator AT1), A4A6 dual
band mixer, and A4A10 tracking generator. The leveling control circuitry is on the A8 tracking
generator control assembly.
The LODA consists of a PIN diode attenuator, an amplier, three directional couplers, a buer
amplier, and a detector. Refer to Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3. All three directional couplers
are connected in series. The main line of the directional couplers is the output to the A4A10
tracking generator assembly. The directional coupler outputs feed the A4A6 dual-band mixer,
the detector, and the buer amplier for driving the A23A1 sampler.
The detector output is fed to the A8 tracking generator control assembly. Here it is fed into a
loop integrator. The reference voltage for the loop integrator is adjustable and determines the
output power of the LODA. The gate bias adjustment is also on A8. Note that the LODA drive
circuit common is connected only to the A4A7 LODA itself and not to any other grounds on A8.
8-4
Assembly Descriptions
LO Section Assemblies
The LO Section includes the following assemblies:
A4A9 EYO (Electronic YIG-tuned Oscillator)
A5 analog interface
A9 third converter
A20 precision frequency reference
A23 counterlock
AT1 10 dB Pad
Refer to Figure 8-3, located at the back of this chapter for details about the operation of the
LO section.
The LO section provides a 3.0 to 6.8214 GHz rst LO, a 600 MHz second LO, a 300 MHz third
LO, a 300 MHz CAL OUT signal, and an IF frequency counter. The counter and the local
oscillators use a 10 MHz precision frequency reference, A20 oven-controlled crystal oscillator
(OCXO).
The 10 MHz reference phase-locks the 600 MHz oscillator on the A9 third converter. The
600 MHz signal drives the second converter and is divided to produce the 300 MHz third LO
and CAL OUT signals. A 300 MHz signal that is sent to the A23 counterlock assembly is divided
down further to produce a 7.5 MHz reference signal. This 7.5 MHz reference is used by the
stabilizer, the sampling oscillator, and frequency counter. The phase-frequency detector is
located on the A23 counterlock assembly.
The rst LO output of the A4A9 EYO is fed to the A4A6 dual-band mixer. The coupled output
is fed through the AT1 10 dB pad to the A23A1 sampler. The sampler mixes the rst LO with a
harmonic of the sampling oscillator to generate a 60 to 100 MHz sampler IF. This value is then
divided by 10, producing a 6 to 10 MHz output.
During retrace, the EYO is locked to the selected rst LO frequency. The divided sampler
IF is then counted in the frequency counter. The EYO tune DACs on the A5 analog interface
assembly are adjusted until the counted frequency is equal to the desired frequency. In LO
spans less than or equal to 10 MHz, the divided sampler IF is also fed to a stabilizer, which
generates the DISCRIM (discriminator) signal. DISCRIM tunes the EYO precisely to the desired
rst LO frequency.
When a trigger signal occurs, a sweep ramp is applied to the main coil drivers while in LO spans
greater than 10 MHz, or to the FM coil drivers while in LO spans less than or equal to 10 MHz.
During a main coil sweep, the sampling oscillator is disconnected from the A23A1 sampler.
In frequency count mode, the rst LO sweeps up to the marked signal and pauses. The divided
sampler IF is counted to calculate the actual rst LO frequency. Then the prescaled 21.4 MHz
IF, nominally 5.35 MHz, is counted and the actual input frequency calculated.
Assembly Descriptions
8-5
A9 Third Converter Assembly
The A9 Third Converter performs the following functions:
Down-converts the 321.4 MHz IF to the nal 21.4 MHz IF.
Generates the 300 MHz third LO.
Provides variable gain from the calibrator amplier that adjusts the amplitude of the
21.4 MHz IF during the CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Generates the 600 MHz second LO drive signal for the A4A3 second converter assembly and
for the tracking generator.
Generates the 300 MHz CAL OUT signal at 020 dBm.
Provides a buered 300 MHz to drive the external reference PLL circuitry on the A23
counterlock assembly.
Refer to Figure 8-4, located at the back of this chapter for details about the operation of the
A9 third converter assembly.
Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" in Chapter 4 when tracing control
signals for the A9 third converter assembly.
The output of the 600 MHz surface acoustical wave (SAW) oscillator is buered, providing the
second LO signal to the A4A3 second converter. This signal is further buered, divided by two,
and buered again to produce three 300 MHz outputs. A second 600 MHz output drive signal is
available for the tracking generator.
The amplitude of the 300 MHz signal from the calibrator amplier is adjusted to provide the
020 dBm output for the 300 MHz CAL OUT signal. This amplier produces rich harmonics that
are used in the instrument self-calibration routines.
The 300 MHz signal sent to the 300 MHz Buer produces the other two 300 MHz outputs:
The 300 MHz third LO sent to the mixer/lter.
The 300 MHz feedback signal sent to the A23 counterlock assembly by the counterlock
buer. This signal is divided down and compared to the 10 MHz reference in a
phase/frequency detector on the A23 counterlock assembly. The output of the
phase/frequency detector, VTO TUNE, is fed back to the 600 MHz SAW Oscillator to increase
its frequency stability.
The 321.4 MHz second IF signal from the A4A3 second converter is amplied and
bandpass-ltered on the A9 third converter assembly. This signal is mixed with the 300 MHz
third LO to produce the 21.4 MHz dierence signal that is then bandpass-ltered and buered.
The buered 21.4 MHz IF signal is amplied in the IF calibration amplier (IF Cal Amp). The
gain of the calibration amplier is controlled by a DAC on the A5 analog interface assembly
via the REF LVL CAL control line. During the CAL AMP routine, the gain of the calibration
amplier is adjusted so that the reference level at top-screen is calibrated. The amplitude
reference for the routine is provided by the 020 dBm CAL OUT signal with 10 dB of A3A5
input attenuation in band 0. Refer to \IF Power-Level Measurement" in Chapter 4 for more
information about the 21.4 MHz output from the A9 third converter assembly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-6
Assembly Descriptions
A23 Counterlock Assembly
The A23 counterlock assembly performs four main functions:
Phase-locks the 600 MHz SAW oscillator on the A9 third converter to the 10 MHz reference.
Counts the rst LO frequency.
Provides discriminator output, DISCRIM, to the A5 analog interface assembly.
Counts the 21.4 MHz IF.
Refer to Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3, located at the back of this chapter for details about the
operation of the A23 counterlock assembly.
On the A9 third converter, the output of the 600 MHz oscillator is divided by two and the
resulting 300 MHz signal is routed to the A23 counterlock assembly. The A23 counterlock
assembly divides the 300 MHz signal by 40 to generate a 7.5 MHz reference for the sampling
oscillator, stabilizer, and frequency counter. The 7.5 MHz reference and the 10 MHz reference
are divided further and compared in a phase-frequency detector. The output of the
phase-frequency detector, VTO TUNE, is fed back to A9 to tune the 600 MHz oscillator.
The sampling oscillator provides a 279 to 298 MHz driving signal to the A23A1 sampler. The
rst LO signal is also applied to A23A1 sampler. The rst LO signal is mixed with a harmonic of
the sampling oscillator signal to generate the sampler IF. This IF is divided by 10 and fed to one
input of the frequency counter. The equation used to produce the rst LO frequency is:
1st LO Frequency = N 2 FSO + Sampler IF
N represents the harmonic of the sampling oscillator.
FSO represents the sampling oscillator frequency.
Sampler IF represents the counted sampler IF (may be negative).
The stabilizer mixes the divided sampler IF (nominally 8.25 MHz) with the 7.5 MHz, and feeds
the dierence signal into the discriminator. The discriminator output, DISCRIM, is fed back to
the A5 analog interface assembly to tune the A4A9 EYO precisely to the center frequency.
When the frequency count marker is active, the instrument pauses at the marked frequency
and counts the rst LO as described previously. The 21.4 MHz IF is then divided by four, to a
nominal value of 5.35 MHz, fed to another frequency counter input, and counted. With the
second LO, the third LO, the counted rst LO, and the counted nal IF all referenced to the
10 MHz reference, the actual input signal frequency is calculated.
Assembly Descriptions
8-7
IF Section
This section describes the operation of the IF section assemblies and the A24 processor
assembly. The related operation of the A5 analog interface assembly and the A16 Power Supply
are also described. Figure 8-5 illustrates the assembly descriptions in this section.
The A15 motherboard pin designation of related assemblies along the IF signal path are detailed
on Figure 8-5.
IF Section Assemblies
A11 Bandwidth Filter
The A11 bandwidth lter assembly contains two synchronously tuned LC lter poles and two
synchronously tuned crystal lter poles. Buer ampliers provide isolation for each lter pole.
Eight IF bandwidths, from 1 kHz to 3 MHz, can be selected in a 1,3,10 sequence. The desired
IF passband, or resolution bandwidth, is produced by either a four-pole LC bandpass lter or
a four-pole crystal bandpass lter. The A13 bandwidth lter assembly is identical to the A11
assembly and provides two of the four lter poles. The LC bandpass lters provide the 100 kHz
to 3 MHz bandwidths, and the crystal bandpass lters provide the 1 kHz to 30 kHz bandwidths.
When a bandwidth is selected, the A5 analog interface assembly interprets the A24 processor
assembly commands and produces the corresponding bandwidth control currents. The A5
assembly produces a bias voltage (BW5) to select LC or crystal mode, and a bandwidth control
current for either the LC lters (BW7) or the crystal lters (BW6).
Bandwidth errors are corrected by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine. Refer to Chapter 11
for a description of CAL AMP .
The resolution bandwidths are normally coupled to the frequency span of the instrument for an
optimum ratio of span to resolution bandwidth. Sweep time is also coupled to both resolution
bandwidth and span for optimum amplitude response. The resolution bandwidth, sweep time,
and span can be set independently.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A12 Amplitude Control
The A12 amplitude control assembly provides gain or attenuation in eight stages: three
step-gain ampliers and ve step attenuators. All stages, except the 10 dB step gain, provide
full gain or attenuation when turned on and unity gain when turned o. The 10 dB step gain
has a gain of 15 dB when on and a gain of 5 dB when o.
When the reference level is changed, the A5 analog interface assembly interprets the
A24 processor assembly commands and produces the appropriate combination of gain and
attenuation control voltages in 1 dB increments. Reference-level resolution of less than 1 dB is
produced by mathematically osetting the digitized video signal on the A24 processor assembly.
A12 step-gain errors are corrected by correction factors produced by the CAL AMP
self-calibration routine. Each correction factor is an oset of the digitized video signal and is
stored in nonvolatile memory on the A24 assembly.
A12 step-attenuator errors are corrected by correction constants that are characterized values
initially installed at the factory. The corrected calibration attenuators provide the amplitude
reference used by CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-8
Assembly Descriptions
A13 Bandwidth Filter
The A13 bandwidth lter assembly is identical to the A11 assembly. Refer to the A11 assembly
description in this section.
After leaving the A13 assembly, the 21.4 MHz IF signal branches on the A15 motherboard:
One branch passes directly to the A14 log amplier assembly.
A buer amplier on the A15 motherboard attenuates the IF signal by 20 dB and distributes
it to the card-cage assemblies (AUX IF), the rear panel AUX IF OUTPUT connector
(AUX IF BP), and the A23 counterlock assembly (COUNT IF). The COUNT IF signal is used
by the A23 assembly to count the actual IF frequency when MKR CNT ON is selected.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Another buer amplier on the A15 assembly sends the IF signal (AUX IF) to assemblies
installed in the card cage.
A14 Log Amplier
The A14 log amplier assembly provides the following functions:
Log Mode. The input signal is logarithmically displayed due to the sequential response of
seven log amplier stages.
The log amplier stages have an overall range of 70 dB. This allows a greater range of
signal amplitudes to be simultaneously displayed.
All seven amplier stages are at maximum gain for low input signal levels.
As the signal level increases, the gain of the each 10 dB amplier is reduced in sequence,
with the last stage dropping to unity gain rst.
The vertical display axis is calibrated in dBm (relative to a milliwatt) rather than volts.
Linear Mode. The seven log amplier stages are biased to operate as linear ampliers. Linear
gains from 0 dB to 40 dB can be selected.
The Video Detector. The detector is a half-wave rectier and lter. The video signal
(VIDEO IF) has a 0 to 2 volt output that is proportional to the signal level.
T/C Supply. A temperature-compensated 08 V reference supply (08 VT).
Maintains amplitude stability of the log stages over temperature.
Maintains linear step-gain accuracy by providing a stable voltage source for the linear
step-gain control lines that originate on the A5 assembly.
A24 Processor
The A24 assembly coordinates the operation of all assemblies to perform all instrument
functions. This section briey describes the major functions provided directly by the A24
processor assembly.
Selection of the input signal for the ADC. The input MUX selects one of the following:
An analog signal from assemblies installed in the card cage.
The detected 21.4 MHz IF signal (VIDEO IF).
A +2 V reference used for ADC calibration of the graticule at top screen.
An analog ground (ACOM) reference used for ADC calibration of graticule at bottom
screen.
Final processing of the detected 21.4 MHz IF signal before the video signal is converted by
the ADC for further digital processing by the central processing unit (CPU).
Assembly Descriptions
8-9
Video bandwidths from 30 Hz to 3 MHz are available in a 1, 3, 10 sequence.
The ADC input MUX selects the positive-peak detector, or bypasses the positive-peak
detector, and selects the sample detector. In sample mode, the video signal passes directly
to the ADC from the video bandwidth circuitry.
The MUX can also select the processed video signal from an assembly in the card cage.
Mathematical oset of the digitized video signal for greater reference-level resolution and
calibration accuracy.
Digital control of instrument assemblies directly over the IO bus.
Analog control of instrument assemblies via the A5 analog interface assembly.
Nonvolatile RAM memory-storage of DLP software, calibration data, and error correction
data. Refer to Chapter 11 for more information about calibration and error correction.
Processing and integration of trace and text information for output to the A2 display
assembly. The digitized video signal is merged by the CPU with other trace information.
The trace information is then combined with text information for input to the display drive
circuitry.
Generation of the A2 display drive signals. The digital display input is converted back into
analog voltages by the A24 display drive-circuitry and sent to the A2 assembly. The display
signal is also sent to MONITOR OUTPUT on the rear panel.
A25 Graphics Processor Board
The A5 analog interface board provides address, data, and control bus buering for the
interconnection between the A24 processor board assembly and the A17 graphic signal
processor assembly.
A5 Analog Interface
The A5 analog interface assembly converts the digital commands from the A24 assembly to
analog control signals for the following assemblies shown on Figure 8-5:
DAC control of the A11/A13 bandwidth lter assemblies.
LC to crystal mode switching. BW5 controls switching between crystal and LC bandwidth
lter modes.
Bandwidth control. The A5 bandwidth control DACs supply two control lines to drive the
PIN diodes on the A11 and A13 assemblies. Companding DACs are used because their
nonlinear output compensates for the nonlinear resistance-versus-current of the PIN
diodes they control.
BW6 control line. Controls the crystal bandwidths from 30 kHz to 1 kHz. More DAC
current produces a narrower bandwidth in crystal mode.
BW7 control line. Controls the LC bandwidths from 5 MHz to 100 kHz. In LC mode,
more DAC current produces a wider bandwidth.
Bandwidth error is corrected by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine. Refer to
Chapter 11 for a description of CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A12 amplitude control assembly. When the reference level is changed, the A5 assembly
switches the calibration attenuators and the step gains on the A12 assembly to change the
displayed signal position.
8-10
Assembly Descriptions
Calibration attenuators. A TTL high on selected A5 control lines activates a combination
of attenuator steps. The 1, 2, 4, and 8 dB step attenuators are combined to provide
attenuation in 1 dB increments. Currently, the 16 dB attenuator is not used.
10 dB step gains. Temperature-compensated control voltages activate a combination of
the three A12 step-gain stages. Step gains are produced in 10 dB increments over a 50 dB
range. Step gain errors are corrected by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine. Refer to
Chapter 11 for a description of CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A14 log amplier assembly. The A5 assembly controls two functions on the A14 assembly:
Log/linear mode switching. A temperature-compensated control bias voltage switches the
seven A14 amplier stages to function as either linear ampliers or logging ampliers.
10 dB linear step gains. In linear mode, three temperature-compensated control lines bias
four of the seven linear ampliers to provide step gains in 10 dB increments over a 40 dB
range. Two ampliers are switched by one control line to provide the 20 dB step-gain
stage.
Linear step gain errors are corrected by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine. Refer to
Chapter 11 for a description of CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A3 preamplier section. The A5 analog interface board performs these functions on the A3
preamplier section:
Switch control. A5 controls the switching of switches A3A1, A3A3, A3A5, and A3A6.
These switches are controled via W70.
Preamplier control. A5 provides the control signals for the A3A2 switched preamplier
via W70.
Input attenuator control. A5 controls the attenuation of the A3A4 input attenuator. This
control is provided via W36.
A16 Power Supply Assembly
The A16 power supply assembly is a switching power supply that plugs into a connector on the
A15 motherboard. It is not repairable to the component level.
When the line switch is on, it produces the low-power-on (LPWRON) signal that activates the
power supply. The power supply then provides the following:
+12 V for the B1 fan.
The +5 V, +15 V, 015 V, and +12 V supply voltages.
A line-trigger signal (LINE TRIG) at the power-line frequency.
The high-power-on (HPWRUP) signal used to coordinate the start-up of the A24 processor
board assembly.
+65 V for the A2 display
A6 Narrow Bandwidth
The narrow bandwidth assembly provides four synchronously-tuned bandwidths of 10 Hz,
30 Hz, 100 Hz, and 300 Hz. In addition, it also has a 200 Hz CISPR bandwidth. There are no
adjustments necessary on this assembly. All adjustments and corrections are done automatically
during the self-cal routine.
When the narrow bandwidths are selected, the instrument re-routes the IF signal through
the narrow bandwidth assembly. The narrow bandwidth assembly has a built-in step gain,
Assembly Descriptions
8-11
log amplier, and detector which performs all the normal IF section duties. Therefore, the IF
specications must be tested rst in the wide bandwidth mode, then repeated for the narrow
bandwidth mode.
Refer to the \A6 Narrow Bandwidth Assembly" section of Figure 8-5. The narrow bandwidth
assembly is inserted into one of the four card-cage slots. The narrow bandwidth assembly
receives the 21.4 MHz AUX IF from the A15 motherboard. The AUX IF signal is available to all
the card-cage assemblies. The 21.4 MHz signal is downconverted to a 8.56 kHz IF. This low IF
frequency was chosen to facilitate the necessary Q for the bandwidth lters and to eliminate
the need for bulky crystal circuits.
The 8.56 kHz IF is buered, put through two poles of active ltering, then the signal goes
through 0 to 40 dB of step gain. After the step gain, there are two more active lter poles
before the signal is put through a detector. If the instrument is in log mode the signal is
amplied logarithmically. Otherwise, the signal is amplied with linear circuits. The detected
video signal is then routed back to the A15 motherboard as VIDEO IF. This signal then goes to
the A24 processor assembly and converted to digital.
Refer to the \A14 Log Amplier/Detector" section of the IF/Control block diagram. The video
signal takes a dierent path when Option 130 is installed and bandwidths greater than 300 Hz
(wide bandwidths) are selected. After the signal is detected on the A14 log amplier assembly,
the video is routed to A14J2, DAISY CHAIN VIDEO OUTPUT, then W130 sends the video
signal to the A6 narrow bandwidth assembly at A6J3. This video signal goes to the output
multiplexer located on the A6 narrow bandwidth assembly. In the wide bandwidths, this signal
is selected and is then routed to back to the A15 motherboard as VIDEO IF.
The A6 narrow bandwidth assembly also has a DAISY CHAIN VIDEO OUTPUT (A6J2).
However, this output is not currently in use.
A7 Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/Average Detector Board
The A7 demodulator/quasi-peak/average detector board provides both AM and FM
demodulation of the 21.4 MHz IF input. The A7 demodulator/quasi-peak/average detector
board also has CISPR specied quasi-peak and average detectors which detect the Video IF
input. The A7 demodulator/quasi-peak/average detector board contains an IF overload detector
and provisions for an external \click" detector.
A2 Color Display and A17 Graphic Signal Processor
The color display consists of two assemblies: the A17 graphic signal processor (GSP) and the A2
display. The gsp is an interface between the A24 processor board and the A2 display. The gsp
reads formatted data from the processor board and converts that data to video signals (digital
TTL horizontal and vertical synch signals) and RGB signals. It sends the video and RGB signals
to the A2 display and to the A26 rear panel. The gsp also passes the +65 V power supply to
the A2 display. The gsp itself uses the +5 V processor board power supply.
The A2 color display is a 7.5 inch scan CRT with associated drive circuitry. It receives its
power and input signals from the GSP as described above. Each time the instrument is turned
on, the color display automatically degausses itself to minimize color impurity.
A21 Disk Drive Controller Board
The Disk Drive Controller System (DDCS) consists of the A21 disk drive controller board, the
host analyzer system, and the A19 disk drive. The A21 disk drive controller board's major
blocks are: control logic, IO interface, SRAMS and pseudo addressing, oppy disk interface, and
microprocessor.
When the instrument powers up, the rmware used to run the DDCS is downloaded to the
SRAM on the A21 disk drive controller board. The HPWRUP line is a hardware generated hold
8-12
Assembly Descriptions
o for the A21 disk drive controller board's microprocessor. LRESET CNTRL is used by the
host processor to hold the A21 disk drive controller board's processor in reset until the program
has been written to the SRAMs and veried. The program is loaded to SRAM, then read by the
host as a test of the IO and RAM subsystems. If errors are detected the user is alerted to the
failure on the instrument display. Once the program has been loaded and read back, the A21
disk drive controller board's processor idles until a request is sent from the host processor.
The processor on the A21 disk drive controller board is used primarily to control data ow
between the Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) and the host processor. Data is transferred via the IOB
bus interface to the SRAMS then to the FDI controller chip.
The Control Logic circuitry contains the PAL which identies the A21 disk drive controller
board to the host processor upon power up.
A19 Disk Drive
The disk drive is compatible with 3.5 inch, double-sided, high density, 135 TPI oppy disks. It
complies with the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3B8 standard. This disk drive
requires a single 5 volt power supply. Its typical power consumption is 1.45 W in the \read"
mode.
Assembly Descriptions
8-13
8-14
Assembly Descriptions
Insert RF Block Diagram here.
Figure 8-2. HP 85422E/HP 85462A RF Section, Block Diagram
Assembly Descriptions
8-15
8-16
Assembly Descriptions
Insert LO Block Diagram here.
Figure 8-3. HP 85422E/HP 85462A LO Section, Block Diagram
Assembly Descriptions
8-17
8-18
Assembly Descriptions
Insert 3rd Converter Block Diagram here.
Figure 8-4. HP 85422E/HP 85462A Third Converter, Block Diagram
Assembly Descriptions
8-19
8-20
Assembly Descriptions
Insert IF/Control Section Block Diagram here.
Figure 8-5. HP 85422E/HP 85462A IF/Control Section, Block Diagram
Assembly Descriptions
8-21
8-22
Assembly Descriptions
Insert Wiring Diagram here.
Figure 8-6. HP 85422E/HP 85462A Wiring Diagram
Assembly Descriptions
8-23
9
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
The various assemblies and cables of the HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section are
illustrated in this chapter. Refer to Chapter 10 for part numbers, assembly descriptions, and
ordering information.
Figure 9-1. A1 Front Panel Assembly, Rear View
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
9-1
Figure 9-2. HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section, Top View
9-2
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Figure 9-3. HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section IF Section, Top View
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
9-3
Figure 9-4. HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section, Bottom View
9-4
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Figure 9-5.
HP 85422E/HP 85462A Receiver RF Section, Bottom View (with A23 Counter Lock
Assembly Removed)
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
9-5
Figure 9-6. A4 RF Section Assemblies, Front Right-Side View
9-6
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Figure 9-7. A4 RF Section Cable and Wire Connections, Front Right-Side View
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
9-7
Figure 9-8. A4 RF Section Assemblies, Rear Left-Side View
9-8
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
Figure 9-9. A4 RF Section Cable and Wire Connections, Rear Left-Side View
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
9-9
Figure 9-10. A3 Preamplier Section, Top View
9-10
Major Assembly and Cable Locations
10
Replaceable Parts
This chapter contains information for identifying and ordering replacement assemblies for the
HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section.
Major assembly and cable location information is given in Chapter 9.
The following tables and gures are also included in this chapter:
Table 10-1 lists reference designations, abbreviations, and value multipliers used in the parts
lists.
Table 10-2 lists standard value replacement capacitors.
Table 10-3 lists standard value replacement resistors, 0.125 W.
Table 10-4 lists standard value replacement resistors, 0.5 W.
Table 10-5 lists all major assemblies.
Table 10-6 lists the cable assemblies.
Replaceable Parts
10-1
Ordering Information
To order an assembly or part listed in this chapter, quote the Hewlett-Packard part number and
the check digit, and indicate the quantity required.
To order a part that is not listed, include the following information with the order:
Instrument model number.
Instrument serial number.
Description of where the part is located, what it looks like, and its function (if known).
Quantity needed.
Parts can be ordered by addressing the order to the nearest Hewlett-Packard oce. Customers
within the USA can also use either the direct mail-order system, or the direct phone-order
system described below. The direct phone-order system has a toll-free phone number available.
Direct Mail-Order System
Within the USA, Hewlett-Packard can supply parts through a direct mail-order system.
Advantages of using the system are as follows:
Direct ordering and shipment from Hewlett-Packard.
No maximum or minimum on any mail order. (There is a minimum order amount for parts
ordered through a local HP oce when the orders require billing and invoicing.)
Prepaid transportation. (There is a small handling charge for each order.)
No invoices.
To provide these advantages, a check or money order must accompany each order. Mail-order
forms and specic ordering information are available through your local HP oce.
Direct Phone-Order System
Within the USA, a phone order system is available for regular and hotline replacement parts
service. A toll-free phone number is available, and Mastercard and Visa are accepted.
Regular Orders
The toll-free phone number, (800) 227-8164, is available Monday through Friday, 6 am to 5 pm
(Pacic time). Regular orders have a four-day delivery time.
Hotline Orders
Hotline service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, for emergency parts ordering. The
toll-free phone number, (800) 227-8164, is available Monday through Friday, 6 am to 5 pm
(Pacic time). After-hours and on holidays, call (415) 968-2347.
To cover the cost of freight and special handing, there is an additional hotline charge on each
order (three line items maximum per order). Hotline orders are normally delivered the next
business day after they are ordered.
10-2
Replaceable Parts
A
AT
B
BT
C
CP
CR
DC
DL
DS
E
Table 10-1.
Reference Designations, Abbreviations and Multipliers (1 of 4)
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
F Fuse
RT Thermistor
Assembly
FL Filter
S Switch
Attenuator, Isolator,
Limiter, Termination
HY Circulator
T Transformer
J Electrical Connector TB Terminal Board
Fan, Motor
(Stationary Portion), TC Thermocouple
Battery
Jack
TP Test Point
Capacitor
K Relay
U Integrated Circuit,
Coupler
Diode, Diode
L Coil, Inductor
Microcircuit
M Meter
V Electron Tube
Thyristor, Step
MP Miscellaneous
VR Breakdown Diode
Recovery Diode,
(Zener),
Varactor
Mechanical Part
P Electrical Connector
Voltage Regulator
Directional Coupler
(Movable Portion), W Cable, Wire, Jumper
Delay Line
Plug
X Socket
Annunciator, Lamp,
Light Emitting
Q Silicon Controlled Y Crystal Unit
Diode (LED),
Rectier (SCR),
(Piezoelectric,
Signaling Device
Transistor,
Quartz)
(Visible)
Triode Thyristor
Z Tuned Cavity,
Tuned Circuit
Miscellaneous Electrical Part R Resistor
A
ABBREVIATIONS
BSC Basic
BTN Button
CNDCT Conducting,
Conductive,
Conductivity,
A
Across Flats, Acrylic,
C
Conductor
Air (Dry Method),
Ampere
CONT Contact,
Continuous,
Capacitance,
ADJ Adjust, Adjustment C
ANSI American National
Capacitor,
Control,
Standards Institute
Center Tapped,
Controller
(formerly
Cermet, Cold,
CONV Converter
USASI-ASA)
Compression
CPRSN Compression
ASSY Assembly
CCP Carbon Composition CUP-PT Cup Point
Plastic
CW
Clockwise,
AWG American Wire Gage
CD
Cadmium, Card,
Continuous Wave
B
Cord
CER Ceramic
BCD Binary Coded
CHAM Chamfer
Decimal
CHAR Character,
D
BD
Board, Bundle
Characteristic,
BE-CU Beryllium Copper
Charcoal
D
Deep, Depletion,
BNC Type of Connector CMOS Complementary
Depth, Diameter,
BRG Bearing, Boring
Metal Oxide
Direct Current
BRS Brass
Semiconductor
DA
Darlington
Replaceable Parts
10-3
DAP-GL
DBL
DCDR
DEG
D-HOLE
DIA
DIP
DIP-SLDR
D-MODE
DO
DP
DP3T
DPDT
DWL
E-R
EXT
F
FC
FDTHRU
FEM
FIL-HD
FL
FLAT-PT
FR
FREQ
10-4
Table 10-1.
Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (2 of 4)
ABBREVIATIONS
JFET Junction Field
FT
Current Gain
Diallyl Phthalate
Glass
Bandwidth Product
Eect Transistor
(Transition
Double
Frequency), Feet,
K
Decoder
Foot
Degree
FXD Fixed
K
Kelvin, Key,
D-Shaped Hole
Kilo, Potassium
Diameter
G
KNRLD Knurled
Dual In-Line Package
KVDC Kilovolts
Dip Solder
Depletion Mode
GEN General, Generator
Direct Current
GND Ground
Package Type
L
Designation
GP
General Purpose,
Group
Deep, Depth, DiaLED
metric Pitch, Dip
Light Emitting
H
Diode
Double Pole Three
Throw
LG
Length, Long
LIN
Linear, Linearity
Henry, High
Double Pole Double H
Throw
HDW Hardware
LK
Link, Lock
HEX Hexadecimal,
LKG
Dowell
Leakage, Locking
Hexagon,
LUM Luminous
E
Hexagonal
HLCL Helical
HP Hewlett-Packard
M
E-Ring
Company, High Pass
Extended, Extension,
External, Extinguish
M
Male, Maximum,
I
Mega, Mil, Milli,
F
Mode
IC
Collector Current, MA
Milliampere
Integrated Circuit MACH Machined
Fahrenheit, Farad,
Female, Film
ID
Identication,
MAX Maximum
(Resistor), Fixed,
Inside Diameter
MC
Molded Carbon
Composition
IF
Flange, Frequency
Forward Current,
Carbon Film/
Intermediate
MET Metal, Metallized
Composition, Edge
Frequency
MHZ Megahertz
of Cuto Frequency, IN
Inch
MINTR Miniature
Face
INCL Including
MIT
Miter
INT Integral, Intensity, MLD Mold, Molded
Feedthrough
Internal
MM
Magnetized Material,
Female
Fillister Head
Millimeter
Flash, Flat, Fluid
J
MOM Momentary
Flat Point
MTG Mounting
Front
J-FET Junction Field
MTLC Metallic
Frequency
Eect Transistor
MW
Milliwatt
Replaceable Parts
N
N-CHAN
NH
NM
NO
NOM
NPN
NS
NUM
NYL
OA
OD
OP AMP
OPT
PA
PAN-HD
PAR
PB
PC
PCB
P-CHAN
PD
PF
PKG
Table 10-1.
Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (3 of 4)
ABBREVIATIONS
N
PLSTC Plastic
SMA
Subminiature,
PNL Panel
A Type (Threaded
Nano, None
PNP Positive Negative
Connector)
Positive (Transistor) SMB
Subminiature,
N-Channel
B Type (Slip-on
POLYC Polycarbonate
Nanohenry
Nanometer,
POLYE Polyester
Connector)
SMC
Nonmetallic
POT Potentiometer
Subminiature,
C-Type (Threaded
POZI Pozidriv Recess
Normally Open,
Number
PREC Precision
Connector)
SPCG Spacing
PRP Purple, Purpose
Nominal
PSTN Piston
SPDT Single Pole
Negative Positive
Double Throw
Negative (Transistor) PT
Part, Point,
Pulse Time
SPST
Nanosecond,
Single Pole
Single Throw
Non-Shorting, Nose PW
Pulse Width
SQ
Numeric
Square
SST
Stainless Steel
Nylon (Polyamide)
Q
STL
Steel
O
SUBMIN Subminiature
SZ
Q
Size
Figure of Merit
Over-All
R
Outside Diameter
Operational
T
Amplier
R
Range, Red,
Resistance, Resistor,
Optical, Option,
Optional
Right, Ring
T
Teeth,
REF Reference
Temperature,
Thickness, Time,
P
RES Resistance, Resistor
RF
Timed, Tooth,
Radio Frequency
Typical
Picoampere, Power RGD Rigid
Amplier
RND Round
TA
Ambient
RR
Rear
Temperature,
Pan Head
RVT Rivet, Riveted
Tantalum
Parallel, Parity
Lead (Metal),
TC
Temperature
Pushbutton
S
Coecient
Printed Circuit
THD
Thread, Threaded
THK
Thick
Printed Circuit
SAWR Surface Acoustic
Board
Wave Resonator
TO
Package Type
P-Channel
SEG Segment
Designation
SGL Single
TPG
Tapping
Pad, Power
Dissipation
SI
Silicon,
TR-HD Truss Head
Picofarad, Power
Square Inch
TRMR Trimmer
Factor
SL
Slide, Slow
TRN
Turn, Turns
Package
SLT
Slot, Slotted
TRSN Torsion
Replaceable Parts
10-5
Table 10-1.
Reference Designations, Abbreviations, and Multipliers (4 of 4)
ABBREVIATIONS
Y
U
VAR Variable
VDC Volts|Direct Current
UCD
YIG Yttrium-IronMicrocandela
UF
Garnet
Microfarad
UH
W
Microhenry
UL
Microliter,
Z
Underwriters'
W
Watt, Wattage,
White, Wide, Width
Laboratories, Inc.
UNHDND Unhardened
W/SW With Switch
ZNR Zener
WW Wire Wound
V
X
V
Variable, Violet,
X
Volt, Voltage
By (Used with
Dimensions),
VAC
Vacuum, Volts|
Alternating Current
Reactance
Abbreviation
T
G
M
k
da
d
c
10-6
Replaceable Parts
Prex
tera
giga
mega
kilo
deka
deci
centi
MULTIPLIERS
Multiple Abbreviation
m
1012
109
n
106
p
103
f
10
a
1001
1002
Prex
milli
micro
nano
pico
femto
atto
Multiple
1003
1006
1009
10012
10015
10018
Standard-Value Replacement Components
Table 10-2. Standard Value Replacement Capacitors
Capacitors
Type: Tubular
Range: 1 to 24 pF
Tolerance: 1 to 9.1 pF = 60.25 pF
10 to 24 pF = 65%
Value (pF) HP Part Number CD
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.3
3.6
3.9
4.3
4.7
5.1
5.6
6.2
6.8
7.5
8.2
9.1
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
15.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
0160-2236
0160-2237
0150-0091
0160-2239
0160-2240
0160-2241
0160-2242
0160-2243
0160-2244
0150-0059
0160-2246
0160-2247
0160-2248
0160-2249
0160-2250
0160-2251
0160-2252
0160-2253
0160-2254
0160-2255
0160-2256
0160-2257
0160-2258
0160-2259
0160-2260
0160-2261
0160-2262
0160-2263
0160-2264
0160-2265
0160-2266
8
9
8
1
4
5
6
7
8
8
0
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
Type: Dipped Mica
Range: 27 to 470 pF
Tolerance: 65%
Value (pF) HP Part Number CD
27
30
33
36
39
43
47
51
56
62
68
75
82
91
100
110
120
130
150
160
180
200
220
240
270
300
330
360
390
430
470
0160-2306
0160-2199
0160-2150
0160-2308
0140-0190
0160-2200
0160-2307
0160-2201
0140-0191
0140-0205
0140-0192
0160-2202
0140-0193
0160-2203
0160-2204
0140-0194
0160-2205
0140-0195
0140-0196
0160-2206
0140-0197
0140-0198
0160-0134
0140-0199
0140-0210
0160-2207
0160-2208
0160-2209
0140-0200
0160-0939
0160-3533
3
2
5
5
7
6
4
7
8
5
9
8
0
9
0
1
1
2
3
2
4
5
1
6
2
3
4
5
0
4
0
Replaceable Parts
10-7
Table 10-3. Standard Value Replacement Resistors, 0.125 W
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10
to 464 K
Wattage: 0.125 at 125 C
Tolerance: 61.0%
Value (
) HP Part Number CD Value (
) HP Part Number CD
10.0
11.0
12.1
13.3
14.7
16.2
17.8
19.6
21.5
23.7
26.1
28.7
31.6
34.8
38.3
42.2
46.4
51.1
56.2
61.9
68.1
75.0
82.5
90.9
100
110
121
133
147
162
178
196
215
237
261
287
316
348
383
10-8
Replaceable Parts
0757-0346
0757-0378
0757-0379
0698-3427
0698-3428
0757-0382
0757-0294
0698-3429
0698-3430
0698-3431
0698-3432
0698-3433
0757-0180
0698-3434
0698-3435
0757-0316
0698-4037
0757-0394
0757-0395
0757-0276
0757-0397
0757-0398
0757-0399
0757-0400
0757-0401
0757-0402
0757-0403
0698-3437
0698-3438
0757-0405
0698-3439
0698-3440
0698-3441
0698-3442
0698-3132
0698-3443
0698-3444
0698-3445
0698-3446
2
0
1
0
1
6
9
2
5
6
7
8
2
9
0
6
0
0
1
7
3
4
5
9
0
1
2
2
3
4
4
7
8
9
4
0
1
2
3
422
464
511
562
619
681
750
825
909
1.0K
1.1K
1.21K
1.33K
1.47K
1.62K
1.78K
1.96K
2.15K
2.37K
2.61K
2.87K
3.16K
3.48K
3.83K
4.22K
4.64K
5.11K
5.62K
6.19K
6.81K
7.50K
8.25K
9.09K
10.0K
11.0K
12.1K
13.3K
14.7K
16.2K
0698-3447
0698-0082
0757-0416
0757-0417
0757-0418
0757-0419
0757-0420
0757-0421
0757-0422
0757-0280
0757-0424
0757-0274
0757-0317
0757-1094
0757-0428
0757-0278
0698-0083
0698-0084
0698-3150
0698-0085
0698-3151
0757-0279
0698-3152
0698-3153
0698-3154
0698-3155
0757-0438
0757-0200
0757-0290
0757-0439
0757-0440
0757-0441
0757-0288
0757-0442
0757-0443
0757-0444
0757-0289
0698-3156
0757-0447
4
7
7
8
9
0
3
4
5
3
7
5
7
9
1
9
8
9
6
0
7
0
8
9
0
1
3
7
5
4
7
8
1
9
0
1
2
2
4
Table 10-3. Standard Value Replacement Resistors, 0.125 W (continued)
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10
to 464 K
Wattage: 0.125 at 125 C
Tolerance: 61.0%
Value (
) HP Part Number CD Value (
) HP Part Number CD
17.8K
19.6K
21.5K
23.7K
26.1K
28.7K
31.6K
34.8K
38.3K
42.2K
46.4K
51.1K
56.2K
61.9K
68.1K
75.0K
82.5K
90.9K
0698-3136
0698-3157
0757-0199
0698-3158
0698-3159
0698-3449
0698-3160
0757-0123
0698-3161
0698-3450
0698-3162
0757-0458
0757-0459
0757-0460
0757-0461
0757-0462
0757-0463
0757-0464
8
3
3
4
5
6
8
3
9
9
0
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
100K
110K
121K
133K
147K
162K
178K
196K
215K
237K
261K
287K
316K
348K
383K
422K
464K
0757-0465
0757-0466
0757-0467
0698-3451
0698-3452
0757-0470
0698-3243
0698-3453
0698-3454
0698-3266
0698-3455
0698-3456
0698-3457
0698-3458
0698-3459
0698-3460
0698-3260
6
7
8
0
1
3
8
2
3
5
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
Replaceable Parts
10-9
Table 10-4. Standard Value Replacement Resistors, 0.5 W
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10
to 1.47 M
Wattage: 0.5 at 125 C
Tolerance: 61.0%
Value (
) HP Part Number CD Value (
) HP Part Number CD
10.0
11.0
12.1
13.3
14.7
16.2
17.8
19.6
21.5
23.7
26.1
28.7
31.6
34.8
38.3
42.2
46.4
51.1
56.2
61.9
68.1
75.0
82.5
90.0
100
110
121
133
147
162
178
196
215
237
261
287
316
348
10-10
Replaceable Parts
0757-0984
0575-0985
0757-0986
0757-0001
0698-3388
0757-0989
0698-3389
0698-3390
0698-3391
0698-3392
0757-0003
0698-3393
0698-3394
0698-3395
0698-3396
0698-3397
0698-3398
0757-1000
0757-1001
0757-1002
0757-0794
0757-0795
0757-0796
0757-0797
0757-0198
0757-0798
0757-0799
0698-3399
0698-3400
0757-0802
0698-3334
0757-1060
0698-3401
0698-3102
0757-1090
0757-1092
0698-3402
0698-3403
4
5
6
6
2
9
3
6
7
8
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
5
9
5
8
9
0
8
5
7
1
2
383
422
464
511
562
619
681
750
825
909
1.00K
1.10K
1.21K
1.33K
1.47K
1.62K
1.78K
1.96K
2.15K
2.37K
2.61K
2.87K
3.16K
3.48K
3.83K
4.22K
4.64K
5.11K
5.62K
6.19K
6.81K
7.50K
8.25K
9.09K
10.0K
12.1K
13.3K
14.7K
0698-3404
0698-3405
0698-0090
0757-0814
0757-0815
0757-0158
0757-0816
0757-0817
0757-0818
0757-0819
0757-0159
0757-0820
0757-0821
0698-3406
0757-1078
0757-0873
0698-0089
0698-3407
0698-3408
0698-3409
0698-0024
0698-3101
0698-3410
0698-3411
0698-3412
0698-3346
0698-3348
0757-0833
0757-0834
0757-0196
0757-0835
0757-0836
0757-0837
0757-0838
0757-0839
0757-0841
0698-3413
0698-3414
3
4
7
9
0
4
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
5
9
0
4
6
7
8
7
7
1
2
3
2
4
2
3
0
4
5
6
7
8
2
4
5
Table 10-4. Standard Value Replacement Resistors, 0.5 W (continued)
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10
to 1.47 M
Wattage: 0.5 at 125 C
Tolerance: 61.0%
Value (
) HP Part Number CD Value (
) HP Part Number CD
16.2K
17.8K
19.6K
21.5K
23.7K
26.1K
28.7K
31.6K
34.8K
38.3K
42.2K
46.4K
51.1K
56.2K
61.9K
68.1K
75.0K
82.5K
90.9K
100K
110K
121K
133K
147K
0757-0844
0698-0025
0698-3415
0698-3416
0698-3417
0698-3418
0698-3103
0698-3419
0698-3420
0698-3421
0698-3422
0698-3423
0757-0853
0757-0854
0757-0309
0757-0855
0757-0856
0757-0857
0757-0858
0757-0367
0757-0859
0757-0860
0757-0310
0698-3175
5
8
6
7
8
9
9
0
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
0
1
7
2
5
0
5
162K
178K
196K
215K
237K
261K
287K
316K
348K
383K
422K
464K
511K
562K
619K
681K
750K
825K
909K
1M
1.1M
1.21M
1.33M
1.47M
0757-0130
0757-0129
0757-0063
0757-0127
0698-3424
0757-0064
0757-0154
0698-3425
0757-0195
0757-0133
0757-0134
0698-3426
0757-0135
0757-0868
0757-0136
0757-0869
0757-0137
0757-0870
0757-0138
0757-0059
0757-0139
0757-0871
0757-0194
0698-3464
2
9
0
7
7
1
0
8
9
5
6
9
7
3
8
4
9
7
0
4
1
8
8
5
Replaceable Parts
10-11
Assembly-Level Replaceable Parts and Cables
Table 10-5. Assembly-Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
Description
HP
Part
Number
A1
Front Frame Assembly
85462-60008
A1A1
Keyboard
85462-60048
A1A2
Rotary Pulse Generator (RPG)
A2
Monitor
1990-1525
85462-60029
Rebuilt CRT
10-12
5180-8484
A3A1
Switch
33314-60014
A3A2
Switched Preamplier
5086-7902
Exchange Switched Preamplier (Rebuilt)
5086-6902
A3A3
Switch
33314-60014
A3A4
Input Attenuator
33321-60036
A3A5
Switch
33314-60014
A3A6
Switch
33314-60014
A3AT1
3 dB Attenuator
0955-0114
A4A1
Low Pass Filter (LPF), 2.9 GHz
0955-0420
A4A2
Band Pass Filter (BPF), 321.4 MHz
9135-0252
A4A3
Second Converter
5086-7858
A4A4
Switched YIG-Tuned Filter (SYTF) (For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A
A4A5
Output Attenuator
0955-0679
A4A6
Dual Band Mixer
5086-7977
A4A7
Local Oscillator Distribution Amplier (LODA)
5086-7744
A4A8
Low Pass Filter (LPF), 4.4 GHz
0955-0519
A4A9
Electronic YIG Oscillator (EYO)
5086-7903
A4A10
Tracking Generator
5086-7917
A5
Analog Interface Board (HP 8546A/HP 85462A only)
85462-60015
Analog Interface Board (HP 8542E/HP 85422E only)
85422-60001
A6
Narrow Bandwidth Board
08590-60352
A7
Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/Average Detector Board
85462-60042
A8
Tracking Generator Control Board
A9
Third Converter Board
08593-60062
A11
Bandwidth Board
85462-60034
A12
Amplitude Control Board
85462-60037
A13
Bandwidth Board
85462-60034
Replaceable Parts
only.
)
5086-7803
5063-0635
Table 10-5. Assembly-Level Replaceable Parts (continued)
Reference
Designator
Description
HP
Part
Number
A14
Log Amplier Board
08590-60386
A15
Motherboard
85462-60014
A16
Power Supply Assembly
85462-60010
A17
Graphic Signal Processor Assembly
08753-60170
A18
Speaker
8120-6336
A19
Disk Drive
0950-2075
A20
10 MHz Reference
1813-0644
A21
Disk Drive Controller Board
85462-60046
A22
HP-IB
08590-60345
A22
RS-232 Board (For Option 023 only)
08590-60346
A23
Counter Lock Assembly
08591-60098
A23AT2
10 dB Attenuator
A24
Processor Board Assembly
85462-60032
A25
Graphics Processor Board
85462-60005
A26
Rear Frame Assembly
85462-60009
B1
Fan
3160-0828
BT1
Battery (located on the A24 Processor Board - not shown in Chapter 9)
1420-0331
FL1
Line Filter (located on the A26 Rear Panel - not shown in Chapter 9)
0950-2341
5086-7806
Replaceable Parts
10-13
Table 10-6. Replaceable Cables
Reference
Designator
10-14
Description
HP
Part
Number
W1
A1 Front Panel Assembly to A24 Processor Board Assembly, LINE SWITCH
8120-6168
W2
A25 Graphics Processor Board to A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly,
Ribbon Cable
8120-6130
W4
A24 Processor Board Assembly to A1A1 Keyboard, Ribbon Cable
W5
A1A1 Keyboard to A1 Front Panel Assembly, PROBE POWER
5062-4826
W6
A1A1 Keyboard to A1A2 Rotary Pulse Generator
0960-0745
W7
A9 Third Converter Board to A3A1 Switch, 300 MHZ CAL OUT
8120-5106
W8
A9 Third Converter Board to A4A3 Second Converter, 600 MHZ
8120-5020
W9
A4A2 321.4 MHz Band-Pass Filter to A9 Third Converter Board, 321.4 MHZ
8120-5106
W11
A3A6 Switch to A4A4 Switched YIG-Tuned Filter (SYTF), Semi-Rigid Cable 85462-20012
W12
A5 Analog Interface Board to A4A9 Electronic YIG Oscillator (EYO),
Ribbon Cable, EYO CONTROL
8120-6135
W13
A5 Analog Interface Board to A4A4 Switched YIG-Tuned Filter (SYTF) and
A4A6 Dual Band Mixer, SYTF/DUAL BAND MIXER CONTROL
5063-0206
W14
A24 Processor Board Assembly to A21 Disk Drive Controller Board and
A23 Counter Lock Assembly, RIBBON CABLE
8120-6134
W15
A23 Counter Lock Assembly to A20 10 MHz Precision Reference, OCXO
POWER
5063-0205
W17
A20 10 MHz Precision Reference to A26 Rear Panel, 10MHZ REF OUTPUT
8120-5057
W18
A23 Counter Lock Assembly to A26 Rear Panel, EXT REF IN
8120-5055
W19
A15 Motherboard to A23 Counter Lock Assembly
W20
A4A7 Local Oscillator Distribution Amplier (LODA) to A23 Counter Lock
Assembly
8120-5148
W21
A9 Third Converter Board to A23 Counter Lock Assembly, COUNTER
LOCK OUTPUT
8120-5023
W22
A4A6 Dual Band Mixer to A4A3 Second Converter, Semi-Rigid Cable, HIGH
BAND
8120-5067
W23
A4A3 Second Converter to A4A2 321.4 MHz Band-Pass Filter, Semi-Rigid
Cable, 321.4 MHZ
8120-5058
W26
A4A4 Switched YIG-Tuned Filter (SYTF) to A4A1 2.9 GHz Low-Pass Filter,
Semi-Rigid Cable, SYTF LOW BAND
W27
A4A1 2.9 GHz Low-Pass Filter to A4A6 Dual Band Mixer, Semi-Rigid Cable 08593-20010
W28
A4A4 Switched YIG-Tuned Filter (SYTF) to A4A6 Dual Band Mixer,
Adapter, 3-6 GHZ
W29
A4A6 Dual Band Mixer to A4A8 4.4 GHz Low-Pass Filter, Semi-Rigid Cable 08593-20011
W30
A4A8 4.4 GHz Low-Pass Filter to A4A3 Second Converter, Semi-Rigid
Cable, LOW BAND
W31
A4A9 Electronic YIG Oscillator (EYO) to A4A7 Local Oscillator Distribution 08593-20004
Amplier (LODA), Semi-Rigid Cable
Replaceable Parts
08592-60037
08591-60012
08595-20003
1250-1788
08593-20012
Table 10-6. Replaceable Cables (continued)
Reference
Designator
Description
HP
Part
Number
W33
A4A6 Dual Band Mixer to A4A7 Local Oscillator Distribution Amplier
(LODA), Semi-Rigid Cable
08593-20003
W34
A5 Analog Interface Board to A4A4 Switched YIG-Tuned Filter (SYTF),
SYTF POWER
08590-60018
W35
A5 Analog Interface Board to A4A3 Second Converter, Ribbon Cable, 2ND
CONVERTER CONTROL
5062-6434
W36
A5 Analog Interface Board to A3A4 Input Attenuator, Ribbon Cable,
INPUT ATTENUATOR CONTROL CABLE
8120-6127
W38
A8 Tracking Generator Control Board to A4A7 Local Oscillator Distribution 08593-60009
Amplier (LODA), Ribbon Cable, LODA CONTROL
W40
A9 Third Converter Board to A4A10 Tracking Generator, 600 MHZ TG
W41
A4A7 Local Oscillator Distribution Amplier (LODA) to A4A10 Tracking
Generator, Semi-Rigid Cable, LO IN
W42
A4A10 Tracking Generator to A26 Rear Panel, LO OUTPUT
W43
A4A5 Output Attenuator to Bulkhead Connector, Semi-Rigid Cable, TG
OUT
W47
A1 Front Panel Assembly to A4A10 Tracking Generator, ALC IN
W49
A4A10 Tracking Generator to A4A5 Output Attenuator, Semi-Rigid Cable,
TG OUT
W50
A8 Tracking Generator Control Board to A4A10 Tracking Generator,
Ribbon Cable, TG CONTROL
W51
A1 Front Panel Assembly to Bulkhead Connector, Semi-Rigid Cable, RF
INPUT
85462-20006
W52
Bulkhead Connector to A1 Front Panel Assembly, 300 MHZ OUTPUT
08592-60024
W53
Bulkhead Connector to A3A3 Switch, Semi-Rigid Cable, RF INPUT
85462-20020
W54
A3A1 Switch to A3A3 Switch
8120-5067
W55
A3A1 Switch to Bulkhead Connector, CAL OUT
8120-5066
W56
A3A3 Switch to A3A4 Input Attenuator, Semi-Rigid Cable
85462-20009
W57
A3A4 Input Attenuator to A3A5 Switch, Semi-Rigid Cable, INPUT
ATTENUATOR OUTPUT
85462-20009
W58
A3A5 Switch to A3A2 Switched Preamplier, Semi-Rigid Cable
85462-20007
W59
A3A5 Switch to A3A6 Switch, Semi-Rigid Cable
85462-20008
W60
A3A2 Switched Preamplier to A3A6 Switch, Semi-Rigid Cable,
PREAMPLIFIER OUTPUT
85462-20022
W70
A5 Analog Interface Board to A3A1 Switch, A3A2 Switched Preamplier,
A3A3 Switch, A3A5 Switch, and A3A6 Switch, SWITCH CONTROL
8120-6128
W71
A19 Disk Drive to A21 Disk Drive Controller Board, DISK DRIVE POWER
8120-6130
8120-5023
08593-20002
5062-7710
85462-20021
8120-6138
08593-20008
8120-6131
Replaceable Parts
10-15
Table 10-6. Replaceable Cables (continued)
Reference
Designator
10-16
Description
HP
Part
Number
W72
A19 Disk Drive to A21 Disk Drive Controller Board, RIBBON CABLE, DISK
DRIVE CONTROL
8120-6129
W73
A16 Power Supply Assembly to A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly
8120-6133
W74
A16 Power Supply Assembly to A15 Motherboard, Ribbon Cable
8120-6132
W75
A15 Motherboard to A26 Rear Panel, AUX VIDEO
8120-5053
W76
A15 Motherboard to A26 Rear Panel, AUX IF
8120-5053
W77
A24 Processor Board Assembly to A26 Rear Panel, EXT TRIGGER
8120-5055
W78
A15 Motherboard to A26 Rear Panel, HIGH SWEEP
8120-6169
W79
A15 Motherboard to A26 Rear Panel, SWEEP RAMP
8120-6169
W80
A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly to A26 Rear Panel, EXT VIDEO B
8120-5053
W81
A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly to A26 Rear Panel, EXT VIDEO
G/SYNC
8120-5053
W82
A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly to A26 Rear Panel, EXT VIDEO R
8120-5053
W83
Bulkhead Connector to A1 Front Panel Assembly, Semi-Rigid Cable, TG
OUT
W84
A17 Graphic Signal Processor Assembly to A2 Display, Ribbon Cable,
DISPLAY CONTROL
8120-6385
W85
A7 Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/Average Detector Board to A1 Front Panel
Assembly, EARPHONE
8120-6140
W86
A7 Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/Average Detector Board to A18 Speaker
Assembly, SPEAKER
8120-6336
W87
B1 Fan to A15 Motherboard
3160-0828
W88
A8 Tracking Generator Control Board to A4A5 Output Attenuator,
ATTENUATOR CONTROL
8120-8141
W89
A16 Power Supply Assembly to A5 Analog Interface Board, +12V
8120-6139
W90
FL1 Line Filter to A16 Power Supply Assembly
8120-6138
W91
A6 Narrow Bandwidth Board to A15 Motherboard
8120-5030
W93
A24 Processor Board Assembly to A26 Rear Panel, GATE TRIGGER IN
8120-5055
W94
A24 Processor Board Assembly to A26 Rear Panel, GATE OUT
8120-5055
W95
FL1 Line Filter to FL1 Line Filter
0950-2341
W96
A12 Amplitude Control Board to A7 Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/Average
Detector Board, OVERLOAD DETECTOR
8120-6447
W102
A7 Demodulator/Quasi-Peak/Average Detector Board to A1 Front Panel
Assembly, VOLUME
8120-6137
W130
A6 Narrow Bandwidth Board to A14 Log Amplier Board
8120-5020
Replaceable Parts
85462-20014
11
Service Softkey Descriptions
Refer to this chapter for an explanation of the instrument passcodes, the two types of
instrument correction data, and the service-related softkeys that are available after pressing
CALIBRATE .
The calibration, service, and diagnostic softkey functions are listed alphabetically. A list of
service-related softkeys follows each softkey description, when appropriate. Refer to the
description of each related softkey to understand how the softkey functions interrelate.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Calibration, Service, and Diagnostic Softkey Functions
The front-panel 4CALIBRATE5 key provides the softkey menus for the self-calibration routines,
the service-calibration and service-diagnostic routines. Refer to Figure 11-1 for the organization
of the softkeys related to 4CALIBRATE5.
CAUTION
4CALIBRATE5
Correction-constant data can be lost if the Service Cal softkeys are used
improperly. Refer to the appropriate softkey description for instructions on
softkey usage.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Softkey Organization
Figure 11-1 provides the organization of all softkeys available after pressing 4CALIBRATE5. Each
block of softkeys represents the softkeys that are displayed at one time. The diagram ow
indicates the actual key sequence used for each softkey. The footnotes identify softkeys that
appear only when a passcode has been entered or a specic instrument option is installed in
the instrument.
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-1
Figure 11-1. Calibration, Service, and Diagnostic Softkey Tree
11-2
Service Softkey Descriptions
Understanding Instrument Passcodes
Passcodes activate specic softkey functions and protect the correction data from accidental
erasure or modication. The two passcodes, 037 Hz and 02001 Hz, are explained below.
037 Hz passcode
Use the 037 Hz passcode to perform the following functions:
Replace the current calibration-factors with the default calibration data provided by
DEFAULT CAL DATA .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Bypass the CAL OUT set-up check within individual self-calibration routines.
02001 Hz passcode
Use the 02001 Hz service passcode to perform the following functions:
Set the start frequency, stop frequency, and step size of the atness correction points using
INIT FLT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Edit the atness-correction constants using EDIT FLATNESS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Edit the A12 amplitude control step-attenuator correction constants using SET ATTN ERROR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Set the correction factor for the 10 MHz frequency reference (standard timebase).
Modify the displayed power units that appear when the instrument is rst turned on using
STOR PWR ON UNITS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Bypass the CAL OUT signal check within individual self-calibration routines.
Entering A Passcode
The passcode must be entered before pressing 4CALIBRATE5. Press the following keys to enter a
passcode.
4FREQUENCY5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CENTER FREQ
037 4HZ5 or 02001 4HZ5
CALIBRATE5
When SV appears in the lower-left corner of the display, the passcode has been accepted.
4
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-3
Understanding Correction Data
The rmware uses correction data to improve instrument performance by minimizing the eect
of variations in hardware. There are two categories of correction data:
Self-calibration correction factors.
Service-calibration correction constants.
Most correction data can be displayed and modied with the softkey functions provided by
4CALIBRATE5.
Self-Calibration Correction Factors
Self-calibration correction factors enhance instrument accuracy by adjusting DACs on the A5
analog interface assembly and by adding osets to trace information. The correction factor
data is stored in nonvolatile memory on the A24 processor assembly after pressing CAL STORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The correction-factor data is produced by the CAL AMP and CAL FREQ self-calibration routines.
Refer to the softkey descriptions in this section for further information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service-Calibration Correction Constants
The service-calibration correction constants enhance instrument performance by compensating
for frequency-response variation and A12 amplitude control step-attenuation errors. The
correction constants are unique for each instrument.
The correction constants for atness can be viewed, or modied, using FLATNESS DATA . Refer
to any of the atness calibration procedures in Chapter 2 for instructions on generating new
correction constants.
The correction constants for step-attenuation errors on the A12 amplitude control assembly can
be modied using SET ATTN ERROR . Refer to the cal attenuator adjustment error procedure in
Chapter 2 for instructions on generating new correction constants.
Instruments equipped with an A4A10 Tracking Generator use two correction constants to
improve the performance of the external automatic level control (ALC).
The initial service-calibration correction constants are stored by the factory in nonvolatile
memory on the A24 assembly. After shipment, new correction constants must be manually
generated whenever an adjustment or repair aects atness or A12 amplitude control step
attenuation.
Refer to \After a Repair" in Chapter 3 for the specic assemblies that aect atness. Whenever
the A24 processor assembly is replaced, new correction constants must also be generated,
unless valid correction constants were saved prior to the instrument failure.
Note that the manual generation of the new service-calibration correction constants is a
lengthy procedure. Avoid having to generate new correction constants manually by periodically
recording the current correction constants.
Refer to the softkey descriptions in this section for specic information about the use and
modication of the correction-constant data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-4
Service Softkey Descriptions
Lock ON OFF Phase Lock On/O
Description
Disables locking of the rst LO to allow faster response of the keypad and
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
the sweep when the instrument has a poor frequency calibration.
Before a normal sweep, the instrument uses the frequency calibration to
set the rst LO close to the desired value. It then counts the frequency of
the rst LO and adjusts it until the correct frequency is achieved within
the count resolution. Next it closes the discriminator if the span is less
than 10 MHz, then begins the sweep.
Note that if the frequency calibration is poor, this procedure of locking
the LO requires a long time, often many seconds or even minutes. During
this time the instrument does not respond quickly to the keypad. This
key disables locking until a frequency calibration can be successfully
completed.
When the instrument determines that the frequency calibration is poor, it
automatically disables the rst LO lock and the message VLock OFF will
appear on screen.
+10 V REF DETECTOR +10 V Reference Detector
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the output of the +10 V reference from the A5 analog interface
assembly as a horizontal line along the top graticule.
Refer to Chapter 3 for additional troubleshooting information.
Related Softkeys 010
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
V REF DETECTOR
010 V REF DETECTOR 010 V Reference Detector
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the 010 V reference from the A5 analog interface
assembly as horizontal line at the bottom graticule.
Refer to Chapter 3 for additional troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
+10 V REF DETECTOR
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-5
2v REF DETECTOR 2 V Reference Detector
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the 2 V reference produced on the A24 processor
assembly as a horizontal line at the top graticule. If the line is at the top
graticule, the main ADC is adjusted correctly.
This routine uses the 2 V reference at the input MUX on the A24
assembly. Refer to Figure 8-5, IF/Control Overall Block Diagram, for the
location of the input MUX.
Note that during the preset routine, the analog-ground and 2 V reference
are used to calibrate the main ADC. The analog ground and 2 V reference
at the input MUX are used during calibration. If either signal is out of
range, the ADC-GND FAIL or ADC-2V FAIL error message is displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
CAL 85422 Calibrate HP 85422
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E only.
Description
Related Softkeys
The CAL 85422 softkey performs a calibration only on the HP 85422E
receiver RF section when congured as an HP 8542E EMI receiver.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85462
CAL 85462 Calibrate HP 85462
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
11-6
The CAL 85462 softkey performs a calibration only on the HP 85462A
receiver RF section when congured as an HP 8546A EMI receiver.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85422
Service Softkey Descriptions
CAL ALL Calibrate All
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E/HP 8546A only.
Description
CAL ALL initiates frequency and amplitude correction routines. The
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
calibration procedures take approximately 20 minutes to complete. When
the calibration is successfully completed, the internal adjustment data is
stored in volatile RAM and the following message is displayed:
CAL ALL : done
INPUT 1 : Passed
INPUT 2 : Passed
Press CAL STORE to save
If the calibration procedure encounters a detectable error that prevents
part of the receiver from meeting all of the specications at all
frequencies, the calibration will be completed and a message will be
displayed identifying the input that failed. If the receiver encounters an
error that will not allow the calibration to be completed, messages such as
the following will be displayed:
CAL INPUT 1 : Data Not valid
CAL INPUT 1 required
INPUT CAL FAILED:
300 MHz out of range
INPUT CAL FAILED:
TG INT ALC out of range
INPUT CAL FAILED:
TG EXT ALC out of range
Related Softkeys
These messages tell you which sections of the receiver have encountered
problems during the calibration procedure.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LAST CAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85422
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85462
CAL AMP Calibrate Amplitude
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 85422E/HP 85462A only.
Description
Note that if both CAL FREQ and CAL AMP self-calibration routines are
required, perform the CAL FREQ routine rst.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The CAL AMP softkey initiates an amplitude self-calibration routine.
During the CAL AMP self-calibration routine, messages are sequentially
displayed, indicating a specic calibration activity. Each calibration
performed by CAL AMP is described below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-7
While CAL: AMP is displayed, the following calibrations are performed:
The amplitude error of each IF bandwidth is corrected using the 3
kHz IF bandwidth is the amplitude reference. Each amplitude error is
then stored as a calibration factor.
The center frequency error of each bandwidth is corrected.
The top-screen reference level is calibrated using the amplitude of
the CAL OUT signal as a reference.
1. The amplitude of the detected 21.4 MHz IF signal is measured on
the A24 processor assembly.
2. The Reference-Level-Calibration DAC on the A5 analog interface
assembly adjusts the gain of the IF calibration amplier on the A9
third converter assembly to correct the amplitude measured on the
A24 assembly.
3. After the A5 DAC adjusts the A9 output, ne amplitude
corrections are made with a digital oset of the video signal on
the A24 assembly.
4. The A5 DAC value and video oset are stored as correction factors
on the A24 assembly.
While CAL: 3dB BW is displayed, the following calibrations are
performed:
The 3 dB and 6 dB EMI IF bandwidths are measured.
DACs on the A5 analog interface assembly adjust the bandwidth
of the LC and crystal lters on the A11 and A13 bandwidth lter
assemblies.
The DAC bandwidth correction factors are stored on the A24
processor assembly.
While CAL: ATTEN is displayed, the following calibrations are
performed:
The amplitude error of the 10 dB step gains on the A12 amplitude
control assembly and the 10 dB linear gains on the A14 log
amplier/detector assembly are corrected.
The 10 dB step gain on the A12 assembly is the amplitude
reference.
Step-gain and linear-gain errors are corrected with digital osets of
the video signal on the A24 assembly.
The video osets are stored as correction factors.
Amplitude errors for the A3A4 input attenuator are corrected.
The 10 dB step attenuator is the amplitude reference.
Input attenuator errors are corrected with digital osets of the
video signal on the A24 assembly.
The attenuator osets are stored as correction factors.
11-8
Service Softkey Descriptions
While CAL: LOG AMP is displayed, the following calibrations are
performed:
The log delity is measured in 1 dB steps.
Errors are corrected with digital osets of the video signal on the
A24 assembly.
The video osets are stored as correction factors.
If a failure occurs during this calibration routine, an error message is
displayed. Refer to Chapter 12 for the description of displayed error
messages.
Be sure to press CAL STORE after running the CAL AMP routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FETCH Calibration Fetch
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
CAUTION
CAL FETCH retrieves the self-calibration correction factors from the area
of memory that retains data when the instrument is turned o and places
it in working (volatile) RAM memory.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Pressing CAL FETCH clears the correction-data-error ag and can permit
erroneous data to be stored. Use CAL FETCH only for troubleshooting.
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FREQ
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
CAL FREQ Calibrate Frequency
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 85422E/HP 85462A only.
Description
CAL FREQ initiates the frequency self-calibration routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note that it is normal for the FREQ UNCAL error message to appear briey
during CAL FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
During the CAL FREQ self-calibration routine, messages are sequentially
displayed, indicating a specic calibration activity. Each function
performed by CAL FREQ is described below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-9
Before the calibration routine starts, an instrument setup check is
performed.
The CAL OUT signal must be within 300 MHz 650 MHz and greater than
or equal to 045 dBm to pass the setup check. If the CAL OUT signal is
not present, the routine stops.
If the DEFAULT CAL DATA correction factors are in use, a frequency
oset may occur that prevents the CAL OUT signal from being found.
If desired, the instrument setup check can be bypassed. Enter the
037 Hz passcode before pressing 4CALIBRATE5 and CAL FREQ .
Refer to the CAL SIGNAL NOT FOUND error message description in
Chapter 12 for more information.
While CAL: SWEEP is displayed:
The sweep ramp is calibrated.
The values are stored as correction factors.
While CAL: FREQ is displayed:
Harmonics of the CAL OUT signal are used to adjust the start and
stop end-points for the A4A9 YTO.
The end-point values are stored as correction factors.
While CAL: SPAN is displayed:
The main-coil sweep sensitivity and span attenuator are adjusted for
LO spans greater than 10 MHz.
The adjustment routine checks for three displayed signals: 0 Hz,
300 MHz, and 600 MHz. The test passes if all three signals are found
within a 750 MHz span.
FM DAC Error Check:
The instrument changes the center frequency setting to move the
displayed signal four divisions.
If the signal moves within 61.25 divisions of the expected display
position, the FM coil drive is within tolerance.
While CAL: FM GAIN + OFFSET is displayed:
The FM oset DAC is adjusted to position the signal at center-screen.
This calibrates the center screen-position so that it represents an
unmodulated signal.
The top to bottom screen deviation of a demodulated FM signal,
referenced to center screen, is calibrated for a specic frequency
deviation.
A demodulated signal with a 100 kHz frequency deviation is
simulated using the CAL OUT signal and a center frequency step of
100 kHz.
The center frequency is stepped up and the FM gain is adjusted to
position the signal at top screen.
The center frequency is stepped down and the FM gain is adjusted
to position the signal at bottom-screen.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-10
Service Softkey Descriptions
If a failure occurs during this calibration routine, an error message
is displayed. Refer to Chapter 12 for descriptions of displayed error
messages.
Be sure to press CAL STORE after running the CAL FREQ routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FETCH
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY CAL DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM GAIN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM OFFSET
4CALIBRATE5
Description
Calibration Key
Related Softkeys
CALIBRATE5 provides access to the softkeys for the self-calibration,
service-diagnostics, and service-calibration functions. A passcode is
required for access to specic softkeys.
Refer to Figure 11-1 at the beginning of this chapter for the softkeys that
are available after pressing 4CALIBRATE5.
4
CAL INPUT 1 Calibrate Input 1
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E/HP 8546A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
CAL INPUT 1 calibrates the conducted measurement band of the
instrument, 9 kHz to 50 MHz, for amplitude atness through each lter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LAST CAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85422
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85462
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-11
CAL INPUT 2 Calibrate Input 2
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E/HP 8546A only.
Description
CAL INPUT 2 calibrates the radiated measurement band of the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
instrument, 20 MHz to 2.9 GHz, for amplitude atness through each lter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LAST CAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85422
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL 85462
CAL MXR Calibrate Mixer
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
CAUTION
Do not use this softkey. Use the CAL MXR adjustment routine in Chapter 2 to
perform this calibration.
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
The high-band mixer in the A4A6 Dual-Band Mixer receives a mixer-bias
current from a DAC on the A5 analog interface assembly. The mixer-bias
current must be adjusted for each frequency band to minimize conversion
loss in the A4A6 dual-band mixer.
Be sure to use the YTF CAL cable when performing the CAL MXR routine.
Refer to Chapter 2.
The CAL MXR routine adjusts the bias-current DAC setting for the
optimum displayed-signal amplitude, using the CAL OUT signal. The
routine adjusts the bias current at several frequencies in each band;
an optimum bias setting for that band is then determined. During the
routine, TRACE A displays the frequency spectrum, while TRACE B
displays the signal amplitude versus mixer-bias DAC setting.
The 02001 passcode must be entered to activate the CAL MXR calibration
routine. Enter the passcode before pressing the 4CALIBRATE5 key.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note that the CAL YTF routine must be performed before running
the CAL MXR routine. New atness correction constants must also be
generated whenever the CAL MXR routine is used. Refer to Chapter 2 for
instructions on the use of the CAL YTF and CAL MXR routines.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-12
Service Softkey Descriptions
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Once the CAL MXR routine is nished, the optimum bias-current value for
each frequency band is displayed. The displayed values are the mixer bias
DAC setting multiplied by 16. The DAC values are automatically stored
as correction constants in nonvolatile memory on the A24 processor
assembly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL YTF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EDIT FLATNESS
CAL STORE Calibration Store
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
CAUTION
CAL STORE copies the correction factors from working RAM to the area
of memory on the A24 processor assembly that retains data after the
instrument is turned o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the correction factors are not stored, they will be lost when the instrument is
turned o.
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FREQ
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FETCH
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL TIMEBASE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL TRK GEN
CAL TIMEBASE Calibrate Timebase
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
This softkey has been reserved for a future enhancement.
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-13
CAL TRK GEN Calibrate Tracking Generator
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
CAL TRK GEN initiates the tracking generator self-calibration routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Be sure to perform the CAL ALL self-calibration routines before using
CAL TRK GEN .
For HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section:
Connect the Receiver RF section's TRACKING GENERATOR OUTPUT to
its RF INPUT.
For HP 8542E/HP 8546A EMI receiver:
Connect the RF lter section's TG OUT to its INPUT 2.
When the CAL TRK GEN routine is complete, press CAL STORE to store
the tracking generator correction factors in nonvolatile memory. The
correction factors cannot be viewed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAUTION
If the correction factors are not stored, they will be lost when the instrument is
turned o.
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FREQ
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
CAL YTF Calibrate YTF
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
Note that the user should perform the CAL YTF routine if there has been
a large change in ambient temperature. Since YTF tracking varies with
temperature, the CAL YTF routine is required to meet the unpeaked
atness specication.
In band 1, amplitude accuracy is a function of how well the A4A4 SYTF
bandpass lter tracks the tuned frequency of the instrument. YTF tuning
is controlled by DACs located on the A5 analog interface assembly.
CAL YTF minimizes amplitude uncertainty due to YTF tracking by
determining the optimum YTF DAC settings for each band.
Refer to Chapter 2 to perform the CAL YTF routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The CAL YTF routine, using the CAL OUT signal, tunes the instrument
to two frequencies in band 1. The routine minimizes tracking error by
adjusting the YTF coarse-tune and ne-tune DAC settings for an optimum
displayed-signal amplitude in each band. TRACE A displays the typical
frequency spectrum and TRACE B displays the amplitude versus YTF DAC
setting.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-14
Service Softkey Descriptions
The routine then sets the instrument to sweep over the frequency
range of each band. The YTF Span DAC is adjusted for the maximum
swept-amplitude response in each band. During this part of the routine,
TRACE A displays the frequency spectrum, and TRACE B displays the
amplitude versus YTF span DAC setting.
Be sure to press CAL STORE after running the CAL YTF routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL MXR
COARSE TUNE DAC Coarse Tune DAC
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the analog output of the YTO coarse-tune DAC located on the
A5 analog interface assembly. The mnemonic for the control voltage is
C TUNE.
When COARSE TUNE DAC is selected, a horizontal line is displayed in
the lower four divisions of the screen. The line represents the 0 V to
010 V DAC output voltage. When the YTO DAC voltage becomes more
negative, the YTO frequency is increased, and the displayed line moves
lower on screen.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FINE TUNE DAC
CORRECT ON OFF Correction On/O
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
The instrument corrects for variations in hardware performance in two
ways:
Digital osets of the video signal on the A24 processor assembly.
Adjustment of the DAC control voltages provided by the A5 analog
interface assembly.
The CORRECT ON OFF function aects only the digital osets of the video
signal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-15
The uncorrected performance of individual assemblies can be checked by
disabling the correction data. The following corrections are disabled when
CORRECT OFF is selected:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Step-gain-error correction factors. New correction factors are produced
by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
Bandwidth-amplitude correction factors. New correction factors are
produced by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
Log-scale-delity correction factors. New correction factors are
produced by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
Input-attenuator correction factors. New correction factors are
produced by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
Bandwidth-centering correction factors. New correction factors are
produced by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
Flatness-correction constants. The original constants are placed in the
instrument memory at the factory. New constants must be generated
using the automated atness calibration procedures in Chapter 2.
A12 amplitude control step-attenuator-correction constants. The
original constants are placed in the instrument memory at the factory.
New constants must be generated manually using the cal attenuator
error correction procedure in Chapter 2.
The CORRECT ON OFF function does not aect the following DAC
adjustments:
IF bandwidth corrections.
Reference level amplitude correction.
YTO frequency and span corrections.
10 MHz reference (standard timebase) DAC correction.
Refer to the CAL AMP description in this chapter when the displayed
signal exhibits symptoms of either low or high gain.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FREQ
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEFAULT CAL DATA
DACS DACs
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
11-16
Use DACS to change the DAC numbers of the span, YTO coarse-tune, YTO
ne-tune, and YTO FM tune DACs located on the A5 analog interface
assembly. The following terminator keys are used to select the desired
DAC.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Softkey Descriptions
YTO Adjustment DAC Terminator
Selection
Key
Span DAC
4GHz5
YTO coarse-tune DAC
4MHz5
YTO ne-tune DAC
4kHz5
YTO FM tune DAC
4Hz5
Press the following keys to select a YTO adjustment DAC:
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 6
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DACS
Related Softkeys
Press the terminator key for the desired DAC.
Each DAC may be set to any integer between 0 and 4095 using the A1A2
RPG knob on the front panel. Use the 4*5 and 4+5 keys to make large
changes in the DAC settings:
The 4*5 key increments the DAC setting in an even binary progression of
0, 2, 4, 8, 16, . . . , 4096.
The 4+5 key decrements the DAC setting in an odd binary progression of
4095, 2047, 1023, 511, . . . , 1.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
COARSE TUNE DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FINE TUNE DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
X FINE TUNE DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM SPAN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MAIN SPAN
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-17
DEFAULT CAL DATA Default Calibration Data
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
The current correction-factor data is replaced in nonvolatile memory by
the factory-loaded default calibration data when DEFAULT CAL DATA is
used. The default data can be used only if a passcode, either 037 Hz or
02001 Hz, has been entered.
There are two types of correction factors that are changed when the
default data is used:
Video osets are used on the A24 processor assembly.
DAC settings are used on the A5 analog interface assembly.
After entering the passcode and pressing DEFAULT CAL DATA , the default
data can be viewed using DISPLAY CAL DATA .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Refer to the DISPLAY CAL DATA illustrations (Figure 11-2 through
Figure 11-5) for the format that the default calibration data is displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY CAL DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FREQ
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL TIMEBASE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CORRECT ON OFF
11-18
Service Softkey Descriptions
DISPLAY CAL DATA Display Calibration Data
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the current correction-factor data generated by the CAL FREQ
and CAL AMP self-calibration routines. Refer to Figure 11-2 through
Figure 11-3 for an example of typical calibration data displayed when
using DISPLAY CAL DATA . Press 4PRESET5 to exit the data display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
d
a
c
b
d
c
Figure 11-2. Typical Calibration Data: Page 1
Figure 11-3. Typical Calibration Data: Page 2
a
b
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-19
d
a
c
b
Figure 11-4. Typical Calibration Data: Page 3
d
a
c
b
Figure 11-5. Typical Calibration Data: Page 4
The following text describes each column of correction data illustrated
in Figure 11-2 through Figure 11-5. The sections of Figure 11-2 through
Figure 11-5 that contain numbers retain data that is the same for all
instruments; the data is stored in memory at the factory and cannot be
changed.
TUNING
These miscellaneous frequency correction values correct
for variations in instrument hardware performance.
BW-AMP
The bandwidth amplitude corrections are mathematical
osets of the digitized video signal on the A24 processor
assembly. Refer to the CAL AMP softkey description for
more information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-20
Service Softkey Descriptions
LC-XTAL
The A5 analog interface assembly uses these DAC values
to adjust the bandwidths of the 21.4 MHz crystal and
LC bandwidth lters on the A11 and A13 Bandwidth
Filter assemblies. The CAL AMP self-calibration routine
produces DAC values that adjust each bandwidth to
within specications.
The 9 kHz and 120 kHz entries are for the 6 dB EMI
IF bandwidths. All other entries are for the 3 dB IF
bandwidths.
Refer to the CAL AMP softkey description for more
information.
The input attenuator corrections are mathematical
osets of the digitized video signal on the A24 processor
assembly.
The 10 dB attenuator step is the amplitude reference
used by the CAL AMP self-calibration routine while
calibrating the input attenuator. Refer to the CAL AMP
softkey description for more information about the
calibration of the input attenuators.
Refer to Chapter 5 to identify the attenuators that are in
use for a given input attenuation setting.
The step-gain and linear-gain corrections are
mathematical osets of the digitized video signal on
the A24 processor assembly. The rst six entries in
the \SGAIN" column are for the 10 dB step gains on
the A12 amplitude control assembly. The CAL AMP
self-calibration routine uses the 10 dB step gain as an
amplitude reference while calibrating the step gains.
The last four entries in the \SGAIN" column are for the
10 dB linear gains on the A14 log amplier assembly.
Refer to the CAL AMP softkey description for more
information about the calibration of the step-gain and
linear-gain stages. Refer to Chapter 4 to identify the gain
stages that are in use for a given reference-level setting.
The reference-level-vernier error corrections are DAC
values that calibrate the reference level at top-screen
during the CAL AMP self-calibration routine.
The rst ve entries are xed constants. The second ve
entries provide a coarse gain-adjustment of the A9 third
converter assembly. Only one DAC value is produced
by the calibration routine and is duplicated for all ve
entries. The A5 analog interface assembly uses the DAC
value to adjust the gain of the A9 assembly. The DAC
adjustment range is from 0 to 255. The higher the DAC
value, the greater the gain on the A9 assembly. Refer to
the CAL AMP softkey description for more information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RFATN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SGAIN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GAIN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-21
ERR
The ERR column, next to GAIN, is the video oset \ne
tuning" of the reference level calibration.
CAL ATT ERR These error corrections are mathematical osets of the
digitized video signal on the A24 processor assembly.
The rst ve entries in the \ERR" column are correction
constants that correct amplitude errors for the calibration
attenuators on the A12 amplitude control assembly.
Currently, the entry for the 16 dB attenuator is not used.
The calibration attenuators on the A12 amplitude control
assembly are the amplitude reference for the CAL AMP
self-calibration routine. The ve constants are stored
in nonvolatile memory initially at the factory. When
required, new constants are produced using the Cal
Attenuator Error adjustment procedures in Chapter 2.
Refer to the SET ATTN softkey description for more
information about the calibration attenuators on the A12
assembly.
The second ve entries in the \ERR" column are one
correction factor that provides a ne adjustment of the
reference-level during the CAL AMP self-calibration
routine. The calibration routine produces one video oset
and stores it for all ve entries.
The video oset is used to make a ne reference-level
adjustment after a coarse reference-level adjustment is
done using the DAC correction values from \RL-VENR".
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FREQ
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEFAULT CAL DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL STORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FETCH
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SET ATTN ERROR
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL TIMEBASE
Display Sys Data Display System Data
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
The Display Sys Data softkey accesses a menu to display system
calibration data for input 1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INPUT 1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INPUT 1 PREAMP
11-22
Service Softkey Descriptions
DROOP Droop
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
Droop disables the reset of the peak detector on the A24 processor
assembly after each analog-to digital conversion. When an impulse signal
is applied, the decrease, or droop, in the peak-detector output is visible.
The peak detector will charge up to the peak value of the input signal and
then its amplitude will decrease over time.
Refer to Chapter 3 for additional troubleshooting information about the
peak detector.
none
EDIT FLATNESS Edit Flatness
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
The atness-correction constants can be viewed or modied using
EDIT FLATNESS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To view the atness-correction constants, do not enter the passcode
before proceeding to EDIT FLATNESS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To edit the atness data, enter the 02001 Hz passcode, press 4CALIBRATE5
and proceed to EDIT FLATNESS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. After pressing EDIT FLATNESS , the STORE FLATNESS softkey
appears, and the atness data is ready for editing. *Use the A1A2
RPG knob, the 4*5 key, or the 4+5 key to move along the frequency
range of the instrument.
2. Enter the amplitude oset for the desired frequency point and
terminate the entry with 40dBm5 or 4+dBm5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAUTION
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Avoid pressing the INIT FLT softkey when pressing the STORE FLATNESS
softkey. All the atness-correction constants will be lost if INIT FLT is
pressed accidentally.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Store the atness constants by pressing STORE FLATNESS ; the
new correction constants are stored and an instrument preset is
performed.
Exit the routine at any time by pressing EXIT : no changes are made to
the existing correction constants and an instrument preset is performed.
Refer to any of the atness calibration procedures in Chapter 2 for
complete instructions related to the atness-correction constants.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INIT FLT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STORE FLATNESS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FLATNESS DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EXIT
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-23
EDIT PA FLTNESS Edit Preamplier Flatness
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
The EDIT PA FLTNESS softkey allows the service center or factory to
view the preamplier on atness data of the instrument.
Note that the service password must be entered to execute this command.
none
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EXECUTE TITLE Execute Title
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Use EXECUTE TITLE to execute remote programming commands that
have been entered from the front-panel using CHANGE TITLE . Refer to
the user's guide for more information about CHANGE TITLE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CHANGE TITLE
EXIT Exit
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
Use EXIT to withdraw from a softkey function. No changes are made
within the function and an instrument preset is performed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EDIT FLATNESS
FINE TUNE DAC Fine Tune DAC
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the output of the YTO ne-tune DAC produced on the A5 analog
interface assembly.
When FINE TUNE DAC is selected, a horizontal line is displayed in
the lower four divisions of the screen. The line represents the 0 V to
010 V DAC output voltage. When the YTO DAC voltage becomes more
negative, the YTO frequency is increased, and the displayed line moves
lower on-screen.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
11-24
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
COARSE TUNE DAC
Service Softkey Descriptions
FLATNESS DATA Flatness Data
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
CAUTION
Provides access to the softkeys used for viewing or editing the atness
correction constants. The 02001 Hz passcode is required when editing the
correction data.
Avoid pressing the INIT FLT softkey when pressing the STORE FLATNESS
softkey. All the atness-correction constants will be lost if INIT FLT is
pressed accidentally.
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EDIT FLATNESS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STORE FLATNESS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INIT FLT
FM COIL DRIVE FM Coil Drive
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the output of the FM Coil Driver produced on the A5 analog
interface assembly. Perform the following steps to observe the output
of the FM coil driver For the FM spans (LO spans less than or equal to
10 MHz):
1. Activate 4SPAN5 before pressing 4CALIBRATE5 to select the
FM COIL DRIVE function.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press FM COIL DRIVE to display a positive-going ramp.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
3. Adjust the span setting while observing the displayed ramp. The slope
of the ramp increases as the span is increased.
Due to quantization errors, the display appears at for LO spans less than
500 kHz. For the main-coil spans (LO spans greater than 10 MHz) the
display is a at line.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM SPAN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FINE TUNE DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
X FINE TUNE DAC
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-25
FM GAIN FM Gain
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
This softkey duplicates the functions of the FM GAIN key that is accessed
using either 4CALIBRATE5 or 4SELECT5. FM GAIN adjusts the top-to-bottom
screen deviation range of a demodulated FM signal, referenced to
center-screen. The CAL FREQ self-calibration routine calibrates the FM
screen deviation and modulation oset.
Use FM GAIN to do a functional check of the demodulation circuitry. The
CAL OUT signal can be used in place of a FM modulated signal source.
1. Connect the CAL OUT signal to the instrument input and make the
following instrument settings:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
FREQUENCY5
300 MHz
CF STEP AUTO MAN (MAN)
500 kHz
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SPAN5
4BW5
4AMPLITUDE5
2. Press the following keys:
4SELECT5
4
0 Hz
5 4MHz5
020 dBm
DEMOD ON OFF (ON)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEMOD AM FM (FM)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM GAIN
When FM GAIN is rst enabled, it has a 100 kHz deviation from
center-screen.
3. Set the maximum deviation from center screen by entering 500 kHz
using the data keys, the A1A2 RPG knob, or the 4*5 and 4+5 keys.
4. Simulate a 500 kHz modulated signal by pressing the following keys:
4FREQUENCY5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
*
4 5
If FM GAIN is functioning correctly, the displayed signal is deected
from center screen to bottom screen as the center frequency is stepped
up 500 kHz from the original center frequency setting.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-26
Service Softkey Descriptions
Related Softkeys
5. Press the 4+5 key twice. The displayed signal moves from
bottom-screen to top-screen as the center frequency is stepped down
500 kHz from the original center frequency.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEMOD
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEMOD AM FM
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM OFFSET
FM OFFSET FM Oset
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Use FM OFFSET to adjust the horizontal trace for center-screen with no
modulation on the carrier. This function is useful for adjusting the carrier
oset when FM GAIN is set for a modulated signal with a small frequency
deviation. The CAL FREQ self-calibration routine calibrates an initial
center-screen oset.
Use FM OFFSET to do a functional check of the demodulation circuitry.
The CAL OUT signal can be used in place of an unmodulated carrier
signal.
1. Connect the CAL OUT signal to the instrument input and make the
following instrument settings:
4PRESET5
4MODE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SIGNAL ANALYSIS
FREQUENCY5
4SPAN5
4BW5
4AMPLITUDE5
4
300 MHz
0 Hz
5 4MHz5
020 dBm
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-27
2. Press the following keys:
4SELECT5
DEMOD ON OFF (ON)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEMOD AM FM (FM)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE5
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Diag
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM OFFSET
Related Softkeys
3. Adjust the position of the horizontal trace to center-screen using the
A1A2 RPG knob.
4. To calculate the actual frequency oset in kHz, multiply the displayed
value by 300.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEMOD
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEMOD AM FM
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM GAIN
11-28
Service Softkey Descriptions
FM SPAN FM Span
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the FM SPAN signal from the Span Dividers on the A5 analog
interface assembly.
Perform the following steps to observe the FM SPAN signal for FM spans
(LO spans less than or equal to 10 MHz):
1. Activate 4SPAN5 before pressing 4CALIBRATE5 to select the FM SPAN
function.
2. Press FM SPAN to display a negative-going ramp.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
3. Adjust the span setting while observing the displayed ramp. The slope
of the ramp increases as the span is increased.
Due to quantization errors, the display appears at for LO spans less that
500 kHz.
For the main-coil spans (LO spans greater than 10 MHz) the display is a
at line.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MAIN SPAN
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-29
FREQ DIAG Frequency Diagnostics
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays, in real-time, frequency diagnostic information for the LO
section. Refer to Figure 11-6 for the location of each block of frequency
data.
Figure 11-6. LO Frequency Diagnostic Data Display
11-30
Service Softkey Descriptions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17a
17b
17c
17d
18
19
Related Softkeys
Calculated coarse-tune DAC (0-4095)
Sampler harmonic number
Calculated sampler IF in Hz
Wide-band discriminator sensitivity factor
Actual frequency error in Hz on last count
Actual measured sampler IF in Hz
Actual coarse tune DAC number (0-4095)
Main coil sensitivity in number of bits per Hz
Actual ne tune DAC number (0-4095)
Spans >10 MHz, changes from sweep to sweep
Spans 10 MHz, relatively stable from sweep to sweep
Actual extra-ne tune DAC number (0-4095)
Current sweep segment
Current sweep band
Extra-ne tune DAC iterations to get to correct frequency (not
present for spans 10 MHz)
Fine-tune DAC iterations to get to correct frequency
Counter timebase
Coarse-tune DAC iterations to get to correct frequency
Initial LO count
Initial IF count
Final LO count
Narrow bandwidth IF count
Discriminator sensitivity factor
Sampling oscillator frequency in Hz
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY CAL DATA
FRQ DISC NORM OFF Frequency Discriminator Normal/O
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Indicates the status of the frequency discriminator as a function of LO
span.
In LO spans less than or equal to 10 MHz, NORM should be underlined,
indicating the discriminator is in use.
In LO spans greater than 10 MHz, OFF should be underlined, indicating
the discriminator is not in use.
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-31
GND REF DETECTOR Ground-Reference Detector
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the output of the analog-ground reference produced on the
A24 processor assembly. A horizontal line at the bottom graticule line
indicates that the ADC is adjusted correctly. The ground reference is
produced on the A24 processor assembly.
The CAL AMP self-calibration routine uses the analog-ground reference to
calibrate the bottom-screen level of the main ADC on the A24 processor
assembly.
Note that during 4PRESET5 the analog-ground and +2 V signal are used
to calibrate the main ADC. The analog ground and 2 V reference at the
input MUX are used during calibration. If the signals are out of range, the
ADC-GND FAIL or ADC-2V FAIL error messages are displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
IDNUM Identication Number
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
All other instruments are identied through hardware during instrument
initialization.
Selects the identity of the instrument. By selecting the appropriate
identication number (IDNUM), the rmware congures the instrument to
the proper frequency range and instrument functions.
none
IF GAINS Intermediate Frequency Gain Settings
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
11-32
The IF GAINS softkey displays the gain setting of the following: RF
Atten, 3rd Conv DAC, 21.4 Gain, Cal Atten, Lin Gain, and NBW Sgain.
none
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Softkey Descriptions
INIT FLT Initialize Flatness
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Prepares the instrument memory for the entry of new atness correction
constants. The 02001 Hz passcode is required and must be entered before
pressing 4CALIBRATE5.
INIT FLT performs the following functions:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Sets up the start frequency, stop frequency, and step size of the
frequency-response-correction points.
Initializes A24 memory by entering a default value of 0 dB into memory
for all frequency points.
CAUTION
The current atness-correction constants are lost when INIT FLT is pressed.
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EDIT FLATNESS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STORE FLATNESS
INPUT 1 Input 1
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E/HP 8546A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
INPUT 1 displays the system calibration data for input 1. This is a
service calibration function and is for service use only.
Display Sys Data None
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INPUT 1 PREAMP Input 1 Preamplier
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E/HP 8546A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
INPUT 1 PREAMP displays the system calibration data for input 1, with
the preamplier on. This is a service calibration function and is for
service use only.
None
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INPUT 2 Input 2
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E/HP 8546A only.
Description
This softkey has been reserved for a future enhancement.
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-33
INPUT 2 PREAMP Input 2 Preamplier
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8542E/HP 8546A only.
Description
This softkey has been reserved for a future enhancement.
MAIN COIL DR Main-Coil Drive
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the output of the main-coil driver produced on the A5 analog
interface assembly. Perform the following steps to observe the output of
the main-coil driver:
1. Activate either 4SPAN5 or CENTER FREQ , as needed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
11-34
2. Press 4CALIBRATE5 to select the MAIN COIL DR function.
3. Change either the span or center-frequency setting and observe the
displayed signal.
When the span setting is increased (For LO spans greater than
10 MHz), the positive slope of the displayed ramp increases.
Due to quantization errors, the display appears at for LO spans less
than 500 MHz.
When the center frequency setting is increased within a band, the
vertical position of the ramp moves up the screen. The vertical
position of the ramp is a function of the YTO tune frequency.
The combination of the ramp slope and vertical position represents a
voltage that is proportional to the current in the A4A9 YTO main coil.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM COIL DRIVE
Service Softkey Descriptions
MAIN SPAN Main Span
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Displays the main-coil-span signal, MC SPAN, from the span dividers on
the A5 analog interface assembly.
Perform the following steps to observe MC SPAN for the main-coil spans
(LO spans greater than 10 MHz):
1. Press 4SPAN5 before pressing 4CALIBRATE5.
2. Press MAIN SPAN to display a negative-going ramp.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
3. Adjust the span setting while observing the displayed ramp. The slope
of the ramp increases as the span increases.
Due to quantization errors, the display appears at for LO spans less than
100 MHz.
For FM coil spans (LO spans less than or equal to 10 MHz), the display is a
at line.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FM SPAN
MIXER BIAS DAC Mixer-Bias DAC
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the mixer-bias DAC from the rst-converter driver
on the A5 analog interface assembly. This DAC provides a bias current for
the high-band mixer in the A4A6 dual-band mixer. The instrument must
be in a single-band sweep for the display to be valid.
The top four display divisions represent the DAC range of 0 V to +10 V. A
horizontal line, representing the DAC output voltage, is displayed within
the top four divisions. The DAC voltage should not change within a
frequency band.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL MXR
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-35
PRESEL DAC Preselector DAC
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
Peaks the YTF preselector by manually adjusting the YTF ne-tune DAC.
The front-panel entry range for the DAC is from 1 to 3840.
The instrument rmware adds the entered value to an 8-bit value (0 to
255), yielding a result between 1 and 4095. This result then drives the
12-bit YTF ne-tune DAC.
Be sure to use either 4PRESET5 or PRESEL DEFAULT to set the
PRESEL DAC to an initial value of 2048.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL YTF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRESEL DEFAULT
QP DET ON OFF Quasi-Peak Detector On/O
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
QP DET ON OFF turns the quasi-peak detector on or o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP GAIN ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP RST ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QPD OFFSET
QP GAIN ON OFF Quasi-Peak GAIN On/O
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
QP GAIN ON OFF amplies the video signal ten times (20 dB).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note that the reference level oset is not changed. The marker readout
and reference level readout must be divided by 10 to obtain the correct
amplitude readout.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP DET ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP RST ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QPD OFFSET
11-36
Service Softkey Descriptions
QPD OFFSET Quasi-Peak Detector Oset
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Sets the oset of the quasi-peak detector.
For accurate quasi-peak measurements, QPD OFFSET should be set to
a value of 29. The quasi-peak detector oset is set to a value of 29 by
pressing 4PRESET5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP DET ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP GAIN ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QPD RST ON OFF
QPD RST ON OFF Quasi-Peak Detector Reset On/O
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
QPD RST ON OFF discharges and resets the quasi-peak detector.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP DET ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QP GAIN ON OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
QPD OFFSET
Service Cal Service Calibration
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Provides access to the service-softkey functions.
Related Softkeys Refer to Figure 11-1.
Service Diag Service Diagnostics
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
Provides access to the service-diagnostic softkey functions. For selected
service softkeys, an abbreviation for the active service function appears
in the detector display block. The display block is located in the upper
left-hand corner of the display.
Refer to Figure 11-1.
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-37
SET ATTN ERROR Set Attenuator Error
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Note that to avoid losing correction-constant data, make a backup copy of
all correction data before servicing the instrument.
Refer to DISPLAY CAL DATA and EDIT FLATNESS for the location of the
correction data.
The step attenuators on the A12 amplitude control assembly are the
relative amplitude reference for the CAL AMP routine. Four of the
ve step attenuators (the 1 dB, 2 dB, 4 dB, and 8 dB steps) are used.
Currently, the 16 dB attenuator step is not used.
If the factory-loaded attenuator-correction constants are no longer valid,
new attenuator-correction constants must be developed for the following
circumstances:
A new A12 amplitude control assembly is installed.
A new A24 processor assembly is installed.
The battery-backed nonvolatile memory contains errors caused by any
one of the following:
A dead BT1 battery.
Correction data accidentally altered by the user after he has entered
the passcode and gained access to the Service Cal softkeys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Defective hardware on the A24 assembly.
Use the Cal Attenuator Error adjustment procedure in Chapter 2 to
characterize the four attenuator steps and produce new attenuator
correction constants.
Enter the new correction constants into A24 RAM with the following
procedure:
1. Press the following keys:
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5 02001 4Hz5
4CALIBRATE5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Cal
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SET ATTN ERROR
2. The data-entry instruction for the 1 dB step, ENTER CAL ATTEN ERROR 1,
is displayed in the active-function block, just below the active entry
for the reference-level-oset value, REF LVL OFFSET.
3. Enter the characterization data for the 1 dB, 2 dB, 4 dB, and 8 dB
steps, with a 0.01 dB resolution for each entry.
11-38
Service Softkey Descriptions
4. Terminate each entry with either the 4+dBm5 or 40dBm5 key.
5. Enter the original factory value, or a default value of 0 dBm, for the
16 dB step.
After each entry the characterized value is displayed, with
0.1 dB resolution, to the left of the graticule, followed by the
oset-reference-level indicator, OFFSET.
If desired, use DISPLAY CAL DATA to review the new
attenuator-characterization data with 0.01 dB resolution. Refer to
DISPLAY CAL DATA for an explanation of the displayed calibration data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL AMP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISPLAY CAL DATA
STORE FLATNESS Store Flatness
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Note that the STORE FLATNESS softkey is accessible only after
entering the 02001 Hz passcode prior to pressing the 4CALIBRATE5 and
EDIT FLATNESS softkeys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
After entering new atness-correction constants, use STORE FLATNESS to
store them in nonvolatile memory.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAUTION
Avoid pressing the INIT FLT softkey when pressing the STORE FLATNESS
softkey. All the atness-correction constants will be lost if INIT FLT is
pressed accidentally.
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EDIT FLATNESS
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-39
STOR PWR ON UNITS Store Power-On Units
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Allows the user to change the amplitude display units that appear
at instrument power-on or when 4PRESET5 is pressed. The following
amplitude display units can be selected: dBm, dBmV, dBV, Volts, and
Watts. For example, pressing the following keys sets the instrument
power-on units to read out in dBmV in log mode, volts in linear mode, and
input impedance to 50 or 75 ohms.
4PRESET5
4FREQUENCY5 02001 4Hz5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AMPLITUDE5 More 1 of 3 INPUT Z 50
75
4
AMPLITUDE5 SCALE LOG LIN (LOG) More 1 of 3 Amptd Units dBmV
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AMPLITUDE5 SCALE LOG LIN (LIN) More 1 of 3 Amptd Units Volts
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3 Service Cal
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STOR PWR ON UNITS
Note that selecting INPUT Z 50
75
(50) ensures that the instrument
will make amplitude calculations based on a 50
system. Changing
INPUT Z 50
75
does not aect the input impedance of the
instrument.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STP GAIN ZERO Step-Gain Zero
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Disables the two 20-dB step-gain ampliers on the A12 amplitude control
assembly. While disabled, the A12 assembly provides the same gain for all
reference-level settings of 010 dBm and below.
The two ampliers are disabled as part of the A14 log amplier
adjustment procedure in Chapter 2. Use 4PRESET5 to reset the step-gain
ampliers.
SWEEP RAMP Sweep Ramp
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
11-40
Displays the RAMP signal from the sweep-ramp generator on the A5 analog
interface assembly. The RAMP signal has a range of 010 V to +10 V. A
positive-going ramp extending from the lower-left corner of the screen to
the upper-right corner represents a normal RAMP signal.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
Service Softkey Descriptions
SWEEP TIME DAC Sweep-Time DAC
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the sweep-time DAC, SWP_DAC, from the
sweep-ramp generator on the A5 analog interface assembly. The top
graticule represents +10 V and the bottom represents 010 V.
The sweep times are grouped into three ranges:
20 milliseconds to less than 300 milliseconds.
300 milliseconds to less than 6 seconds.
6 seconds to 100 seconds.
Within each range, a negative voltage is displayed and becomes more
negative as the sweep time is decreased.
Refer to Chapter 3 for additional troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SWEEP RAMP
X FINE TUNE DAC Extra-Fine Tune DAC
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the YTO extra-ne-tune DAC, FM_TUNE, on the A5
analog interface assembly.
The lower four divisions of the screen represent a 0 to 010 V output
range. Midscreen represents 0 V and bottom-screen represents 010 V.
The DAC voltage level is displayed as a horizontal line within the four
divisions.
Refer to Chapter 5 for additional LO troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
COARSE TUNE DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FINE TUNE DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DACS
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-41
YTF DRIVER YTF Driver
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the sample-and-hold circuit in the YTF span divider
and driver on the A5 analog interface assembly. This signal is then
converted to a current to drive the YTF.
The instrument must be in a single-band sweep for the display to be valid.
The lower four divisions of the screen represent a 0 to 010 V output
range. Midscreen represents 0 V and bottom-screen represents 010 V.
A ramp is displayed for all spans except zero span. In zero span, a
horizontal line is displayed.
The displayed voltage is the sum of the YTF ne-tune DAC, YTF
coarse-tune DAC, and YTF span voltages. The voltage becomes more
negative as the tuned frequency increases.
Refer to Chapter 5 for further troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF TUNE COARSE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF TUNE FINE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF SPAN
11-42
Service Softkey Descriptions
YTF SPAN YTF Span
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
Displays the output of the YTF span divider, YTF SPAN, on the A5 analog
interface assembly.
The instrument must be in a single-band sweep for the display to be valid.
The swept range of the A4A4 SYTF cannot exceed 7 GHz.
Perform the following steps to observe YTF SPAN:
1. Press 4SPAN5 before pressing 4CALIBRATE5.
2. Press YTF SPAN to display a negative-going ramp, centered about the
center horizontal graticule.
3. Adjust the span setting while observing the displayed ramp. The slope
of the ramp increases as the span is increased.
4. Press YTF SPAN after each change in span setting.
For spans of less than 200 MHz, the display appears at, due to
quantization errors.
Refer to Chapter 5 for further troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Softkeys
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF TUNE COARSE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF TUNE FINE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF DRIVER
YTF TUNE COARSE YTF Tune Coarse
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the YTF coarse-tune DAC produced on the A5
analog interface assembly.
The instrument must be in a single-band sweep for the display to be valid.
The lower four divisions of the screen represent a 0 to 010 V output
range. Midscreen represents 0 V and bottom-screen represents 010 V.
The DAC voltage level is displayed as a horizontal line within the four
lower divisions. The voltage becomes more negative as the center
frequency is increased. Refer to Chapter 5 for further troubleshooting
information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF TUNE FINE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF DRIVER
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF SPAN
Service Softkey Descriptions
11-43
YTF TUNE FINE YTF Tune Fine
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
For an HP 8546A/HP 85462A only.
Description
Related Softkeys
Displays the output of the YTF ne-tune DAC on the analog interface
assembly. This DAC voltage provides only ne adjustment of the YTF
tuning; there is no direct correlation between the DAC voltage and the
center-frequency setting.
The instrument must be in a single-band sweep for the display to be valid.
The lower four divisions of the screen represent a 0 to 010 V output
range. Midscreen represents 0 V and bottom-screen represents 010 V.
The DAC voltage level is displayed as a horizontal line within the four
lower divisions.
Refer to Chapter 5 for further troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
YTF TUNE COARSE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRESEL DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRESEL DEFAULT
11-44
Service Softkey Descriptions
12
Instrument Messages
Refer to this chapter for information about hardware-error, user-error, and informational
messages that are displayed when a problem with the operation of the instrument occurs.
Interpreting Instrument Messages
The instrument rmware displays error messages and informational prompts to warn the user
of instrument failure or improper use.
There are three types of messages: hardware-error messages (H), informational messages (M),
and user-created error messages (U).
Hardware-error messages indicate that the rmware has detected a fault in the instrument
hardware.
Informational messages provide prompts or messages to inform the user of the instrument
status during a specic routine.
User-created error messages indicate the instrument is being used incorrectly. They are
usually generated during remote operation.
Chapter Organization
Each instrument message is listed in alphabetical order. The following information is provided,
where applicable:
The message type, identied by an H, M, or U.
An operational denition for each instrument message.
The related instrument assembly, or assemblies, that is the likely cause of the problem
dened by the hardware-error message.
Relevant troubleshooting hints.
Instrument Messages
12-1
LOCK OFF (U) (H)
Indicates slow EYO tuning. This message may appear if the instrument is using default
correction factors. LOCK OFF appears briey during the CAL FREQ routine, during
instrument preset, or when the frequency value is changed; this is normal and does not
indicate a problem.
Related Assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A9 third converter, A23 counter lock
Troubleshooting Hints
If this message appears constantly, perform the CAL FREQ routine to try to eliminate this
message.
ADC-GND FAIL (H)
During an instrument preset, the analog-to-digital converter reading for ground on the
A24 processor assembly is outside the test limit. An instrument preset routine is also
performed during the self-calibration routines.
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface, A16 power supply, A15 motherboard, A24 processor assembly, assemblies
installed in the card cage
Troubleshooting Hints
The +15 V and 015 V supplies from the A16 power supply can cause this error message. If
the power-supply LEDs for both power supplies are on, check that the supplies are within
tolerance using the test points on the A24 processor assembly.
A voltage greater than +10 V dc on pins 1, 3, 5, 7, or 31 of A24J1 can cause this error
message. Refer to Figure 12-1 for the numbering order of the A24J1 connector pins that are
accessible from the component side of the A24 assembly. If a voltage greater than +10 V is
present on any one of the A24J1 pins indicated, use Table 12-1 to locate the source of the error
message.
Table 12-1. Possible Cause of the Error Message \ADC-GND FAIL"
A24J1
Possible Error-Message Source
Pin Number
1
A14 log amplier assembly
An assembly installed in the card cage
3
An assembly installed in the card cage
5
An assembly installed in the card cage
7
A24 processor assembly
An assembly installed in the card cage
Signal incorrectly applied to the AUX VIDEO output
31
A5 analog interface
12-2
Instrument Messages
Figure 12-1. A24J1 Connector-Pin Orientation
Before removing the A24 processor assembly, check all assemblies that are identied in
Table 12-1.
1. Turn the instrument power o and remove each assembly, one at a time.
2. Turn the instrument on.
If the ADC ground fault remains, the instrument preset at power-up displays the error
message.
If the error message goes away, the last assembly removed is the cause of the problem.
If the error message remains after the removal of all related assemblies, suspect the
A24 processor assembly.
An ADC ground failure can also be checked manually, using the service diagnostic. Press
4CALIBRATE5, More 1 of 3 , More 2 of 3 , Service Diag , More 1 , GND REF DETECTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Instrument Messages
12-3
ADC-TIME FAIL (H)
During an instrument preset, the time between analog-to-digital conversion readings is greater
than the test limit. An instrument preset routine is also performed during the self-calibration
routines.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
If the instrument does not sweep, and all other instrument functions are normal, the probable
cause of the error message is a defective A24 processor assembly.
ADC-2V FAIL (H)
During an instrument preset, the analog-to-digital converter reading for the +2 V reference
on the A24 processor assembly is outside the test limit. An instrument preset routine is also
performed during the self-calibration routines.
Related Assemblies
A16 power supply, A15 motherboard, A24 processor assembly, assemblies installed in the card
cage
Troubleshooting Hints
The +15 V and 015 V supplies from the A16 power supply can cause this problem. If the
power-supply LEDs for both supplies are on, check that the supplies are within tolerance using
the test points on the A24 processor assembly.
A voltage greater than +10 V dc on pins 1, 3, 5, 7, or 31 of A24J1 can cause this error
message. Refer to Figure 12-1 for the numbering order of the A24J1 connector pins that are
accessible from the component side of the A24 assembly. If a voltage greater than +10 V is
present on any one of the A24J1 pins indicated, use Table 12-2 to locate the source of the error
message.
Table 12-2. Possible Cause of the Error Message \ADC-2V FAIL"
A24J1
Possible Error-Message Source
Pin Number
1
A14 log amplier assembly
An assembly installed in the card cage
3
An assembly installed in the card cage
5
An assembly installed in the card cage
7
A24 processor assembly
An assembly installed in the card cage
Signal incorrectly applied to the AUX VIDEO output
31
A5 analog interface assembly
12-4
Instrument Messages
Before removing the A24 processor assembly, check all assemblies that are identied in
Table 12-2.
1. Turn the instrument power o and remove each assembly, one at a time.
2. Turn the instrument on.
If the ADC 2 V fault remains, the instrument preset at power-up displays the error
message.
If the error message goes away, the last assembly removed is the cause of the problem.
If the error message remains after the removal of all related assemblies, suspect the
A24 processor assembly.
Check the ADC 2 V reference voltage on the A24 processor assembly. A 2 V reference failure
can also be checked manually, using the service diagnostics. Press 4CALIBRATE5, More 1 of 3 ,
More 2 of 3 , Service Diag , More 1 , 2v REF DETECTOR .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
bad FDC status -> mass storage hardware failure (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
bad io command -> internal error (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
bad io parameter -> internal error (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
Bus grant failed (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
CAL:
(M)
During the self-calibration routine, messages may appear on the display to indicate how the
calibration routines are progressing. For example, sweep, freq, span, MC delay, FM coil, and
atten can appear on the instrument display.
Please note that it is normal for the LOCK OFF and REF UNLOCKerror messages to appear
briey during CAL FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting Hints
If the rmware detects a problem during the self-calibration routine, the routine will stop and
display an error message (H). Refer to the appropriate error-message description in this section.
Instrument Messages
12-5
CAL:
: done Press CAL STORE to save (M)
Indicates that the self-calibration routine is nished and that you should press CAL STORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: cannot execute CALAMP
enter: 0 dB PREAMP GAIN (U)(H)
The preamplier gain is not set to 0 dB. The preamplier gain must be set to 0 dB for the
CAL AMP routine to be performed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting Hints
Reset the preamplier gain to 0 dB using the following routines:
1. Press 4AMPLITUDE5, More 1 of 3 , EXTERNAL PREAMPG and set the preamplier gain to 0 dB.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Perform the CAL AMP routine.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press CAL STORE to store the new calibration factors and the preamplier setting of 0 dB.
Please note that pressing 4PRESET5 does not initialize the preamp-gain setting to 0 dB.
If this message is still displayed after resetting the preamp gain, it is likely there is a failure in
RAM on the A24 processor assembly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: DATA NOT STORED
CAL AMP NEEDED (U)(H)
The current correction-factor data is the default calibration data. The instrument rmware
prevents the default data from being stored. While the default data is in use, a ag is set. If
CAL STORE is pressed, the error message is displayed and CAL STORE is disabled. Successful
completion of the CAL AMP routine clears the ag.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the CAL FREQ and CAL AMP . Perform the CAL YTF routine. If the error message
reappears after pressing CAL STORE , the CAL AMP routine was not successfully completed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Pressing CAL FETCH also clears the correction-data error ag and can permit erroneous data to
be stored. Use CAL FETCH only for troubleshooting.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12-6
Instrument Messages
CAL: FM SPAN SENS FAIL (H)
During the CAL FREQ self-calibration routine the instrument cannot set the span sensitivity of
the FM coil. The output of the ne-tune DAC, located on the A5 analog interface assembly,
is changed to move the displayed signal four divisions. If the signal does not move to within
6 1.25 divisions of the expected display position, the error message is displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog interface
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the CAL FREQ routine again
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL Freq Fail (H)
During calibration of the YIG tuned oscillator FM coil, the center frequency of the YIG tuned
oscillator could not be set properly. The test is determining the sensitivity of the FM coil in the
YIG tuned oscillator.
Related assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog control board
CAL: GAIN FAIL (H)
During the CAL AMP routine, the amplitude of the video signal at the ADC on the
A24 processor assembly is too low. The error message appears when the reference-levelcalibration DAC, located on the A5 analog interface assembly, has been adjusted to its
maximum of 255, and the amplitude of the video signal remains below tolerance.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A4 front end, A5 analog interface, A9 third converter, A11 bandwidth lter, A12 amplitude
control, A13 bandwidth lter, A14 log amplier
Troubleshooting Hints
The CAL AMP routine checks the amplitude of the video signal as it adjusts the reference-levelcalibration DAC. Normally, the video-signal amplitude should move within tolerance as the DAC
changes the gain of the IF calibration amplier on the A9 third converter assembly. Refer to
the block diagrams in Chapter 8 for more information.
Check the signal amplitude along the signal path from the RF input, through the IF section,
to the output of the A14 log amplier. Refer to \Isolating an RF, LO, IF, or Video Problem" in
Chapter 3 for further troubleshooting information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Instrument Messages
12-7
Cal harmonic >= 5.7 GHz NOT found (U)(H)
Indicates that the CAL YTF routine cannot nd a harmonic of the 300 MHz calibration signal.
Related Assemblies
A9 third converter
Troubleshooting Hints
Ensure that the CAL OUT connector is connected to the instrument input, perform the CAL
FREQ and AMP routine, and then perform the CAL YTF routine again.
CAL: MAIN COIL SENSE FAIL (H)
The instrument could not set up span sensitivity of the main coil.
Related Assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog interface
Troubleshooting Hints
If this message appears, press 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5, 4CALIBRATE5, More 1 of 3 ,
More 2 of 3 , DEFAULT CAL DATA , and perform the CAL FREQ routine again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: NBW 200 Hz notch amp failed (H)
Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct shape for the calibration
routine.
Related Assemblies
A6 narrow resolution bandwidth card
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: NBW 200 Hz notch failed (H)
Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct shape for the calibration
routine.
Related Assemblies
A6 narrow resolution bandwidth card
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12-8
Instrument Messages
CAL: NBW 200 Hz width failed (H)
Indicates that the 200 Hz resolution bandwidth is not the correct bandwidth for the calibration
routine.
Related Assemblies
A6 narrow resolution bandwidth card
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: NBW gain failed (H)
Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct amplitude for the calibration
routine.
Related Assemblies
A6 narrow resolution bandwidth card
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: NBW width failed (H)
Indicates that one of the resolution bandwidths is not the correct width for the calibration
routine.
Related Assemblies
A6 narrow resolution bandwidth card
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the CAL AMP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: PASSCODE NEEDED (M)
The service function executed cannot be performed without the service passcode.
Troubleshooting Hints
Before performing any function that requires a service passcode, be sure you understand the
consequences of the function. Improper use of functions that require a passcode can delete
factory correction constants that are dicult to replace.
Refer to \Understanding Instrument Passcodes" in Chapter 11 for information about the proper
use of the passcodes.
Instrument Messages
12-9
CAL: RES BW AMPL FAIL (H)
During the CAL AMP routine, the insertion loss of a resolution bandwidth lter, relative to the
amplitude of the 3 kHz resolution bandwidth lter, was greater than 2.2 dB.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface, A11 bandwidth lter, A13 bandwidth lter, A14 log amplier/detector
Troubleshooting Hints
The CAL AMP routine will stop at the resolution bandwidth that failed. If the A11/A13
bandwidth lter assemblies require realignment, use the crystal and LC bandwidth lter
adjustment procedures in Chapter 2.
If a defective bandwidth lter board is suspected, refer to the \IF Power-Level Measurement"
section in Chapter 4.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12-10
Instrument Messages
CAL SIGNAL NOT FOUND (U)(H)
During a self-calibration routine, the CAL OUT signal cannot be found. The primary purpose of
the CAL OUT check is to conrm that CAL OUT is connected to the input. A CAL OUT signal
that is not within 300 MHz 650 MHz, or is not greater than or equal to 045 dBm, causes this
error message to be displayed.
This error message indicates the calibration software could not detect the 300 MHz calibration
signal. This error is usually seen in conjunction with another error message such as \Cal:
YTF Failed". The occurrence of this message may indicate a failure of either the 300 MHz
calibration signal itself, or a component in the signal path in question.
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface, A9 third converter
Troubleshooting Hints
If one of the following conditions are present, the error message is displayed:
The CAL OUT signal is missing. Ensure that the CAL OUT is connected to the input
connector using the CAL OUT cable supplied with the instrument.
Refer to Table 1-4 for the part number of the CAL OUT cable.
If the calibration cable is connected properly, manually check the CAL OUT signal.
The CAL OUT signal is not within 650 MHz of 300 MHz, or it has an amplitude less than or
equal to 045 dBm. The test limits are large enough to indicate an obvious failure for either
the CAL OUT signal or the instrument.
The DEFAULT CAL DATA is in use and the frequency of the CAL OUT signal appears out of
tolerance.
The default data introduces frequency osets that can make an accurate CAL OUT signal
appear to be outside the test limits for the CAL OUT check. If desired, the instrument CAL
OUT check can be bypassed. Enter the 037 Hz passcode before pressing 4CALIBRATE5 and the
desired self-calibration softkey.
Refer to the description of DEFAULT CAL DATA in Chapter 11 for additional information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The instrument has extremely low gain. Refer to \Isolating an RF, LO, IF, or Video Problem"
in Chapter 3.
Be sure to perform all internal self-calibration routines after resolving the calibration signal
problem.
Instrument Messages
12-11
CAL: SPAN SENS FAIL (H)
During the CAL FREQ self-calibration routine the main-coil span-sensitivity adjustment routine
has failed, indicating that the spans controlled by the main coil (LO spans greater than 10 MHz)
are not working correctly. The span-sensitivity adjustment routine checks for three displayed
signals: 0 Hz, 300 MHz, and 600 MHz. If three signals are not found in a 750 MHz span, the
error message is displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog interface, A9 third converter, A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Spurious signals can cause this routine to fail.
Refer to the MAIN SPAN softkey description for further information in Chapter 11.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL: USING DEFAULT DATA (M)
The CAL AMP routine was not completed and default correction factors are being used.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting Hints
Interruption of the CAL AMP routine can cause the routine to terminate and produce this
message.
Refer to Chapter 11 for more information about DEFAULT CAL DATA .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL YTF FAILED (U)(H)
Indicates that the CAL YTF routine could not be successfully completed.
Related Assemblies
A4A4 switched yig-tuned lter, A5 analog interface assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
If this message appears, ensure that the CAL OUT connector is connected to the instrument
input, perform the CAL FREQ and AMP routine, and then perform the CAL YTF routine again.
CAL: ZERO FAIL (H)
The instrument could not set up the tuning sensitivity of the main coil.
Related Assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog interface assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
If this message appears, press 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5, 4CALIBRATE5, More 1 of 3 ,
More 2 of 3 , DEFAULT CAL DATA , and perform the CAL FREQ routine again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12-12
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Instrument Messages
Cannot engage phase lock with current CAL FREQ data (U)
Indicates that the CAL FREQ routine needs to be performed before phase locking can be
turned on.
Related Assemblies
A9 third converter assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
If this message appears, press 4FREQUENCY5, 037, 4Hz5, 4CALIBRATE5, More 1 of 3 ,
More 2 of 3 , DEFAULT CAL DATA , and perform the CAL FREQ routine again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Cannot reach N dB points (U)
Indicates that the number of dB specied for the N dB PTS function is greater than the
distance of the signal peak from the instrument noise oor or peak threshold.
Related Assemblies
A9 third converter, A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Access the detector by pressing 4TRACE5, More 1 of 3 , DETECTOR SMP PK . Toggle between
SAMPLE and PEAK detector while looking for a dierence in trace amplitude. If there appears
to be a drastic dierence in amplitude, the problem lies in the PEAK detector section of the
A24 processor assembly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
check disk error -> medium uninitialized (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
Check trigger input (U)
Indicates that the instrument needs an external trigger signal to use the time-gating functions.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Ensure there is a trigger pulse connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear
panel of instrument and that the GATE OUTPUT is connected the EXT TRIG INPUT connector.
Instrument Messages
12-13
CONF TEST FAIL (U)(H)
Indicates that the condence test failed. If this happens, ensure that the CAL OUT connector is
connected to the instrument input, perform the CAL FREQ and AMP routine, and then perform
the condence test again. This message also sets SRQ 110.
Troubleshooting Hints
The condence test routine identies the instrument function that failed the test.
COMMAND ERROR:
(U)
The specied programming command is not recognized by the instrument.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Refer to the HP 8546A/HP 8542E EMI Receiver and HP 85462A/HP 85422E Receiver RF Section
Programmer's Guide for a description of legal commands.
COMPARE CMD timeout (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
Compare ERROR (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
EMI BW FAIL (H)
The calibration of the lter shapes for the 9 kHz and 120 kHz CISPR bandwidths failed.
Related Assemblies
A11 bandwidth, A12 amplitude control, A13 bandwidth
Troubleshooting Hints
The EMI CISPR lters use the same hardware as the regular RBW lters, and are tuned to
either 9 kHz or 120 kHz.
error number not recognized -> internal error (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
12-14
Instrument Messages
Factory dlp, not adaptable (U)
Indicates that the downloadable program or variable that you have selected is used by a
\personality" and cannot be edited. A personality is a program that is manufactured by
Hewlett Packard and is available for use with the instrument.
FAIL: XXXX XXXXXXXXXX (H)
A circuit-test failure was detected by the central processing unit (CPU) during power-up or
instrument preset. A failure code has two major parts: a 4-digit code followed by a 10-digit
code. The 10-digit code contains three separate failure codes. Each failure code must be
converted from hexadecimal to binary before it can be interpreted, using Table 12-3 through
Table 12-6.
The Four-Digit Failure Code
The four-digit failure code identies the circuit location of the failure on the A24 processor
assembly. Component-level failure information is also provided. Each digit of the four-digit
hexadecimal segment must be translated to its binary equivalent before using Table 12-3 to
locate the probable failure.
The 16 LEDs along the right-hand side of the A24 assembly provide the same error information
that is contained in the 4-digit failure code. Use Table 12-3 to interpret the illuminated LEDs
for an instrument failure.
Here is an example of a failure code. It is unlikely that an instrument would have so severe a
failure involving all the components indicated. The example is for demonstration only.
FAIL: DF40 0625C1F72D
The four-digit failure code (DF40) is interpreted in Table 12-3. The three fail codes within the
10-digit section (0625C1F72D) are interpreted in the \The 10-Digit Failure Code" description.
Table 12-3. Four-Digit Failure Code Interpretation
Digits From Equivalent A24 LEDs
Example Binary Value
D!
8
16
,!
4
15
2
14
,!
1
13
F!
8
12y
,!
4
11
,!
2
10
,!
1
9
8
8
4!
4
7
6
5
8
4
4
3
2
2
0
1
1
*
A24 Circuit Tested A24 Reference
Designator
Video RAM *
U305, U306
I/O Bus Address * U18
CPU
U12
68230
U57
I/O Bus (Odd byte) U2
I/O Bus (Even byte) U3
User RAM
U5
User RAM
U22
User RAM
U5
User RAM
U22
NOT USED
NOT USED
ROM (Odd B LSB)
U6
ROM (Even B LSB) U23
ROM (Odd A LSB) U7
ROM (Even A LSB) U24
Refer to the 10-digit failure code description for more information.
y LED DS12 remains on after pressing 4PRESET5.
Instrument Messages
12-15
The 10-Digit Failure Code
The 10-digit segment provides further failure information for the I/O address bus, the I/O data
bus, and the A24 video RAM circuitry. Each digit of the 10-digit hexadecimal segment must be
translated to its binary equivalent to obtain the failure information.
The 10-digit failure code section is divided into three separate codes. The 10-digit failure code
example (0625C1F72D) is separated into three codes as shown below:
FAIL: DF40 (06) (25C1) (F72D)
Each failure code from the example is converted from hexadecimal to binary and interpreted in
Table 12-4, Table 12-5, and Table 12-6.
The I/O Address Bus Failure Code. The rst two digits of the 10-digit code identify the failed
address lines on the I/O address bus. Convert the two digits to binary and interpret them with
Table 12-4.
Table 12-4. I/O Bus Address Failure-Code Interpretation
Digits From Equivalent
Example Binary Value
8
4
2
0
1
8
6!
4
,!
2
1
A24 Circuit Tested A24 Reference
Designator
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
U18
Error at ADR 4
U18
Error at ADR 3
U18
Error at ADR 2
U18
Error at ADR 1
Error at ADR 0
U18
The I/O Data-Bus Failure Code. The next four digits identify failed data lines on the I/O data
bus. Convert the four digits to binary and interpret them with Table 12-5.
Table 12-5. I/O Data Bus Failure Code Interpretation
Digits From Equivalent
Example Binary Value
8
4
2!
2
1
8
5!
4
2
,!
1
C!
8
,!
4
2
1
8
4
2
1!
1
12-16
Instrument Messages
A24 Circuit Tested A24 Reference
Designator
U3
Error at IOB 15
Error at IOB 14
U3
U3
Error at IOB 13
U3
Error at IOB 12
Error at IOB 11
U3
Error at IOB 10
U3
Error at IOB 9
U3
Error at IOB 8
U3
Error at IOB 7
U2
Error at IOB 6
U2
Error at IOB 5
U2
Error at IOB 4
U2
Error at IOB 3
U2
Error at IOB 2
U2
Error at IOB 1
U2
Error at IOB 0
U2
The Video RAM Failure Code. The last four digits identify the failure address for the video
RAM on the A24 assembly. A video RAM failure code indicates an internal failure on the
A24 assembly; the section of the video RAM circuitry that is tested is not connected to other
instrument assemblies. Convert the four digits to binary and interpret them with Table 12-6.
Table 12-6. A24 Video Ram Address Failure Code Interpretation
Digits From Equivalent A24 Circuit Tested
Example Binary Value
F!
8
Error at MAD 15 *
,!
4
Error at MAD 14
,!
2
Error at MAD 13
,!
1
Error at MAD 12
8
Error at MAD 11
7!
4
Error at MAD 10
,!
2
Error at MAD 9
,!
1
Error at MAD 8
8
Error at MAD 7
4
Error at MAD 6
2!
2
Error at MAD 5
1
Error at MAD 4
D!
8
Error at MAD 3
,!
4
Error at MAD 2
2
Error at MAD 1
,!
1
Error at MAD 0
A24 Reference
Designator
U306
U305
U306
U305
U306
U305
U306
U305
U306
U305
U306
U305
U306
U305
U306
U305
* The acronym MAD stands for \Multiplexed Address and Data." There are
no separate address and data lines within the A24 video RAM
circuitry.
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface, A24 processor assembly, A23 counter lock, assemblies installed in the card
cage
Troubleshooting Hints
Refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 8 for an overview of the assemblies attached to the
I/O bus. Refer also to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" in Chapter 4 for the
location of specic I/O signal traces on related assemblies.
If a failure code for an I/O bus address or data line occurs, remove the related assemblies
one at a time until the failure message disappears. Be sure to turn the instrument power o
while removing and installing each assembly.
If the failure message disappears, suspect the assembly that was removed last.
If the failure message remains after all related assemblies have been removed, suspect the
A24 assembly.
If a A24 video RAM fail code occurs, the A24 assembly is defective.
Instrument Messages
12-17
fatal error -> mass storage system error (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
FDC did not ID during instrument setup (H)
Press the front-panel numeric key which corresponds to the FDC PCA address switch setting (0
through 7)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
FDC Ready Timeout (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
File type incompatible (U)
Indicates that the selected le is not a display image le. The le name for a display image le
is always preceded by an \i."
FMERRP error (H)
During calibration of the YIG tuned oscillator FM coil, the span for 100 kHz < Fc < 10 MHz
could not be calibrated. The test is determining the sensitivity of the FM coil in the YIG tuned
oscillator.
Related assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog control board
FMT INIT CMD failed (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
12-18
Instrument Messages
FREQ UNCAL (U) (H)
The EYO (Electronic YIG-tuned oscillator) frequency is more than 20 MHz from the desired
frequency. If the FREQ UNCAL message appears constantly, it indicates an EYO-tuning error. If
this message appears constantly, perform the CAL FREQ routine. FREQ UNCAL appears briey
during the CAL FREQ routine; this is normal and does not indicate a problem. (U) and (H)
Related Assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog interface, A23 counter lock
Troubleshooting Hints
This error message may occur when using correction data from DEFAULT CAL DATA . Refer
to the DEFAULT CAL DATA description in Chapter 11 for more information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If DEFAULT CAL DATA is in use, the instrument self-calibration routines must be run.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The error message may occur if incomplete frequency calibration factors are used.
Interrupting the CAL FREQ self-calibration routine produces incomplete frequency
calibration data.
Performing the CAL FREQ routine may eliminate the problem. Be sure to press CAL STORE
to store the correction factors produced by CAL FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The error message may occur if either the reference oscillator or the sampling oscillator on
the A23 assembly is unlocked.
Refer to \Isolating an RF, LO, IF or Video Problem" in Chapter 3 for further information.
Function not available in current Mode (U)
Indicates that the function that you have selected can only be used with the spectrum analysis
mode. You can use the 4MODE5 key to select the spectrum analysis mode.
Function not available with analog display (U)
Indicates that the function that you have selected is not compatible with the Analog+
display mode. To use the function, you must rst turn o the Analog+ display mode with
ANALOG+ ON OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Gate card not calibrated (U)(H)
This message can indicate that either the CAL AMP routine need to be performed before the
time-gating functions can be used, or that something was connected to the GATE TRIGGER
INPUT connector during the CAL AMP or CAL FREQ and AMP routines.
Troubleshooting Hints
Ensure that nothing is connected to the GATE TRIGGER INPUT connector when the CAL AMP
or CAL FREQ and AMP routines are performed.
Instrument Messages
12-19
general error -> mass storage system error (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
Hi RAM Bus Grant FAIL (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
INIT CMD timeout (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
INPUT CAL FAILED: 300 MHz out of range (H)
During the system calibration, the RF lter section preamplier could not be adjusted for the
proper amplitude level at 300 MHz.
Related Assemblies
RF lter section A14 AMPVAR, RF lter section A9 high frequency lters
INPUT CAL FAILED: TG EXT ALC out of range (H)
During the system calibration, the tracking generator external ALC could not adjust the
tracking generator output power to within tolerance.
Related Assemblies
A4A5 Attenuator, A4A10 tracking generator, A8 tracking generator control board
INPUT CAL FAILED: TG INT ALC out of range (H)
During the system calibration, the tracking generator internal ALC could not adjust the
tracking generator output power to within tolerance.
Related Assemblies
A4A5 Attenuator, A4A10 tracking generator, A8 tracking generator control board
Insucient Memory (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
INTERNAL LOCKED (U)
The instrument's internal trace and state registers have been locked. To unlock the trace or
state registers, press SAV LOCK ON OFF so that OFF is underlined. For remote operation, use
PSTATE OFF.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12-20
Instrument Messages
INVALID ACTDEF:
(U)
The specied ACTDEF name is not valid. See the ACTDEF programming command.
INVALID AMPCOR: FREQ (U)
For the AMPCOR command, the frequency data must be entered in increasing order. See the
description for the AMPCOR programming command for more information.
INVALID BLOCK FORMAT: IF STATEMENT (U)
An invalid block format appeared within the IF statement. See the description for the IF THEN
ELSE ENDIF programming command for more information.
INVALID CHECKSUM: USTATE (U)
The user-dened state does not follow the expected format.
INVALID COMPARE OPERATOR (U)
An IF/THEN or REPEAT/UNTIL routine is improperly constructed. Specically, the IF or UNTIL
operands are incorrect.
INVALID DET: FM or TV option only (U)
Indicates that the selected detector cannot be used until the appropriate option is installed in
the instrument.
INVALID ENTER FORMAT (U)
The enter format is not valid. See the appropriate programming command description to
determine the correct format.
INVALID <le name> NOT FOUND (U)
Indicates that the specied le could not be loaded into instrument memory or purged from
memory because the le name cannot be found.
INVALID FILENAME
(U)
Indicates the specied le name is invalid. A le name is invalid if there is no le name
specied, if the rst letter of the le name is not alphabetic, or if the specied le type does
not match the type of le. See the description SAVRCLW or STOR programming command for
more information.
INVALID HP-IB ADRS/OPERATION (U)
An HP-IB operation was aborted due to an incorrect address or invalid operation.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly, A22 HP-IB interface board assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Check that there is only one controller (the instrument) connected to the printer or plotter.
Instrument Messages
12-21
INVALID HP-IB OPERATION REN TRUE (U)
The HP-IB operation is not allowed.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly, A22 HP-IB interface board assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
This is usually caused by trying to print or plot when a controller is on the interface bus with
the instrument. To use the instrument print or plot functions, you must disconnect any other
controllers on the HP-IB. If you are using programming commands to print or plot, you can
use an HP BASIC command instead of disconnecting the controller. Ensure the instrument is
congured properly for PRINT or PLOT, B/W or Paintjet, and the printer or plotter address
is set correctly set. See the HP 8546A/HP 8542E EMI Receiver and HP 85462A/HP 85422E
Receiver RF Section Programmer's Guide for more information.
INVALID ITEM:
(U)
Indicates an invalid parameter has been used in a programming command.
INVALID KEYLBL:
(U)
Indicates that the specied key label contains too many characters. A key label is limited to 8
printable characters per label line.
INVALID KEYNAME:
(U)
The specied key name is not allowed.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
The key name may have conicted with a instrument programming command. To avoid this
problem, use an underscore as the second character in the key name, or avoid beginning the
key name with the following pairs of letters: LB, OA, OL, TA, TB, TR, MA, MF, TS, OT, and DR.
INVALID OUTPUT FORMAT (U)
The output format is not valid. See the appropriate programming command description to
determine the correct format.
INVALID RANGE: Stop < Start (U)
Indicates that the rst trace element specied for a range of trace elements is larger that
ending trace element. When specifying a trace range the starting element must be less than the
ending element. For example, TRA[2,300] is legal but TRA[300,2] is not.
INVALID REGISTER NUMBER (U)
The specied trace register number is invalid.
12-22
Instrument Messages
INVALID REPEAT MEM OVFL (U)
Memory overow occurred due to a REPEAT routine. This can occur if there is not enough
instrument memory for the REPEAT UNTIL declaration, or if the REPEAT UNTIL declaration
exceeds 2047 characters.
INVALID REPEAT NEST LEVEL (U)
The nesting level in the REPEAT routine is improperly constructed. This can occur if too many
REPEAT routines are nested. When used within a downloadable program (DLP), the maximum
number of REPEAT UNTIL statements that can be nested is 20.
INVALID RS-232 ADRS/OPERATION (U)
An RS-232 operation was aborted due to an invalid operation.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Reset all instruments attached to the bus.
INVALID SAVE REG (U)
Data has not been saved in the specied state or trace register, or the data is corrupt.
INVALID SCRMOVE (H)
Indicates the instrument may have a hardware failure.
Related Assemblies
All internal assemblies
Troubleshooting Hints
Remove instrument from bus. Perform an instrument preset.
INVALID START INDEX (U)
Indicates that the rst trace element specied for a range of trace elements is not within the
trace range of the specied trace.
INVALID STOP INDEX (U)
Indicates that the ending trace element specied for a range of trace elements is not within the
trace range of the specied trace.
INVALID STORE DEST:
(U)
The specied destination eld is invalid.
Instrument Messages
12-23
INVALID SYMTAB ENTRY: SYMTAB OVERFLOW (U)
This message indicates that too many user-dened items (functions, variables, key denitions),
or downloadable programs have been loaded into instrument memory.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Use DISPOSE USER MEM and then load the user-dened item or downloadable program into
instrument memory.
Press the following instrument keys:
4CONFIG5 More 1 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Dispose User Mem
If the above keys are not accessable perform the following steps.
1. Press the following instrument keys:
4DISPLAY5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Change Title
Use the knob to select the letters DISPOSE ALL;, be sure to include the semicolon (;).
2. Press the following instrument keys:
4CALIBRATE5 More 1 of 3 More 2 of 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Cal
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EXECUTE TITLE
If the instrument still appears to be locked up, refer to \Troubleshooting the A24 Processor
Board Assembly," in Chapter 3.
INVALID TRACE:
The specied trace is invalid.
(U)
INVALID TRACE NAME:
(U)
INVALID TRACENAME:
(U)
The specied trace name is not allowed. Use an underscore as the second character in the
trace name, or avoid beginning the trace name with the following pairs of letters: LB, OA, OL,
TA, TB, TR, MA, MF, TS, OT, and DR.
Indicates the specied trace could not be saved because the trace name is not allowed. To
avoid this problem, use an underscore as the second character in the trace name, or avoid
beginning the trace name with the following pairs of letters: LB, OA, OL, TA, TB, TR, MA, MF,
TS, OT, and DR.
INVALID VALUE PARAMETER:
The specied value parameter is invalid.
12-24
Instrument Messages
(U)
INVALID VARDEF:
(U)
The specied variable name is not allowed. To avoid this problem, use an underscore as the
second character in the variable label, or avoid beginning the variable label with the following
pairs of letters: LB, OA, OL, TA, TB, TR, MA, MF, TS, OT, and DR.
INVALID WINDOW TYPE:
(U)
The specied window is invalid. See the description for the TWNDOW programming command.
io buer overow -> internal error (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
io data error -> read data error (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
LOST SIGNAL (U)
This message indicates that the cable from the CAL OUT connector is defective or has been
disconnected during the CAL YTF routine. Be sure to use a short, low-loss cable to connect the
signal to the instrument input when performing the CAL YTF routine.
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface board
Troubleshooting Hints
Concentrate on the RF control sections of the A5 analog interface board.
Lo RAM Bus Grant FAIL (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
LO UNLVL (U)(H)
Indicates that the instrument's local oscillator distribution amplier is not functioning properly.
Related Assemblies
A8 tracking generator control
Troubleshooting Hints
Check the LOsense and gate bias adjustments on A8. Bias voltages are marked on a label on the
top of the high frequency RF.
Instrument Messages
12-25
Marker Count Reduce SPAN (U)
Indicates the resolution bandwidth to span ratio is too small to use the marker count function.
Check the span and resolution bandwidth settings.
Marker Count Widen RES BW (U)
Indicates that the current resolution bandwidth setting is too narrow to use with the marker
counter function. The marker counter function can be in narrow resolution bandwidths
(bandwidths that are less than 1 kHz) with the following procedure:
1. Place the marker on the desired signal.
2. Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz and verify the marker is on the signal peak.
3. If the marker in on the signal peak, the marker count function can be used in either the 1
kHz resolution bandwidth or the original narrow resolution bandwidth setting. If the marker
is not on the signal peak, it should be moved to the signal peak and the marker counter
function should not be used with a resolution bandwidth setting of less than 1 kHz.
MEAS UNCAL (U)
The measurement is uncalibrated. Check the sweep time, span, and bandwidth settings, or
press 4AUTO COUPLE5, AUTO ALL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
No card found (U)
Indicates that the memory card is not inserted.
MIXER BIAS CAL FAILED (H)
The rst mixer bias could not be set properly. The calibration routine sets the mixer bias by
applying a calibration signal internally to the mixer and adjusting the bias while looking at the
peaks of the calibration signal.
Related assemblies
A4A6 dual band mixer, A5 analog control board
Troubleshooting Hints
This test uses the 300 MHz calibration signal as the source. Perform a CAL ALL to insure
proper operation of the 300 MHz calibration signal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
no disk found -> medium changed or not present (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
No ID response (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
12-26
Instrument Messages
No points dened (U)
Indicates the specied limit line or amplitude correction function cannot be performed because
no limit line segments or amplitude correction factors have been dened.
OVEN COLD (M)
The message is displayed for 5 minutes after the instrument is turned on. The message alerts
the user that the oven in the A20 precision frequency reference has not been on long enough
to warm the reference to its operating temperature.
Related Assemblies
A20 precision frequency reference
Troubleshooting Hints
This is a timed message that comes on whenever the instrument is turned on; the temperature
of the A20 precision frequency reference oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO) is not
measured.
The instrument rmware displays the message only when it senses that the A20 assembly is
connected to its power supply through W15, the OCXO power cable. If the message does not
appear, check the W15 cable.
PARAMETER ERROR:
(U)
The specied parameter is not recognized by the instrument. See the appropriate programming
command description to determine the correct parameters.
PARAMETER ERROR: FDCTESTS (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
PASSCODE NEEDED (U)
Indicates that the function cannot be accessed without the pass code.
POS-PK FAIL (H)
The positive-peak-detector check has failed during the condence test routine, CONF TEST .
The level of the noise oor for the positive-peak detector is statistically compared to that of
the sample detector. The mean of the data from the positive-peak detector should be greater
than the mean of the data from the sample detector.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
This test performs a functional check of switching for the positive-peak detector on the
A24 processor assembly.
Instrument Messages
12-27
READ CMD timeout (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
RECAL CMD timeout (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
REF UNLOCK (M)(H)
The oscillator on the A9 third converter is not locked to a 10 MHz frequency reference. The
instrument must be connected to one of the following frequency references:
Precision frequency reference. The reference is a oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO).
External 10 MHz frequency reference.
Related Assemblies
A20 precision frequency reference, A23 counter lock
Troubleshooting Hints
Refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 8 for more information.
1. Check the rear-panel cable connections for the 10 MHz reference.
When using the precision frequency reference, make sure that the 10 MHz REF OUT on the
rear panel is connected to the EXT REF IN. The W6 jumper is supplied with the instrument
for this purpose.
When using an external 10 MHz reference, make sure it is connected to the EXT REF IN on
the rear panel.
2. If the rear panel connection is correct, check the power output of the 10 MHz frequency
reference.
A20 precision frequency reference (OCXO), has an typical output of 0 dBm 6 3 dB.
An external 10 MHz reference should have an output between 02 dBm and +10 dBm.
3. If the output of the 10 MHz reference is correct, check the continuity of W18, the EXT REF
IN cable, and W17, the 10 MHz OUT cable.
4. Check the continuity of the VTO TUNE control line.
5. Check the continuity of the W14 ribbon cable and the W21 coaxial cable.
6. Check the continuity of the A23 assembly connections to the A9 assembly that pass through
the A15 motherboard.
7. If the error message is still present, suspect the A23 counter lock assembly.
Require 1 signal > PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD (U)
Indicates that the N dB PTS routine cannot locate a signal that is high enough to measure. The
signal must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure.
12-28
Instrument Messages
Require 3 signals > PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD (U)
Indicates that the % AM routine cannot locate three signals that are high enough to measure.
The signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure.
Require 4 signals > PEAK EXCURSION above THRESHOLD (U)
Indicates that the TOI routine cannot locate four signals that are high enough to measure. The
signals must be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure.
Required option not installed (U)
Some instrument functions require that an option be installed in the instrument.
See the description for the function in the HP 8546A/HP 8542E EMI Receiver and
HP 85462A/HP 85422E Receiver RF Section User's Guide for more information about which
option is required.
RES-BW NOISE FAIL (H)
During the condence test routine, CONF TEST , the noise oor level was too high for the
indicated resolution bandwidth.
Starting with the widest resolution bandwidth, the test compares the noise oor amplitude of
each bandwidth to the noise oor amplitude of the next, narrower resolution bandwidth. If a
decrease in noise-oor amplitude does not occur, the test displays the narrower bandwidth as a
test failure.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A11 bandwidth lter, A13 bandwidth lter
Troubleshooting Hints
A high noise oor can be caused by a defective bandwidth control line.
Look for a change in noise oor level and bandwidth when manually switching between
bandwidths. If no change occurs, check the bandwidth control lines from the A5 analog
interface assembly.
Refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 8 for further information.
A high noise oor can also be caused by loose screws in the IF assembly section. Make sure
the IF assembly cover screws are properly tightened.
Instrument Messages
12-29
RES-BW SHAPE FAIL (H)
During the condence test routine, CONF TEST , the 3 dB bandwidth of a resolution bandwidth
was not within 20% of its nominal value. The 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and
3 MHz bandwidths are checked and the bandwidths that fail are displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface, A11 bandwidth lter, A13 bandwidth lter
Troubleshooting Hints
The bandwidth of the failed resolution bandwidths may have drifted since the last time
the self-calibration routines were run. The CAL AMP self-calibration routine corrects for
bandwidth error.
If a bandwidth drifts out of tolerance soon after performing CAL AMP , a bandwidth-lter
assembly or bandwidth control line may be unstable.
1. Check the 3 dB bandwidth of the failed resolution bandwidths using the 3 dB POINTS
softkey.
2. Use DISPLAY CAL DATA to view the current bandwidth control factors.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Perform the CAL AMP self-calibration routine. Use DISPLAY CAL DATA to monitor
changes in the bandwidth control factors each time the CAL AMP routine is performed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Repeat the CONF TEST routine. If the error message is still present, look for an unstable
bandwidth-lter assembly or bandwidth control line.
Refer to bandwidth control line information in Chapter 4 when troubleshooting the
bandwidth control lines.
The bandpass shape of the failed resolution bandwidths may have drifted since the last time
the self-calibration routines were run.
1. Look at the bandpass shape of each failed bandwidth. If realignment is needed, refer to
the crystal and LC bandwidth lter adjustment procedure in Chapter 2.
2. Run the CAL AMP self-calibration routine and store the data using CAL STORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Repeat the CONF TEST routine. If the error message is still present, one of the
bandwidth-lter assemblies may be defective.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RF PRESEL ERROR (H)
Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed.
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface assembly, A4A4 (switched) yig-tuned lter
Troubleshooting Hints
Ensure that the signal source is connected to the RF input.
12-30
Instrument Messages
RF PRESEL TIMEOUT (H)
Indicates that the preselector peak routine cannot be performed.
Related Assemblies
A5 analog interface assembly, A4A4 (switched) yig-tuned lter
Troubleshooting Hints
Ensure that the signal source is connected to the RF input.
RFFS Error: HARDWARE (H)
The RF lter section is reporting its hardware has a fault.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor, RF lter section processor
RFFS Error: TIMEOUT (H)
While communicating with the RF lter section via the aux bus, a response was not received
within the maximum time.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor, RF lter section processor
SAMPLE FAIL (H)
During the condence test routine, CONF TEST , the sample-detector test has failed. The test
makes a statistical comparison between the peak-to-peak amplitude of the noise oor for the
positive-peak detector and the noise oor for the sample detector.
The error message is displayed if the standard deviation of the data for the sample detector is
less than the standard deviation of data for the positive-peak detector.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
This test performs a functional check of switching for the sample detector on the
A24 processor assembly.
SETUP ERROR (U)
Indicates that the span, channel bandwidth, or channel spacing are not set correctly for the
adjacent channel power or channel power measurement.
SIGNAL CLIPPED (U)
Indicates that the current FFT measurement sweep resulted in a trace that is above the top
graticule line on the instrument display. If this happens, the input trace (trace A) has been
\clipped," and the FFT data is not valid.
Instrument Messages
12-31
Signals do not t expected % AM pattern (U)
Indicates that the % AM routine cannot perform the percent AM measurement because the
on-screen signals do not have the characteristics of a carrier with two sidebands.
Signals do not t expected TOI pattern (U)
Indicates that the TOI routine cannot perform the third-order intermodulation measurement
because the on-screen signals do not have the characteristics of two signals and two distortion
products.
SMPLR UNLCK (U)(H)
Indicates that the sampling oscillator circuitry is not functioning properly.
Related Assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A23 counter lock board assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Check that the external frequency reference is correctly connected to the EXT REF INPUT.
Observe the frequency diagnostics. Look for numbers that are out of tolerance.
SOFTKEY OVFL (U)
Softkey nesting exceeds the maximum number of levels.
SRQ
(M)
The specied service request is active. Service requests are a form of informational
message and are explained in Appendix A of the HP 8546A/HP 8542E EMI Receiver and
HP 85462A/HP 85422E Receiver RF Section Reference Guide.
12-32
Instrument Messages
STEP GAIN/ATTEN FAIL (H)
During the condence test routine, CONF TEST , the step-gain switching check has failed.
Looking at displayed noise, the test steps the reference level from 060 dBm to +30 dBm, in 10
dB increments, with the input attenuator set to 60 dB. The error message is displayed if the
noise level does not increase for each 10 dB step in reference level.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A12 amplitude control
Troubleshooting Hints
The condence test performs a functional check of the A12 assembly step gains; it does not
check the function of the A12 step attenuators. The test passes if it detects any increase in
noise oor level for each 10 dB change in reference level.
There is no manual adjustment for the 10 dB step gains. The CAL AMP self-calibration routine
corrects for the 10 dB step gains and input attenuator errors. Refer to the CAL AMP description
in Chapter 11 for more information.
If one of the 10 dB step gains appears to be faulty, check the step-gain control lines from the
A5 analog interface assembly.
Refer to \Troubleshooting the A15 Motherboard Assembly" in Chapter 4 for the location of the
step gain control lines.
If the control lines function correctly, suspect a A12 amplitude control assembly failure.
Refer to the IF section gain control information in Chapter 4 for further information about the
operation of the 10 dB step gains.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stop at marker not available with negative detection (U)
Indicates that the marker counter cannot be used when negative peak detection is selected. To
use the marker counter, turn o negative peak detection with DETECTOR PK SP NG .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SYMTAB EMPTY (U)
Indicates that the user-dened items (user-dened functions, user-dened variables,
user-dened traces, user-dened softkeys) and any personalities in the instrument's memory
have been deleted.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Use Dispose User Mem to clear instrument memory. Perform instrument calibrations. If the
message is still displayed, it may indicate a hardware failure.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TABLE FULL (U)
Indicates the upper or lower table of limit lines contains the maximum number of entries
allowed. Additional entries to the table are ignored.
Instrument Messages
12-33
TG SIGNAL NOT FOUND (U)
Description
During the CAL TRK GEN self-calibration routine, a signal response above the rst division
from bottom screen is not present. The primary purpose of the error message is to indicate that
the CAL cable is not connected from the tracking generator RF OUT to the RF INPUT.
This error message indicates the calibration software could not detect the tracking generator
signal. This error is usually seen in conjunction with another error message such as \Cal: YTF
Failed". The occurrence of this message may indicate a failure of either the tracking generator
signal itself, or a component in the signal path in question.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A8 tracking generator control
Troubleshooting Hints
If a low signal response is present within the rst division from bottom screen, check the
cable connection from the RF OUT to the RF INPUT.
A cable with excessive loss can cause a low-level signal. Use the CAL cable that is
supplied with the instrument. Be sure to use the same CAL cable when performing all the
self-calibration routines.
Refer to Table 1-4 for the part number of the CAL cable.
If no signal response is present, check the output of the tracking generator at the RF OUT
connector. Refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 8 for more information.
TG UNLVL (U)(H)
This message can indicate the following: that the source power is set higher or lower than the
instrument can provide, that the frequency span extends beyond the specied frequency range
of the tracking generator, or that the calibration data for the tracking generator is incorrect.
See the HP 8546A/HP 8542E EMI Receiver and HP 85462A/HP 85422E Receiver RF Section
User's Guide for more information.
Related Assemblies
A8 tracking generator control assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Perform the tracking generator control routine.
Too many signals with valid N dB points (U)
Indicates the N dB PTS function has located two or more signals that have amplitudes within
the specied dB from the signal peak. If this happens, you should decrease the span of the
instrument so that only the signal that you want to measure is displayed.
12-34
Instrument Messages
There is another I/O card at that address. (H)
Check the FDC address switch and try again.
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
Trace A is not available (U)
Indicates that trace A is in the store-blank mode and cannot be used for limit-line testing. Use
CLEAR WRITE A or VIEW A to change trace A from the store-blank mode to the clear write
mode, and then turn on limit-line testing.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
UNDF KEY (U)
The softkey number is not recognized by the instrument.
uP load fail
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
USING DEFAULTS:
The analyzer has determined that the contents of certain RAM locations are not within the
expected values. The number following the colon corresponds to the location that caused the
default condition. This number was used during the initial design and is not applicable to
troubleshooting.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
This message may indicate that the battery used to power the RAM is is dead. Refer to
restoring analyzer memory.
USING DEFAULTS self cal needed (U)
Indicates that the current correction factors are the default correction factors and that the
CAL FREQ and AMP routine needs to be performed. The CAL YTF routine is also required.
Verify gate trigger input is disconnected before CAL AMP (U)
This message is meant to remind you that nothing should be connected to the GATE TRIGGER
INPUT connector on the instrument's rear panel during the CAL AMP routine.
Instrument Messages
12-35
VID-BW FAIL (H)
During the CONF TEST routine the video bandwidth check has failed. The test checks for a
decrease in the peak-to-peak excursion of the noise trace as the video bandwidth is decreased.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Related Assemblies
A14 log amplier/detector, A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Problems with the low-pass lter on the A14 log amplier/detector assembly can cause the
video bandwidths to appear to be incorrect.
Waiting for gate input
...
(U)
Indicates that the instrument needs an external trigger signal to use the time-gating functions.
Related Assemblies
A24 processor assembly
Troubleshooting Hints
Before using the time-gating functions, ensure there is a trigger pulse connected to the GATE
TRIGGER INPUT connector on the rear panel of instrument and that the GATE OUTPUT
is connected the EXT TRIG INPUT connector. If the connections are correct and, after an
instrument preset, the error message is still displayed, the internal triggering circuitry on
the A24 processor assembly may not be functioning correctly. If you do not want to use the
time-gating functions, press 4PRESET5.
WDISCP error (H)
During calibration of the YIG tuned oscillator FM coil, the span for Fc < 100 kHz could not be
calibrated. The test is determining the sensitivity of the FM coil in the YIG tuned oscillator.
Related assemblies
A4A9 EYO, A5 analog control board
write protected -> write protected (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board, A19 disk drive
WRITE CMD status timeout (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
WRITE CMD timeout (H)
Related Assemblies
A21 disk drive controller board
12-36
Instrument Messages
13
Service Equipment and Tools
This chapter contains information about service equipment and tools needed to perform
spectrum analyzer calibration, adjustments, and troubleshooting.
Static-Safe Accessories
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic components. All work
performed on assemblies containing electronic components should be done only at a static-safe
work station.
Table 13-1 provides information on ordering static-safe accessories and shows an example of a
static-safe work station using two types of ESD protection:
Conductive table-mat and wrist-strap combination.
Conductive oor-mat and heel-strap combination.
The two types must be used together to ensure adequate ESD protection.
WARNING
These techniques for a static-safe work station should not be used when
working on circuitry that has a voltage potential greater than 500 volts.
For more information about preventing ESD damage, contact the Electrical
Overstress/Electrostatic Discharge (EOS/ESD) Association, Inc. The ESD standards
developed by this agency are sanctioned by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
Service Equipment and Tools
13-1
Table 13-1. Static-Safe Accessories
Description
HP
Part Number
13-2
9300-0797
Set includes: 3M static control mat 0.6 m 2 1.2 m (2 ft 2 4 ft) and 4.6 cm (15 ft) ground wire.
(The wrist-strap and wrist-strap cord are not included. They must be ordered separately.)
9300-0980
Wrist-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft)
9300-1383
Wrist-strap, color black, stainless steel, without cord, has four adjustable links and a 7 mm
post-type connection.
9300-1169
ESD heel-strap (reusable 6 to 12 months).
Service Equipment and Tools
Recommended Test Equipment
The tables in this section list the recommended test equipment required to perform the
performance test, adjustments, and troubleshooting.
Table 13-2. Recommended Test Equipment
Equipment
Critical Specications for
Equipment Substitution
CRT Demagnetizer or Bulk None
Tape Eraser
Recommended
Model
Any commercially
available model
Digital multimeter
Input Resistance: 10 M
Accuracy: 6 10 mV on 100 V range
HP 3458A
Frequency standard
Frequency: 10 MHz
Timebase Accuracy (Aging): <1 2 1009 /day
HP 5061B
Frequency counter
Frequency: 10 MHz
Resolution: 60.002 Hz
External Timebase
Microwave frequency
counter
Frequency Range: 9 MHz to 7 GHz
Timebase Accuracy (Aging): <5 2 10010 /day
HP 5343A
Level generator
Frequency Range: 500 Hz to 80 MHz
Amplitude Range: +12 to 085 dBm
Flatness: 60.15 dB
Attenuator Accuracy: 60.09 dB
HP 3335A
Measuring receiver
Compatible with Power Sensors
dB Relative Mode
Resolution: 0.01 dB
Reference Accuracy: 61.2%
HP 8902A
Microwave spectrum
analyzer
Frequency Range: 10 MHz to 7 GHz
Power meter
Power Range: Calibrated in dBm and dB relative
to reference power 070 dBm to +44 dBm,
sensor dependent
HP 438A
Power sensor
Frequency Range: 1 MHz to 350 MHz
Maximum SWR: 1.1 (1 MHz to 2.0 GHz)
1.30 (2.0 to 2.9 GHz)
HP 8482A
Power Sensor, Low Power
(with a 50 MHz reference
attenuator
Frequency Range: 300 MHz
Amplitude Range: 020 to 070 dBm
Maximum SWR: 1.1 (300 MHz)
HP 8481D
HP 5334A/B
HP 8566A/B
Service Equipment and Tools
13-3
Table 13-2. Recommended Test Equipment (continued)
Equipment
Synthesized sweeper
Critical Specications for
Equipment Substitution
Frequency Range: 10 MHz to 6.5 GHz
Frequency Accuracy (CW): 60.02%
Leveling Modes: Internal and External
Modulation Modes: AM
Power Level Range: 035 to +16 dBm
Recommended
Model
HP 8340A/B
or
HP 83630A
Table 13-3. Recommended Accessories
Equipment
Critical Specications for
Accessory Substitution
Recommended
Model
Adapter
APC 3.5 (f) to Type N (f)
1250-1745
Adapter
APC 3.5 (f) to Type N (m)
1250-1744
Adapter
Type N (f) to BNC (m) (two required)
1250-1477
Adapter
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (two required)
1250-1476
Adapter
BNC (f) to Dual banana plug
1251-2277
Adapter
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f)
1250- 1749
two required
Crystal shorts
(set of three)
13-4
Refer to Table 13-5
in the following section.
IF test board
Refer to Table 13-5
in the following section.
5062-6421
Power splitter
Frequency Range: 50 kHz to 6.5 GHz
Insertion Loss: 6 dB (nominal)
Output Tracking: <0.25 dB
Equivalent Output SWR: <1.22:1
HP 11667B
Attenuator, 10 dB
Type N (m to f)
Frequency: 300 MHz
HP 8491A
Option 010
Low pass lter,
300 MHz
Cuto Frequency: 300 MHz
Bandpass Insertion Loss: <0.9 dB at 300 MHz
Stopband Insertion Loss: >40 dB at 435 MHz
0955-0455
Termination, 50 Termination
Impedance: 50 (nominal)
HP 908A
Service Equipment and Tools
or
HP 909D
Table 13-4. Recommended Cables
Equipment
Critical Specications for
Cable Substitution
Recommended
Model
Cable
APC 3.5 (m) both ends
HP 11500E
Cable
Frequency Range: dc to 1 GHz
Length: 91 cm (36 in)
Connectors: BNC (m) both ends
HP 10503A
(two required)
Cable
Frequency Range: dc to 1 GHz
Length: 91 cm (36 in)
Connectors: BNC (m) both ends
HP 10502A
Cable
Length: 112 cm (44 in)
Connectors: BNC (m) to dual banana plug
11001-60001
Cable
Type N, 152 cm (60 in)
HP 11500D
Cable, Test
Length: 91 cm (36 in)
Connectors: SMB (f) to BNC (m)
85680-60093
(two required)
Cable
Type N, 60 cm (24 in.)
DMM test leads
Dual Banana Plug to Alligator Clips
HP 11500B/C
HP 11002A
Service Equipment and Tools
13-5
Recommended Service Tools
Table 13-5 and Figure 13-1 provide descriptions and HP part numbers for special service tools
that are used throughout this manual.
Table 13-6 provides an additional list of common hand tools that are also recommended for
repairing the HP 85422E/HP 85462A receiver RF section.
Refer to \Ordering Information" in Chapter 10 when ordering equipment, tools, and
accessories.
Table 13-5. Special Service Tools
Item
Description
1 Board puller, two prongs to lift PC boards
2 Extender board, pin and socket, 20 contacts (two required)
HP Part Number Use*
03950-4001
A,T
5062-1999
T
5062-2000
T
08565-60107
T
Injector board
5062-6421
A,T
Crystal bandwidth shorts (set of three)
5062-4855
A,T
3
Extender board, pin and socket, 60 contacts
4
Extender board, 22 pin edge connector, 44 contacts
5
6
Components Needed to Build One Crystal Short
6a
0.01 F capacitor
0160-4832
6b
90.0
resistor
0757-0400
6c
Square, single-connector terminal (two required)
1251-4182
6d
Two-terminal connector body
1251-0689
6e
3/16 inch dia. heat shrink tubing, 1 1/8 inches long
0890-0029
08555-20097
A,R
Combination wrench, 1/4 inch
8720-0014
R
Open end wrench, 15/64 inch, open end
8710-0946
R
7
Combination wrench, 5/16 inch, with slotted box end (two required)
8
9
10
Torque wrench, break-away, 10 inch-pounds, 5/16 inch, open end
40-60271 y
11
Cable puller, pry-bar style
5021-6773
A,T,R
12
Alignment tool, metal tip, plastic body
8710-0630
A,T
13
Alignment tool, nonmetallic tip, ber body
8710-0033
A,T
14
TORX hand driver with required T8 and T10 bits, included in TORX driver
kit with multiple bits (See tool-tip illustration)
8710-1426
A,R
R
*A = Adjustment, T = Troubleshooting, R = Replacement Procedure
y The part number provided is a non-HP part number. This tool can be ordered from:
Assembly Systems Inc.
16595 Englewood Avenue
Los Gatos, California 95032
(408) 395-5313
If you order a similar tool from your local supplier, it is important that the outside dimension of the
wrench be no wider than 0.518 inches. This allows the wrench to be used on semirigid cable
connectors in conned areas.
13-6
Service Equipment and Tools
Figure 13-1. Special Service Tools
Service Equipment and Tools
13-7
Table 13-6. Required Common Hand Tools
Description
Hex (Allen) wrench, 3mm
8710-1392
R
Hex (Allen) wrench, 4mm
8710-1755
A,R
Hex (Allen) wrench, no. 4
5020-0288
R
Hex (Allen) wrench, no. 6
5020-0289
R
Nut driver, 7mm
8710-1217
R
Nut driver, 3/8 inch
8720-0005
R
Nut driver, 5/16 inch
8720-0003
R
Nut driver, 7/16 inch
8720-0006
R
Nut driver, 9/16 inch, drilled out, end covered with heatshrink tubing to
protect front/rear-panel surface
8720-0008
R
Phillips Screwdriver, small no. 0
8710-0978
R
Posidriv screwdriver, small no. 1
8710-0899
A,R
Posidriv screwdriver, large no. 2
8710-0900
A,R
Long-nose pliers
8710-0003
R
Wire cutters
8710-0012
R
Wire strippers
8710-0058
R
* A = Adjustment, T = Troubleshooting, R = Replacement Procedure
13-8
HP Part Number Use*
Service Equipment and Tools
">